2018 Nissan Maxima | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information

2018 MAXIMA

OWNER’S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual was prepared to help you un- In addition to factory-installed options, Before driving your vehicle, please read this derstand the operation and maintenance your vehicle may also be equipped with Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many additional accessories installed by NISSAN familiarity with controls and maintenance miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. or by a NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is requirements assisting you in the safe op- Please read through this manual before recommended that you visit a NISSAN eration of your vehicle. operating your vehicle. dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is WARNING A separate Warranty Information Book- equipped. It is important that you familiar- let explains details about the warranties ize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance cautions and instructions concerning REMINDERS! and schedules” section of this manual proper use of such accessories prior to op- Follow these important driving rules to explains details about maintaining and erating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is servicing your vehicle. You will also re- help ensure a safe and comfortable trip recommended that you visit a NISSAN for you and your passengers! ceive a separate Customer Care/Lemon dealer for details concerning the particular Law Booklet (U.S. only) that will explain accessories with which your vehicle is ∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al- how to resolve any concerns you may equipped. cohol or drugs. have with your vehicle, and clarify your ∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits rights under your state’s lemon law. Ad- and never drive too fast for conditions. ditionally, you may receive a separate Navigation Manual (if so equipped) that ∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to will explain the various features and driving and avoid using vehicle fea- functions your system may have. tures or taking other actions that could distract you. A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have ∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap- any questions, they will be glad to assist propriate child restraint systems. Pre- you with the extensive resources available teen children should be seated in the to them. rear seat. ∙ ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. WHEN READING THE MANUAL

If you have questions concerning any infor- ∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual This manual includes information for all mation in your Owner’s Manual, contact for important safety information. features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your ve- NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact in- MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE hicle may vary depending on model, trim formation, refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER level, options selected, order, date of pro- CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s This vehicle should not be modified. duction, region or availability. Therefore, Manual. Modification could affect its you may find information about features or performance, safety, emissions or du- equipment that are not included or in- IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT rability and may even violate govern- stalled on your vehicle. THIS MANUAL mental regulations. In addition, dam- All information, specifications and illustra- You will see various symbols in this manual. age or performance problems tions in this manual are those in effect at They are used in the following ways: resulting from modifications may not the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the be covered under NISSAN warranties. right to change specifications, perfor- WARNING mance, design or component suppliers This is used to indicate the presence of WARNING without notice and without obligation. a hazard that could cause death or seri- From time to time, NISSAN may update or Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di- ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce revise this manual to provide Owners with agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the risk, the procedures must be fol- the most accurate information currently the port during normal driving, for ex- lowed precisely. ample remote insurance company available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, CAUTION telematics or engine reprogramming, to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac- may cause interference or damage to cess to accurate and up-to-date informa- This is used to indicate the presence of vehicle systems. We do not recommend tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver- a hazard that could cause minor or or endorse the use of any aftermarket sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any moderate personal injury or damage to OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically updates can also be found in the Owner your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war- section of the NISSAN website at the procedures must be followed ranty may not cover damage caused by https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ carefully. any aftermarket plug-in device. navigation/manualsGuide. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE WARNING ADVISORY

WARNING Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. Engine exhaust, some of its constitu- The following advisory is provided: “Per- ents, and certain vehicle components chlorate Material – special handling may contain or emit chemicals known to the apply. For additional information, refer State of California to cause cancer and to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ birth defects or other reproductive perchlorate/”. harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de- APD1005 fects or other reproductive harm. If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do Operating, servicing and maintaining a this” or “Do not let this happen.” passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, If you see a symbol similar to these in an phthalates, and lead, which are known illustration, it means the arrow points to to the State of California to cause can- the front of the vehicle. cer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid © 2017 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Arrows in an illustration that are similar to vehicle in a well-ventilated area and Manual may be reproduced or stored in a these indicate movement or action. wear gloves or wash your hands fre- retrieval system, or transmitted in any quently when servicing your vehicle. form, or by any means, electronic, me- Arrows in an illustration that are similar to For more information go to chanical, photocopying, recording or oth- these call attention to an item in the illus- www.P65Warnings.ca.gov. erwise, without the prior written permis- tration. sion of Nissan North America, Inc. NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES . . . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to NISSAN with the informa- NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or for the following information: tion at: you would like to provide NISSAN directly – Your name, address, and telephone For U.S. customers with comments or questions, please con- number Nissan North America, Inc. tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- Consumer Affairs Department ment using our toll-free number: – Vehicle identification number (attached P.O. Box 685003 to the top of the instrument panel on the For U.S. customers Franklin, TN 37068-5003 driver’s side) 1-800-NISSAN-1 or via e-mail at: (1-800-647-7261) – Date of purchase [email protected] For Canadian customers For Canadian customers – Current odometer reading Nissan Canada Inc. 1-800-387-0122 – Your NISSAN dealer’s name 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 – Your comments or questions or via e-mail at: OR [email protected] If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. Table of Illustrated table of contents 0 Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Do-it-yourself 8

Maintenance and schedules 9

Technical and consumer information 10

Index 11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ...... 0-2 Instrument Panel ...... 0-6 Exterior front ...... 0-3 Engine compartment check locations...... 0-8 Exterior rear ...... 0-4 Warning and indicator lights ...... 0-9 Passenger compartment...... 0-5 AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-21) 2. Rear head restraints/headrests (P. 1-7) 3. Rear seat belts (P. 1-11) 4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags (P. 1-42) 6. Front head restraints/headrests (P. 1-7) 7. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-11, 1-42) 8. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-42) 9. Door pressure sensor (passenger side shown, driver’s side similar) (P. 1-42) 10. Seats (P. 1-2) 11. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) (P.1-42) 12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system (P. 1-21) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2293 0-2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Engine hood (P. 3-22) 2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-42) 3. Windshield (P. 8-16) 4. Power windows (P. 2-60) 5. Door locks (P. 3-4) NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-6) Keys (P. 3-2) 6. Mirrors (P. 3-29) Side view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11) 7. Tire pressure (P. 8-26) Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-26) 8. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-45) Daytime running light system (P. 2-45) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-23) 9. Fog light switch (P. 2-45) 10. Front sonar sensors (if so equipped) (P. 5-88) 11. Front view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2442 Illustrated table of contents 0-3 EXTERIOR REAR

1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-45) 2. High-mounted stop light (P. 8-23) 3. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-22) Trunk lid (P. 3-22) 4. Exterior trunk lid release/request button (P. 3-6) Rearview camera (P. 4-3, 4-11) 5. Rear sonar sensors (if so equipped) (P. 5-88) 6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-23) 7. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-24) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2) 8. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-4) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2443 0-4 Illustrated table of contents PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. Interior trunk access (P. 1-2) 2. Power moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-63) 3. Sun visors (P. 3-28) 4. Map lights (P. 2-66) 5. Rearview mirror (P. 3-29) HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (P. 2-68) 6. Glove box (P. 2-55) 7. Cup holders (P. 2-55) 8. Console box (P. 2-55) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2444 Illustrated table of contents 0-5 INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Vent (P. 4-27) 2. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch (P. 2-45) 3. Supplemental front-impact air bag (P. 1-42) Horn (P. 2-49) 4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-8) Vehicle information display (P. 2-16) 5. Paddle shifters (if so equipped) (P. 5-16) 6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-42) 7. Audio controls* Navigation controls* 8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 9. Navigation display* Audio display* 10. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 11. Glove box (P. 2-55) 12. Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-42) 13. AUX input/USB port* 14. Heater and air conditioning controls (P. 4-29) 15. Shift lever (P. 5-16) 16. Display Commander* LII2445 0-6 Illustrated table of contents 17. Push-button ignition switch Refer to the page number indicated in (P. 5-11) parentheses for operating details. 18. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System* Cruise control switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-41) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-43) 19. Tilt and telescopic steering (P. 3-26) 20. Audio control switches* Vehicle information display control switches (P. 2-16) 21. Hood release (P. 3-22) 22. Fuse box (P. 8-18) 23. Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-52) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-53) Trunk release switch (P. 3-22) Rear power sunshade switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-65) 24. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-45) Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-5) *: Refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

VQ35DE engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4) 2. Drive belt location (P. 8-14) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6) 4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-10) 5. Air cleaner (P. 8-15) 6. Fuse box (P. 8-18) 7. Fuse box/Fusible links (P. 8-18) 8. Fusible links (P. 8-18) 9. Battery (P. 8-12) 10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-6) 11. Radiator cap (P. 8-4) 12. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-10) 13. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-11) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI2749 0-8 Illustrated table of contents WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page light light light

Anti-lock Braking 2-9 Master warning 2-12 Malfunction Indi- 2-14 System (ABS) light cator Light (MIL) or warning light Power steering 2-12 Security indicator 2-15 warning light light

Automatic Emer- 2-9 Seat belt warning 2-13 light and chime Side light and 2-15 gency Braking headlight indica- (AEB) system Supplemental air 2-13 tor light (green) warning light bag warning light Slip indicator light 2-15 Brake warning 2-9 light (parking Indicator Name Page brake) light Turn signal/ 2-15 Brake warning 2-9 Front fog light 2-13 hazard indicator light indicator light lights (green) Charge warning 2-10 Vehicle Dynamic 2-15 light Front passenger 2-14 Control (VDC) OFF air bag status indicator light Engine oil pres- 2-10 light sure warning light High beam indi- 2-14 Low tire pressure 2-10 cator light (blue) warning light

Illustrated table of contents 0-9 MEMO

0-10 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats...... 1-2 Child safety...... 1-19 Front power seat adjustment...... 1-3 Infants ...... 1-19 Folding rear seat ...... 1-5 Small children ...... 1-20 Center armrest...... 1-6 Larger children ...... 1-20 Head restraints/headrests ...... 1-7 Child restraints ...... 1-21 Adjustable head restraint/headrest Precautions on child restraints ...... 1-21 components ...... 1-8 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Non-adjustable head restraint/ CHildren) system ...... 1-24 headrest components...... 1-8 Rear-facing child restraint installation Remove...... 1-8 using LATCH...... 1-26 Install...... 1-9 Rear-facing child restraint installation Adjust ...... 1-9 using the seat belts ...... 1-28 Seatbelts...... 1-11 Forward-facing child restraint Precautions on seat belt usage...... 1-11 installation using LATCH ...... 1-31 Seat belt warning light...... 1-14 Forward-facing child restraint Pregnant women...... 1-14 installation using the seat belts...... 1-34 Injured persons...... 1-14 Booster seats ...... 1-39 Three-point type seat belt with Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...... 1-42 retractor...... 1-14 Precautions on SRS...... 1-42 Seat belt extenders...... 1-18 Supplemental air bag warning labels ...... 1-59 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-18 Supplemental air bag warning light...... 1-60 SEATS

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. ∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss ARS1152 of control of the vehicle. ∙ The seatback should not be reclined WARNING properly. For additional information, any more than needed for comfort. refer to “Precautions on seat belt us- ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when Seat belts are most effective when the age” in this section. the seatback is reclined. This can be passenger sits well back and straight dangerous. The shoulder belt will not ∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the up in the seat. If the seatback is re- be against your body. In an accident, seat to make sure it is securely locked. clined, the risk of sliding under the lap you could be thrown into it and re- belt and being injured is increased. ∙ Do not leave children unattended in- ceive neck or other serious injuries. side the vehicle. They could unknow- You could also slide under the lap belt ingly activate switches or controls or CAUTION and receive serious internal injuries. make the vehicle move. Unattended When adjusting the seat positions, be ∙ For the most effective protection children could become involved in se- sure not to contact any moving parts to when the vehicle is in motion, the seat rious accidents. avoid possible injuries and/or damage. should be upright. Always sit well ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death back and upright in the seat with both through unintended operation of the feet on the floor and adjust the seat

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Reclining Move the recline switch as shown until the desired angle is obtained. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).

LRS2692 FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT Forward and backward Operating tips Moving the switch as shown will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired ∙ The power seat motor has an auto- position. reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch. ∙ Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. For additional information, refer to “Auto- matic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 LRS2693 LRS2938 LRS2669 Driver’s seat Passenger’s seat Lumbar support (if so equipped Seat lifter (for driver’s seat and if for driver’s seat) so equipped for passenger’s seat) The lumbar support feature provides ad- Move the switch as shown to adjust the justable lower back support to the driver. angle (if so equipped) and height of the Push the switch as shown to adjust the seat cushion. seat lumbar area.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1. Move the front passenger seat to the most forward position. 2. Open the access cover on the rear parcel shelf. 3. Push down on the button ᭺1 on the rear parcel shelf. 4. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback ᭺2 .

WARNING ∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it LRS2666 is in the fold-down position. Use of Thigh extension (if so equipped these areas by passengers without for driver’s seat) proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or Pull up and hold the lever to extend the sudden stop. front portion to the desired position. ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher LRS2691 than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could FOLDING REAR SEAT cause personal injury. Interior trunk access The trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 ∙ When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. ∙ Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys. LRS2168 LRS2978 To fold down either side of the rear seat, CENTER ARMREST open the trunk and pull on the strap ᭺1 . To use the center armrest on the rear seat, For additional information, refer to “Interior pull on the tab in the center of the seat and trunk access” in the “Pre-driving checks fold it down as shown. and adjustments” section of this manual.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

WARNING ∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) Head restraints/headrests supplement to lock them in a desired adjustment the other vehicle safety systems. They position. may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end colli- ∙ The non-adjustable head sions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests have a single lock- restraints/headrests must be adjusted ing notch to secure them to the seat properly, as specified in this section. frame. Check the adjustment after someone ∙ Proper Adjustment: else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest – For the adjustable type, align the stalks or remove the head head restraint/headrest so the cen- restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat ter of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head if the head restraint/headrest has been LRS2695 removed. If the head restraint/headrest restraint/headrest. The illustration shows the seating posi- was removed, reinstall and properly ad- – If your ear position is still higher than tions equipped with head just the head restraint/headrest before the recommended alignment, place restraints/headrests. an occupant uses the seating position. the head restraint/headrest at the Failure to follow these instructions can ᭡ Indicates the seating position is highest position. reduce the effectiveness of the head equipped with a head restraint. restraints/headrests. This may in- ∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been crease the risk of serious injury or death Ⅲ Indicates the seating position is equipped removed, ensure that it is reinstalled in a collision. with a headrest. and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position. + Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable). ∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 LRS2300 LRS2299 LRS2302 ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD REMOVE HEADREST COMPONENTS RESTRAINT/HEADREST Use the following procedure to remove the 1. Removable head restraint/headrest COMPONENTS head restraint/headrest: 2. Multiple notches 1. Removable head restraint/headrest 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position. 3. Lock knob 2. Single notch 4. Stalks 3. Lock knob 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 4. Stalks 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 INSTALL ADJUST 1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks For adjustable head restraint/headrest with the holes in the seat. Make sure that Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the the head restraint/headrest is facing the center is level with the center of your ears. If correct direction. The stalk with the your ear position is still higher than the notch (notches) ᭺1 must be installed in recommended alignment, place the head the hole with the lock knob ᭺2 . restraint/headrest at the highest position. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 LRS2351 LRS2305 LRS2306 For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest Raise Lower Make sure the head restraint/headrest is To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it To lower, push and hold the lock knob and positioned so the lock knob is engaged in up. push the head restraint/headrest down. the notch before riding in that designated seating position. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated the notch before riding in that designated seating position. seating position.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SEAT BELTS

SSS0136 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces USAGE or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being If you are wearing your seat belt properly driven. adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 SSS0134 SSS0016 WARNING WARNING ∙ Every person who drives or rides in ∙ The seat belt should be properly ad- this vehicle should use a seat belt at justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so all times. Children should be in the may reduce the effectiveness of the rear seats and in an appropriate entire restraint system and increase restraint. the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- ∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have curely fastened to the proper buckle. activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the ∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or retractor. It is recommended that you twisted. Doing so may reduce its visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. effectiveness. ∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re- ∙ Do not allow more than one person to tractors and attaching hardware, use the same seat belt. should be inspected after any colli- ∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle sion. It is recommended that you visit than there are seat belts. a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ If the seat belt warning light glows NISSAN recommends that all seat belt continuously while the ignition is assemblies in use during a collision be placed in the ON position with all replaced unless the collision was mi- SSS0014 doors closed and all seat belts fas- nor and the belts show no damage tened, it may indicate a malfunction in and continue to operate properly. WARNING the system. Have the system checked. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected ∙ Always route the shoulder belt over It is recommended that you visit a and replaced if either damage or im- your shoulder and across your chest. NISSAN dealer for this service. proper operation is noted. Never put the belt behind your back, ∙ No changes should be made to the under your arm or across your neck. seat belt system. For example, do not ∙ All child restraints and attaching The belt should be away from your modify the seat belt, add material, or hardware should be inspected after face and neck, but not falling off your install devices that may change the any collision. Always follow the re- shoulder. seat belt routing or tension. Doing so straint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recom- ∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug may affect the operation of the seat mendations. The child restraints as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT belt system. Modifying or tampering should be replaced if they are THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high with the seat belt system may result damaged. could increase the risk of internal inju- in serious personal injury. ries in an accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 minders” in the “Instruments and controls” ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when section of this manual. the seatback is reclined. This can be PREGNANT WOMEN dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, NISSAN recommends that pregnant you could be thrown into it and re- women use seat belts. The seat belt should ceive neck or other serious injuries. be worn snug and always position the lap You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your ∙ For the most effective protection shoulder and across your chest. Never run when the vehicle is in motion, the seat the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal should be upright. Always sit well area. Contact your doctor for specific rec- back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat ommendations. belt properly. LRS0786 INJURED PERSONS ∙ Do not allow children to play with the SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT seat belts. Most seating positions are NISSAN recommends that injured persons equipped with Automatic Locking Re- Both the driver’s and passenger’s front use seat belts. Check with your doctor for tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seats are equipped with a seat belt warn- specific recommendations. seat belt becomes wrapped around a ing light. The warning light, located on the child’s neck with the ALR mode acti- instrument panel, will show the status of THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT vated, the child can be seriously in- the driver and passenger seat belt. WITH RETRACTOR jured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur NOTE: WARNING even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the The front passenger seat belt warning ∙ Every person who drives or rides in seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is light will not light up if the seat is not this vehicle should use a seat belt at already unbuckled, release the child occupied. all times. Children should be in the by cutting the seat belt with a suitable rear seats and in an appropriate tool (such as a knife or scissors) to For additional information, refer to “Warn- restraint. release the seat belt. ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2692 LRS2674 Front seat shown 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re- Fastening the seat belts tractor and insert the tongue into the buckle ᭺A until you hear and feel the 1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa- latch engage. tion, refer to “Seats” in this section. ∙ The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. ∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex- WARNING tend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement When fastening the seat belts, be cer- in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt tain that the seatbacks are completely when the vehicle slows down rapidly or secured in the latched position. If they during certain impacts. are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks stop. the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt LRS2675 fully retracts. For additional information, re- 3. Position the lap belt portion low and fer to “Child restraints” in this section. snug on the hips ᭺B as shown. The ALR mode should be used only for 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward child restraint installation. During nor- the retractor to take up extra slack ᭺C . mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over mode should not be activated. If it is ac- your shoulder and across your chest. tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat The front passenger seat and the rear belt tension. It can also change the op- seating positions three-point seat belts eration of the front passenger air bag. have two modes of operation: For additional information, refer to ∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. ∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows: ∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service or to learn more about seat belt operation.

WRS0139 LRS0242 Unfastening the seat belts Shoulder belt height adjustment To unfasten the seat belt, press the button (front seats) on the buckle ᭺1 . The seat belt automati- The shoulder belt anchor height should be cally retracts. adjusted to the position best for you. For Checking seat belt operation additional information, refer to “Precau- tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To Seat belt retractors are designed to lock adjust, pull out the adjustment button ᭺1 seat belt movement by two separate and move the shoulder belt anchor to the methods: desired position ᭺2 , so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should ∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from be away from your face and neck, but not the retractor falling off your shoulder. Release the ad- ∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly justment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 WARNING WARNING ∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the ∙ After adjustment, release the adjust- ∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the ment button and try to move the made by the same company which shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry shoulder belt anchor up and down to made the original equipment seat cloth. make sure it is securely fixed in belts, should be used with NISSAN position. seat belts. ∙ Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such ∙ The shoulder belt anchor height ∙ Adults and children who can use the as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible should be adjusted to the position standard seat belt should not use an wires and anchors, work properly. If best for you. Failure to do so may re- extender. Such unnecessary use loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other duce the effectiveness of the entire could result in serious personal injury damage on the webbing is found, the restraint system and increase the in the event of an accident. entire seat belt assembly should be re- chance or severity of injury in an ∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in- placed. accident. stall child restraints. If the child re- SEAT BELT EXTENDERS straint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or If, because of body size or driving position, it killed in a collision or a sudden stop. is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE that is compatible with the installed seat ∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply belts is available for purchase. The ex- a mild soap solution or any solution rec- tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) ommended for cleaning upholstery or of length and may be used for either the carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow driver or front passenger seating position. the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN allow the seat belts to retract until they dealer for assistance with purchasing an are completely dry. extender if an extender is required.

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CHILD SAFETY

WARNING ∙ Forward-facing child restraints A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An- Do not allow children to play with the ∙ Booster seats chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or seat belts. Most seating positions are The proper restraint depends on the child’s with the vehicle seat belt. For additional equipped with Automatic Locking Re- size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year information, refer to “Child restraints” in this tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed section. belt becomes wrapped around a child’s in rear-facing child restraints. Forward- neck with the ALR mode activated, the NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens facing child restraints are available for chil- child can be seriously injured or killed if and children be restrained in the rear dren who outgrow rear-facing child re- the seat belt retracts and becomes seat. Studies show that children are tight. This can occur even if the vehicle straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster safer when properly restrained in the is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re- seats are used to help position a vehicle rear seat than in the front seat. lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be This is especially important because unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re- longer use a forward-facing child restraint. your vehicle has a supplemental release the child by cutting the seat belt straint system (air bag system) for the with a suitable tool (such as a knife or WARNING front passenger. For additional informa- scissors) to release the seat belt. Infants and children need special pro- tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in this section. Children need adults to help protect them. tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not They need to be properly restrained. fit them properly.The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The INFANTS In addition to the general information in lap belt may not fit over their small hip Infants up to at least 1 year old should be this manual, child safety information is bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- placed in a rear-facing child restraint. available from many other sources, includ- ting seat belt could cause serious or fa- NISSAN recommends that infants be ing doctors, teachers, government traffic tal injury. Always use appropriate child placed in child restraints that comply with safety offices, and community organiza- restraints. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. tions. Every child is different, so be sure to All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or learn the best way to transport your child. You should choose a child restraint that fits territories require the use of approved child your vehicle and always follow the manu- There are three basic types of child re- restraints for infants and small children. For facturer’s instructions for installation and straint systems: additional information, refer to “Child re- use. ∙ Rear-facing child restraints straints” in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 SMALL CHILDREN LARGER CHILDREN A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below: Children that are over 1 year old and weigh Children should remain in a forward-facing at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a child restraint with a harness until they ∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the rear-facing child restraint as long as pos- reach the maximum height or weight limit vehicle seatback? sible up to the height or weight limit of the allowed by the child restraint manufac- ∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch- child restraint. Children who outgrow the turer. ing? height or weight limit of the rear-facing Once a child outgrows the height or weight child restraint and are at least 1 year old ∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over limit of the harness-equipped forward- should be secured in a forward-facing child the front edge of the seat with feet flat facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu- on the floor? that the child be placed in a commercially facturer’s instructions for minimum and available booster seat to obtain proper ∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt maximum weight and height recommen- seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the (lap belt low and snug across the hips dations. NISSAN recommends that small booster seat should raise the child so that and shoulder belt across mid-chest children be placed in child restraints that the shoulder belt is properly positioned and shoulder)? comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety across the chest and the top, middle por- Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle ∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad- tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt Safety Standards. You should choose a justed head restraint/headrest? should not cross the neck or face and child restraint that fits your vehicle and al- should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt ∙ Will the child be able to stay in position ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc- should lie snugly across the lower hips or for the entire ride? tions for installation and use. upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

LRS2690 ARS1098 If you answered no to any of these ques- PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD tions, the child should remain in a booster RESTRAINTS seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE: WARNING Laws in some communities may follow ∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in- different guidelines. Check local and structions for proper use and installa- state regulations to confirm your child is tion of child restraints could result in using the correct restraint system before serious injury or death of a child or traveling. other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 seat. Studies show that children not be properly installed using the are safer when properly restrained damaged anchorage, and a child in the rear seat than in the front could be seriously injured or killed seat. If you must install a forward- in a collision. facing child restraint in the front – Never use the anchor points for seat, refer to “Forward-facing child adult seat belts, or other items. restraint installation using the seat belts” in this section. – A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the – Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air front passenger seat. Bag System, never install a rear- facing child restraint in the front – Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- seat. An inflating air bag could se- sible after fitting the child riously injure or kill a child. A rear- restraint. WRS0256 facing child restraint must only be – Infants and children should always used in the rear seat. be placed in an appropriate child – The child restraint must be used – Be sure to purchase a child re- restraint while in the vehicle. and installed properly. Always fol- straint that will fit the child and ve- low all of the child restraint manu- ∙ When the child restraint is not in use, hicle. Some child restraints may facturer’s instructions for installa- keep it secured with the LATCH system not fit properly in your vehicle. tion and use. or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col- – Child restraint anchorages are de- lision, loose objects can injure occu- – Infants and children should never signed to withstand only those pants or damage the vehicle. be held on anyone’s lap. Even the loads imposed by correctly fitted strongest adult cannot resist the child restraints. Under no circum- forces of a collision. CAUTION stances are they to be used to at- – Do not put a seat belt around both tach adult seat belts, or other items A child restraint in a closed vehicle can a child and another passenger. or equipment to the vehicle. Doing become very hot. Check the seating so could damage the child restraint surface and buckles before placing a – NISSAN recommends that all child anchorages. The child restraint will child in the child restraint. restraints be installed in the rear

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system This vehicle is equipped with a universal ∙ If the child restraint is compatible with All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or child restraint anchor system, referred to your vehicle, place your child in the child territories require that infants and small as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers restraint and check the various adjust- children be restrained in an approved for CHildren) system. Some child restraints ments to be sure the child restraint is child restraint at all times while the ve- include rigid or webbing-mounted attach- compatible with your child. Choose a hicle is being operated. Canadian law re- ments that can be connected to these an- child restraint that is designed for your quires the top tether strap on forward- chors. For additional information, refer to child’s height and weight. Always follow facing child restraints be secured to the “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for all recommended procedures. designated anchor point on the vehicle. CHildren) system” in this section. ∙ If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs. If you do not have a LATCH compatible (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be anchors or the seat belt to install the used. child restraint (not both at the same Several manufacturers offer child re- time). straints for infants and children of various ∙ If the combined weight of the child and sizes. When selecting any child restraint, child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. keep the following points in mind: (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not ∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer- the lower anchors) to install the child tifying that it complies with Federal Mo- restraint. tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana- ∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. manufacturer’s instructions for installation. ∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 install the child restraint. Be sure to follow – Inspect the lower anchors by in- the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- serting your fingers into the lower tions for installation. anchor area. Feel to make sure The LATCH anchor points are provided to there are no obstructions over the install child restraints in the rear outboard anchors such as seat belt webbing seating positions only. Do not attempt to or seat cushion material. The child install a child restraint in the center position restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are using the LATCH anchors. obstructed. LATCH lower anchor Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads WARNING imposed by correctly fitted child re- Failure to follow the warnings and in- straints. Under no circumstances are LRS2979 structions for proper use and installa- they to be used to attach adult seat LATCH system lower anchor locations tion of child restraints could result in belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the LATCH (Lower Anchors and serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or child restraint anchorages. The child re- Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM collision: straint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a Your vehicle is equipped with special an- – Attach LATCH system compatible child could be seriously injured or killed chor points that are used with LATCH sys- child restraints only at the loca- in a collision. tem compatible child restraints. This sys- tions shown in the illustration. tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys- – Do not secure a child restraint in tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat the center rear seating position us- belt to secure the child restraint unless the ing the LATCH lower anchors. The combined weight of the child and child re- child restraint will not be secured straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- properly. bined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to 1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0700 LRS0661 LRS0662 LATCH lower anchor location LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment LATCH lower anchor location Installing child restraint LATCH When installing a child restraint, carefully lower anchor attachments read and follow the instructions in this The LATCH lower anchors are located as manual and those supplied with the child shown. A label is attached to the seatback LATCH compatible child restraints include restraint. to help you locate the LATCH lower an- two rigid or webbing-mounted attach- chors. ments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 The child restraint top tether strap must be Follow these steps to install a rear-facing used when installing the child restraint with child restraint using the LATCH system: the LATCH lower anchor attachments or 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. seat belts. For additional information, refer Always follow the child restraint manu- to “Installing top tether strap” in this sec- facturer’s instructions. tion. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Anchor points ᭺1 are located on the rear parcel shelf. LRS0243 REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT Top tether anchor point locations INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, refer to all Warn- WARNING ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and Child restraint anchorages are de- “Child restraints” sections of this manual signed to withstand only those loads before installing a child restraint. imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are Do not use the lower anchors if the com- they to be used to attach adult seat bined weight of the child and the child re- belts, or other items or equipment to straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child re- bined weight of the child and the child straint will not be properly installed us- restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use ing the damaged anchorage, and a the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- child could be seriously injured or killed chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure in a collision. to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. 1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0801 WRS0802 LRS0673 Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing – step 3 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- 3. For child restraints that are equipped tachments to the LATCH lower an- with webbing-mounted attachments, chors. Check to make sure the LATCH remove any additional slack from the attachment is properly attached to the anchor attachments. Press downward lower anchors. and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not Do not use the lower anchors if the com- all child restraints fit in all types of ve- bined weight of the child and the child re- hicles. straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child 5. Check to make sure the child restraint restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use is properly secured prior to each use. If the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- the child restraint is loose, repeat chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure steps 1 through 4. to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT instructions for installation. INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT Follow these steps to install a rear-facing BELTS child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats: WARNING LRS0674 The three-point seat belt with Auto- Rear-facing – step 4 matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be 4. After attaching the child restraint, test used when installing a child restraint. it before you place the child in it. Push it Failure to use the ALR mode will result in from side to side while holding the child the child restraint not being properly restraint near the LATCH attachment secured. The restraint could tip over or path. The child restraint should not be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and For additional information, refer to all Warn- check to see if the LATCH attachment ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and holds the restraint in place. If the re- “Child restraints” sections of this manual straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH before installing a child restraint. attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using 1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0256 WRS0761 LRS2395 Rear-facing – step 1 Rear-facing – step 2 Rear-facing – step 3 1. Child restraints for infants must be 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is used in the rear-facing direction and child restraint and insert it into the fully extended. At this time, the seat belt therefore must not be used in the buckle until you hear and feel the latch retractor is in the ALR mode (child re- front seat. Position the child restraint engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for mode when the seat belt is fully restraint manufacturer’s instructions. belt routing. tracted.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 LRS2396 WRS0762 LRS2397 Rear-facing – step 4 Rear-facing – step 5 Rear-facing – step 6 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 5. Remove any additional slack from the 6. After attaching the child restraint, test the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear- it before you place the child in it. Push it in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child from side to side while holding the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat restraint near the seat belt path. The cushion and seatback while pulling up child restraint should not move more on the seat belt. than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 7. Check to make sure that the child re- Follow these steps to install a forward- straint is properly secured prior to each facing child restraint using the LATCH sys- use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat tem: steps 1 through 6. 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. After the child restraint is removed and the Always follow the child restraint manu- seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode facturer’s instructions. (child restraint mode) is canceled. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections of this manual WRS0799 before installing a child restraint. Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2 Do not use the lower anchors if the com- 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- bined weight of the child and the child re- tachments to the LATCH lower an- straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- chors. Check to make sure the LATCH bined weight of the child and the child attachment is properly attached to the restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use lower anchors. the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- If the child restraint is equipped with a chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure top tether strap, route the top tether to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s strap and secure the tether strap to instructions for installation. the tether anchor point. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section. If the seating position does not have WRS0800 an adjustable head restraint/headrest LRS0671 Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 and it is interfering with the proper Forward-facing – step 4 Do not install child restraints that re- child restraint fit, try another seating 4. For child restraints that are equipped quire the use of a top tether strap in position or a different child restraint. with webbing-mounted attachments, seating positions that do not have a remove any additional slack from the top tether anchor. anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments. 5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

WRS0697 LRS2671 Forward-facing – step 6 Rear seats 6. After attaching the child restraint, test ᭺1 Top tether strap it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child ᭺2 Anchor point restraint near the LATCH attachment Installing top tether strap path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from The child restraint top tether strap must be side to side. Try to tug it forward and used when installing the child restraint with check to see if the LATCH attachment the LATCH lower anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH First, secure the child restraint with the attachment as necessary, or put the LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard posi- restraint in another seat and test it tions only). again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 Rear bench seat WARNING FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING 1. Remove the head restraint/headrest Child restraint anchorages are de- and store it in a secure place. Be sure to signed to withstand only those loads THE SEAT BELTS reinstall the head restraint/headrest imposed by correctly fitted child re- when the child restraint is removed. For straints. Under no circumstances are WARNING additional information, refer to “Head they to be used to attach adult seat The three-point seat belt with Auto- restraints/headrests” in this section. belts, or other items or equipment to matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be the vehicle. Doing so could damage the 2. Position the top tether strap ᭺1 as used when installing a child restraint. child restraint anchorages. The child re- shown. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in straint will not be properly installed us- the child restraint not being properly 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether ing the damaged anchorage, and a secured. The restraint could tip over or anchor point ᭺2 as shown. child could be seriously injured or killed be loose and cause injury to a child in a in a collision. sudden stop or collision. Also, it can 4. Tighten the tether strap according to change the operation of the front pas- the manufacturer’s instructions to re- senger air bag. For additional informa- move any slack. tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag If you have any questions when install- and status light” in this section. ing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Follow these steps to install a forward- If the seating position does not have facing child restraint using the vehicle seat an adjustable head restraint/headrest belt in the rear seats or in the front passen- and it is interfering with the proper ger seat: child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. 1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. WRS0699 Always follow the child restraint manu- Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – facturer’s instructions. step 1 For additional information, refer to all Warn- The back of the child restraint should ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and be secured against the vehicle seat- “Child restraints” sections of this manual back. before installing a child restraint. If necessary, adjust or remove the head Do not use the lower anchors if the com- restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- bined weight of the child and the child re- rect child restraint fit. If the head straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- restraint/headrest is removed, store it bined weight of the child and the child in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the head restraint/headrest when the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- the child restraint is removed. For ad- chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure ditional information, refer to “Head to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s restraints/headrests” in this section. instructions for installation. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

WRS0680 LRS0667 Forward-facing – step 3 Forward-facing – step 4 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is child restraint and insert it into the fully extended. At this time, the seat belt buckle until you hear and feel the latch retractor is in the ALR mode (child re- engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode straint manufacturer’s instructions for when the seat belt is fully retracted. belt routing. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section.

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0668 WRS0681 WRS0698 Forward-facing – step 5 Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing – step 8 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 6. Remove any additional slack from the 8. After attaching the child restraint, test the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear- it before you place the child in it. Push it in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child from side to side while holding the child restraint with your knee to compress restraint near the seat belt path. The the vehicle seat cushion and seatback child restraint should not move more while pulling up on the seat belt. than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. 7. Tighten the tether strap according to Try to tug it forward and check to see if the manufacturer’s instructions to re- the belt holds the restraint in place. If move any slack. the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

WRS0475 LRS2671 Forward-facing – step 10 Rear seats 10. If the child restraint is installed in the ᭺1 Top tether strap front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front ᭺2 Anchor point passenger air bag status light Installing top tether strap should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, refer to "Front passenger air The child restraint top tether strap must be bag and status light" in this section. used when installing the child restraint with Move the child restraint to another seat belts. seating position. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you First, secure the child restraint with the seat visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. belt. After the child restraint is removed and the Rear bench seat seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. 1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to 1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system reinstall the head restraint/headrest BOOSTER SEATS when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head For additional information on installing a restraints/headrests” in this section. booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section. 2. Position the top tether strap ᭺1 as shown. Precautions on booster seats 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether WARNING anchor point ᭺2 as shown. If a booster seat and seat belt are not 4. Tighten the tether strap according to used properly, the risk of a child being the manufacturer’s instructions to re- injured or killed in a sudden stop or col- move any slack. lision greatly increases: If you have any questions when install- – Make sure the shoulder portion of ing a top tether strap, it is recommended the belt is away from the child’s LRS2479 that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details. face and neck and the lap portion A. Low back booster seat of the belt does not cross the B. High back booster seat WARNING stomach. Child restraint anchorages are de- – Make sure the shoulder belt is not signed to withstand only those loads behind the child or under the imposed by correctly fitted child re- child’s arm. straints. Under no circumstances are – A booster seat must only be in- they to be used to attach adult seat stalled in a seating position that belts, or other items or equipment to has a lap/shoulder belt. the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 ∙ If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats LRS0453 LRS0464 or the front passenger seat. Booster seats of various sizes are offered ∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop- by several manufacturers. When selecting erly supported by the booster seat or Booster seat installation any booster seat, keep the following points vehicle seat. The seatback must be at in mind: or above the center of the child’s ears. WARNING For example, if a low back booster seat ∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label To avoid injury to child, do not use the is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be certifying that it complies with Federal lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic at or above the center of the child’s ears. Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us- If the seatback is lower than the center Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- ing a booster seat with the seat belts. of the child’s ears, a high back booster dard 213. seat should be used. For additional information, refer to all Warn- ∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle ings and Cautions in the “Child safety,” to be sure it is compatible with the vehi- “Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec- cle’s seat and seat belt system. tions of this manual before installing a child restraint.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

WRS0699 LRS0454 1. If you must install a booster seat in Front passenger position the front seat, move the seat to the 3. The booster seat should be positioned rearmost position. on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. If necessary, adjust or remove the head Only place it in a front-facing direction. restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- Always follow the booster seat manu- rect booster seat fit. If the head facturer’s instructions. restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

If the seating position does not have PRECAUTIONS ON SRS an adjustable head restraint/headrest This SRS section contains important infor- and it is interfering with the proper mation concerning the following systems: booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. ∙ Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad- 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be vanced Air Bag System) sure to follow the booster seat manu- ∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact facturer’s instructions for adjusting the supplemental air bag seat belt routing. ∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the rollover supplemental air bag seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder ∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front belt is positioned across the top, WRS0475 seats) middle portion of the child’s shoulder. 7. If the booster seat is installed in the Supplemental front-impact air bag sys- Be sure to follow the booster seat front passenger seat, place the ignition tem manufacturer’s instructions for adjust- switch in the ON position. The front pas- ing the seat belt routing. senger air bag status light may or The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in- may not illuminate, depending on the help cushion the impact force to the head structions for properly fastening a seat size of the child and the type of booster and chest of the driver and front passenger belt shown in “Three-point type seat seat being used. For additional infor- in certain frontal collisions. belt with retractor” in this section. mation, refer to “Front passenger air Front seat-mounted side-impact bag and status light” in this section. supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. 1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time. The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should al- WRS0031 ways be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the WARNING ∙ The seat belts and the front air bags steering wheel, instrument panel and door are most effective when you are sit- ∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not ting well back and upright in the seat. finishers. For additional information, refer inflate in the event of a side impact, to “Seat belts” in this section. The front air bags inflate with great rear impact, rollover, or lower severity force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced The supplemental air bags operate only frontal collision. Always wear your Air Bag System, if you are unre- when the ignition switch is placed in the seat belts to help reduce the risk or strained, leaning forward, sitting side- ON position. severity of injury in various kinds of ways or out of position in any way, you accidents are at greater risk of injury or death in After placing the ignition switch in the a crash. You may also receive serious ON position, the supplemental air bag ∙ The front passenger air bag will not or fatal injuries from the front air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- inflate if the passenger air bag status if you are up against it when it inflates. mental air bag warning light will turn off light is lit. For additional information, Always sit back against the seatback after about 7 seconds if the system is refer to “Front passenger air bag and and as far away as practical from the operational. status light” in this section. steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 ∙ The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. ∙ The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under ARS1133 some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. ∙ Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043 WARNING WARNING ∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or ∙ Children may be severely injured or extend their hands or face out of the killed when the front air bags, side air window. Do not attempt to hold them bags or curtain air bags inflate if they in your lap or arms. Some examples of are not properly restrained. Pre-teens dangerous riding positions are shown and children should be properly re- in the illustrations. strained in the rear seat, if possible.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046 WARNING ∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear- facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING ∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their WRS0431 hand out of the window or lean WRS0032 against the door. Some examples of WARNING dangerous riding positions are shown WARNING in the previous illustrations. Front seat-mounted side-impact ∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not supplemental air bags and roof- hold onto the seatback of the front mounted curtain side-impact and roll- seat. If the side air bag inflates, you over supplemental air bags: may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who ∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags should always be properly restrained. ordinarily will not inflate in the event Some examples of dangerous riding of a frontal impact, rear impact, or positions are shown in the lower severity side collision. Always illustrations. wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various ∙ Do not use seat covers on the front kinds of accidents. seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47 SSS0162 SSS0159

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 5. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules 6. Crash zone sensor 7. Occupant classification system control unit 8. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) 9. Seat belt buckle switches for driver’s and front passenger’s side 10. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) 11. Side satellite sensor

WARNING To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem, please observe the following items. ∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear LRS2788 bench seats to push or pull on the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System 2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact seatback pocket. and rollover supplemental air bags (front seats) ∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than 3. Front seat-mounted side-impact 1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head supplemental air bag modules and rollover supplemental air bag infla- restraint or in the seatback pocket. tors 4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49 ∙ Make sure that there is nothing press- ∙ If you notice that the front passenger The driver supplemental front-impact air ing against the rear of the seatback, air bag status light is not operating as bag is located in the center of the steering such as a child restraint installed in described in this section, get the oc- wheel. The front passenger supplemental the rear seat or an object stored on cupant classification system checked. front-impact air bag is mounted in the the floor. It is recommended that you visit a dashboard above the glove box. The front NISSAN dealer for this service. air bags are designed to inflate in higher ∙ Make sure that there is no object severity frontal collisions, although they placed under the front passenger ∙ Until you have confirmed with a may inflate if the forces in another type of seat. dealer that your passenger seat occu- collision are similar to those of a higher pant classification system is working ∙ Make sure that there is no object severity frontal impact. They may not in- properly, position the occupants in placed between the seat cushion and flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle the rear seating positions. center console or between the seat damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi- cushion and the door. ∙ Do not position the front passenger cation of proper front air bag system op- seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the eration. ∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is front seat does contact the rear seat, installed in the front passenger seat, The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System the air bag system may determine a do not position the front passenger monitors information from the crash zone sensor malfunction has occurred and seat so the child restraint contacts the sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat the front passenger air bag status instrument panel. If the child restraint belt buckle sensors and occupation classi- light may illuminate and the supple- does contact the instrument panel, fication sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op- mental air bag warning light may the system may determine the seat is eration is based on the severity of a colli- flash. occupied and the passenger air bag sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classifi- may deploy in a collision. Also the This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN cation sensor is also monitored. Based on front passenger air bag status light Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and may not illuminate. For additional in- information from the sensor, only one front front passenger seats. This system is de- air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on formation, refer to “Child restraints” in signed to meet certification requirements this section. the crash severity and whether the front under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi- ∙ Confirm the operating condition with Canada. However, all of the information, tionally, the front passenger air bag may be the front passenger air bag status cautions and warnings in this manual automatically turned off under some con- light. still apply and must be followed. ditions, depending on the weight detected on the front passenger seat and how the 1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system seat belt is used. If the front passenger air injuries. Front air bags do not provide re- bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag sta- straint to the lower body. tus light will be illuminated. For additional Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat information, refer to “Front passenger air belts should be correctly worn and the bag and status light” in this section. One driver and front passenger seated upright front air bag inflating does not indicate im- as far as practical away from the steering proper performance of the system. wheel or instrument panel. The front air If you have any questions about your air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect bag system, it is recommended that you the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can in- visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information crease the risk of injury if the occupant is about the system. If you are considering too close to, or is against, the front air bag modification of your vehicle due to a dis- module during inflation. ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con- tact information is contained in the front of The front air bags deflate quickly after a WRS0475 collision. this Owner’s Manual. Front passenger air bag and status light When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud The front air bags operate only when the noise may be heard, followed by the re- ignition switch is in the ON position. WARNING lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful After placing the ignition switch in the The front passenger air bag is designed and does not indicate a fire. Care should be ON position, the supplemental air bag to automatically turn OFF under some taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita- warning light illuminates. The supple- conditions. Read this section carefully tion and choking. Those with a history of a mental air bag warning light will turn off to learn how it operates. Proper use of breathing condition should get fresh air after about 7 seconds if the system is the seat, seat belt and child restraints is promptly. operational. necessary for most effective protec- Front air bags, along with the use of seat tion. Failure to follow all instructions in belts, help to cushion the impact force on this manual concerning the use of the face and chest of the front occupants. seats, seat belts and child restraints can They can help save lives and reduce seri- increase the risk or severity of injury in ous injuries. However, an inflating front air an accident. bag may cause facial abrasions or other Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51 Status light The status of the front passenger air bag After the ignition switch is placed in the The front passenger seat is equipped with (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front pas- "ON" position, the front passenger air bag an occupant classification sensor (weight senger air bag status light which is status light on the instrument panel illumi- sensor) that turns the front passenger air located on the instrument panel. nates for about 7 seconds and then turns bag on or off depending on the weight ap- off or remains illuminated depending on plied to the front passenger seat. the front passenger seat occupied status.

The light operates as follows:

PASSENGER AIR BAG CONDITION DESCRIPTION FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS INDICATOR LIGHT ( ) Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Nobody/Somebody ON (illuminated) INHIBITED Small Adult in front passenger seat Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag seat by weight. For example, if a child is in placed on the front passenger seat may and other air bags in your vehicle are not the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad- also cause the light to operate as depart of this system. vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn scribed above depending on their weight. the front passenger air bag OFF in accor- The purpose of the regulation is to help dance with the regulations. Also, if a child For additional information, refer to “Normal reduce the risk of injury or death from an restraint of the type specified in the regula- operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this inflating air bag to certain front passenger tions is on the seat, its weight and the section. seat occupants, such as children, by requir- child’s weight can be detected and cause Front passenger air bag ing the air bag to be automatically turned the air bag to turn OFF. OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the The front passenger air bag is designed to requirements. Front passenger seat adult occupants who automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is are properly seated and using the seat belt operated under some conditions as de- The occupant classification sensor in this as outlined in this manual should not scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu- vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to cause the front passenger air bag to be lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, detect an occupant and objects on the automatically turned OFF. For small adults 1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system it may be turned OFF, however if the occu- placed on the seat could result in air bag erly and the occupant is positioned properly. pant takes his/her weight off the seat inflation, because of the object’s weight de- If the air bag status light is still not illumi- cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, tected by the occupant classification sen- nated, reposition the occupant or child re- by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by sor. Other conditions could also result in air straint in a rear seat. otherwise being out of position), this could bag inflation, such as if a child is standing If the front passenger air bag status light cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. on the seat, or if two children are on the will not illuminate even though you believe Always be sure to be seated and wearing seat, contrary to the instructions in this that the child restraint, the seat belts and the seat belt properly for the most effective manual. Always be sure that you and all the occupant are properly positioned, it is protection by the seat belt and supple- vehicle occupants are seated and re- recommended that you take your vehicle mental air bag. strained properly. to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and Using the front passenger air bag status check system status by using a special children be properly restrained in a rear light, you can monitor when the front pas- tool. However, until you have confirmed seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap- senger air bag is automatically turned OFF. with a dealer that your air bag is working propriate child restraints and booster properly, reposition the occupant or child If an adult occupant is in the seat but the seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If restraint in a rear seat. this is not possible, the occupant classifica- front passenger air bag status light is illu- tion sensor is designed to operate as de- minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and scribed above to turn the front passenger it could be that the person is a small adult, front passenger air bag status light will air bag OFF for specified child restraints as or is not sitting on the seat properly or not take a few seconds to register a change in required by the regulations. Failing to prop- using the seat belt properly. the front passenger seat status. This is nor- erly secure child restraints and to use the If a child restraint must be used in the front mal system operation and does not indi- ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or seat, the front passenger air bag status light cate a malfunction. move in a collision or sudden stop. This can may or may not be illuminated, depending also result in the passenger air bag inflat- If a malfunction occurs in the front passen- on the size of the child and the type of child ing in a crash instead of being OFF. For ger air bag system, the supplemental air bag restraint being used. If the air bag status light additional information, refer to “Child re- warning light , located in the meter and is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag straints” in this section. gauges area of the instrument panel, will be might inflate in a crash), it could be that the If the front passenger seat is not occupied, child restraint or seat belt is not being used illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the the front passenger air bag is designed not properly. Make sure that the child restraint is system checked. It is recommended that to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects installed properly, the seat belt is used prop- you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53 Normal operation Steps NOTE: In order for the occupant classification 1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats” This vehicle’s occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passen- section of this manual. Sit upright, lean- sensor system generally keeps the clas- ger based on weight, please follow the pre- ing against the seatback, and centered sification locked during driving, so it is cautions and steps outlined below: on the seat cushion with your feet com- important that you confirm that the Precautions fortably extended to the floor. front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. However, the occupant 2. Make sure there are no objects on your ∙ Make sure that there are no objects classification sensor may recalculate the lap. weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on weight of the occupant under some con- the seat or placed in the seatback 3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the ditions (both while driving and when pocket. “Seat belts” section of this manual. stopped), so front passenger seat occu- ∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other Front passenger seat belt buckle sta- pants should continue to remain seated object is not pressing against the rear tus is monitored by the occupant clas- as outlined above. of the seatback. sification system, and is used as an in- Troubleshooting ∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not put to determine occupancy status. So, pushing or pulling on the back of the it is highly recommended that the front If you think the front passenger air bag front passenger seat. passenger fasten their seat belt. status light is incorrect: ∙ Make sure that the front passenger 4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds 1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying seat or seatback is not forced back allowing the system to classify the the front passenger seat: front passenger before the vehicle is against an object on the seat or floor ∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag behind it. put into motion. light is functioning as intended. The ∙ Make sure that there is no object placed 5. Ensure proper classification by check- front passenger air bag is suppressed. under the front passenger seat. ing the front passenger air bag status However, if the occupant is not a small light. adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning If the light is still ON after this, the person ∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback against the seatback, and centered on should be advised not to ride in the front against an object on the seat or floor the seat cushion with his/her feet com- passenger seat and the vehicle should be behind it. fortably extended to the floor. checked as soon as possible. It is recom- ∙ An object placed under the front pas- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing senger seat. against the rear of the seatback. this service. ∙ An object placed between the seat 2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, ∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on cushion and center console. the back of the front passenger seat. child or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat. If the vehicle is moving, please come to a ∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback stop when it is safe to do so. Check and against an object on the seat or floor This may be due to the following con- correct any of the above conditions. Re- behind it. ditions that may be interfering with the start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. weight sensors: ∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat. ∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright, NOTE: ∙ An object placed between the seat leaning against the seatback, and cen- A system check will be performed during cushion and center console or between tered on the seat cushion with his/her which the front passenger air bag status the seat cushion and the door. feet comfortably extended to the floor. light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially. If the vehicle is moving, please come to a ∙ The child restraint is not properly in- stop when it is safe to do so. Check and stalled, as outlined in the “Child re- If the light is still OFF after this, the small correct any of the above conditions. Re- straints” section of this manual. adult, child or child restraint should be restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute. positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle ∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) should be checked as soon as possible. It is NOTE: hanging on the seat or placed in the recommended that you visit a NISSAN seatback pocket. dealer for this service. A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing 3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger light will remain lit for about 7 seconds against the rear of the seatback. and no objects on the front passenger seat, the vehicle should be checked. It is initially. ∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on recommended that you visit a NISSAN the back of the front passenger seat. dealer as soon as possible. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55 Other supplemental front-impact air ∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys- ∙ No unauthorized changes should be bag precautions tem may result in serious personal in- made to any components or wiring of jury. Tampering includes changes to the seat belt system. This may affect WARNING the steering wheel and the instru- the front air bag system. Tampering ∙ Do not place any objects on the steer- ment panel assembly by placing ma- with the seat belt system may result ing wheel pad or on the instrument terial over the steering wheel pad and in serious personal injury. above the instrument panel or by in- panel. Also, do not place any objects ∙ It is recommended that you visit a stalling additional trim material between any occupant and the steer- NISSAN dealer for work on and around around the air bag system. ing wheel or instrument panel. Such the front air bag. It is also recom- objects may become dangerous pro- ∙ Removing or modifying the front pas- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer jectiles and cause injury if the front air senger seat may affect the function of for installation of electrical equip- bags inflate. the air bag system and result in seri- ment. The Supplemental Restraint ∙ Immediately after inflation, several ous personal injury. System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or discon- front air bag system components will ∙ Modifying or tampering with the front nected. Unauthorized electrical test be hot. Do not touch them; you may passenger seat may result in serious equipment and probing devices severely burn yourself. personal injury. For example, do not should not be used on the air bag change the front seats by placing ma- ∙ No unauthorized changes should be system. made to any components or wiring of terial on the seat cushion or by install- the supplemental air bag system. This ing additional trim material, such as ∙ A cracked windshield should be re- is to prevent accidental inflation of seat covers, on the seat that are not placed immediately by a qualified re- the supplemental air bag or damage specifically designed to assure proper pair facility. A cracked windshield to the supplemental air bag system. air bag operation. Additionally, do not could affect the function of the stow any objects under the front pas- supplemental air bag system. ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes senger seat or the seat cushion and The SRS wiring harness connectors are to your vehicle’s electrical system, seatback. Such objects may interfere * yellow and orange for easy identification. suspension system or front end struc- with the proper operation of the occu- ture. This could affect proper opera- pant classification sensor (weight When selling your vehicle, we request that tion of the front air bag system. sensor). you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. 1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system other type of collision are similar to those of However, an inflating side air bag or curtain a higher severity impact. They are de- air bag may cause abrasions or other inju- signed to inflate on the side where the ve- ries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not hicle is impacted. They may not inflate in provide restraint to the lower body. certain side collisions. The seat belts should be correctly worn Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate and the driver and front passenger seated in certain types of rollover collisions or near upright as far as practical away from the rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move- side air bag. Rear seat passengers should ments (for example, during severe off- be seated as far away as practical from the roading) may cause the curtain air bags to door finishers and side roof rails. The side inflate. air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Be- Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always cause of this, the force of the side air bags an indication of proper side air bag and and curtain air bags inflating can increase LRS0259 curtain air bag operation. the risk of injury if the occupant is too close Front seat-mounted side-impact When the side air bags and curtain air bags to, or is against, these air bag modules dur- supplemental air bag and inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate roof-mounted curtain side- followed by release of smoke. This smoke is quickly after the collision is over. not harmful and does not indicate a fire. impact and rollover supplemental The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it short time. air bag systems may cause irritation and choking. Those The side air bags are located in the outside with a history of a breathing condition The side air bags and curtain air bags should get fresh air promptly. operate only when the ignition switch is of the seatback of the front seats. The cur- placed in the ON position. tain air bags are located in the side roof Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, rails in both rows. All of the information, help to cushion the impact force on the After placing the ignition switch in the cautions and warnings in this manual chest of the front occupants. Curtain air ON position, the supplemental air bag apply and must be followed. The side air bags help to cushion the impact force to the warning light illuminates. The supple- bags and curtain air bags are designed to head of occupants in the front and rear out- mental air bag warning light will turn off inflate in higher severity side collisions, al- board seating positions in all rows. They can after about 7 seconds if the system is though they may inflate if the forces in an- help save lives and reduce serious injuries. operational. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57 WARNING ∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys- Seat belt with pretensioner(s) tem may result in serious personal in- (front seats) ∙ Do not place any objects near the jury. For example, do not change the seatback of the front seats. Also, do front seats by placing material near not place any objects (an umbrella, WARNING the seatbacks or by installing addi- bag, etc.) between the front door fin- tional trim material, such as seat cov- ∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused isher and the front seat. Such objects ers, around the side air bag. after activation. They must be re- may become dangerous projectiles placed together with the retractor and cause injury if a side air bag ∙ It is recommended that you visit a and buckle as a unit. inflates. NISSAN dealer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag ∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a ∙ Right after inflation, several side air system. It is also recommended that collision but pretensioner(s) are not bag and curtain air bag system com- you visit a NISSAN dealer for installa- activated, be sure to have the preten- ponents will be hot. Do not touch tion of electrical equipment. The SRS sioner system checked and, if neces- them; you may severely burn yourself. wiring harnesses* should not be sary, replaced. It is recommended that ∙ No unauthorized changes should be modified or disconnected. Unauthor- you visit a NISSAN dealer for this made to any components or wiring of ized electrical test equipment and service. the side air bag and curtain air bag probing devices should not be used ∙ No unauthorized changes should be systems. This is to prevent damage to on the side air bag or curtain air bag made to any components or wiring of or accidental inflation of the side air systems. the pretensioner system. This is to bag and curtain air bag systems. prevent damage to or accidental acti- *The SRS wiring harness or connectors ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper- are yellow or orange for easy identifica- ing with the pretensioner system may to your vehicle’s electrical system, tion. suspension system or side panel. This result in serious personal injury. could affect proper operation of the When selling your vehicle, we request that curtain air bag systems. you inform the buyer about the side air bags and curtain air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ It is recommended that you visit a When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re- NISSAN dealer for work on and around leased and a loud noise may be heard. This the pretensioner system. It is also rec- smoke is not harmful and does not indi- ommended that you visit a NISSAN cate a fire. Care should be taken not to dealer for installation of electrical inhale it, as it may cause irritation and equipment. Unauthorized electrical choking. Those with a history of a breath- test equipment and probing devices ing condition should get fresh air promptly. should not be used on the preten- After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load sioner system. limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against ∙ If you need to dispose of the preten- the chest. sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN The supplemental air bag warning dealer for this service. Incorrect dis- light is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. For additional posal procedures could cause per- LRS2699 sonal injury. information, refer to "Supplemental air bag warning light" in this section. If the opera- 1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (lo- The pretensioner system may activate tion of the supplemental air bag warning cated on the sun visors) with the supplemental air bag system in light indicates there is a malfunction, have SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING certain types of collisions. Working with the the system checked. It is recommended LABELS seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be- vice. Warning labels about the supplemental comes involved in certain types of colli- When selling your vehicle, we request that front-impact air bag system are placed in sions, helping to restrain front seat occu- you inform the buyer about the preten- the vehicle as shown in the illustration. pants. sioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s WARNING The pretensioner(s) are encased within the Manual. seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an- Do not use a rear-facing child restraint chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. on a seat protected by an air bag in These seat belts are used the same way as front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death. conventional seat belts.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59 If any of the following conditions occur, the Repair and replacement front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag procedure and pretensioner systems need servicing: The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to remains on after approximately 7 sec- inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re- onds. minder, unless it is damaged, the supple- ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light mental air bag warning light remains illu- flashes intermittently. minated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/or re- ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light placed as soon as possible. It is recom- does not come on at all. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for Under these conditions, the front air bag, this service. side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner LRS0100 When maintenance work is required on the systems may not operate properly. They SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, must be checked and repaired. It is recom- curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re- LIGHT mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for lated parts should be pointed out to the this service. The supplemental air bag warning light, person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be placed in displaying in the instrument panel, WARNING monitors the circuits for the air bag sys- the LOCK position when working under the tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring. If the supplemental air bag warning hood or inside the vehicle. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON light is on, it could mean that the front position, the supplemental air bag warning air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag light illuminates for about 7 seconds and and/or pretensioner systems will not then turns off. This means the system is operate in an accident. To help avoid operational. injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING ∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant ∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or Classification Sensor (OCS) should be curtain air bag has inflated, the air checked to verify it is still functioning bag module will not function again correctly. It is recommended that you and must be replaced. Additionally, visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. the activated pretensioner(s) must The OCS should be checked even if no also be replaced. The air bag module air bags deploy as a result of the im- and pretensioner(s) should be re- pact. Failure to verify proper OCS placed. It is recommended that you function may result in an improper air visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. bag deployment resulting in injury or However, the air bag module and pre- death. tensioner(s) cannot be repaired. ∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61 2 Instruments and controls

Instrument Panel ...... 2-2 Text Messaging...... 2-34 Meters and gauges...... 2-4 Navigation System ...... 2-36 Speedometer and odometer ...... 2-4 Navigation Swipe to Meter...... 2-39 Tachometer ...... 2-6 Security systems ...... 2-39 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-6 Vehicle security system ...... 2-39 Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 2-41 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible Wiper and washer switch ...... 2-42 reminders ...... 2-8 Switch operation ...... 2-42 Checking lights ...... 2-8 Rain-sensing auto wiper system Warning lights ...... 2-9 (if so equipped) ...... 2-44 Indicator lights ...... 2-13 Rear window and outside mirror Audible reminders ...... 2-16 (if so equipped) defroster switch...... 2-45 Vehicle information display ...... 2-16 Headlight and turn signal switch ...... 2-45 How to use the vehicle information Headlight control switch...... 2-45 display ...... 2-17 LED Daytime Running Light (DRL) Startup display ...... 2-18 system ...... 2-47 Drive computer...... 2-18 Instrument brightness control...... 2-48 Settings ...... 2-18 Turn signal switch ...... 2-48 Vehicle information display warnings Fog light switch ...... 2-49 and indicators...... 2-27 Horn ...... 2-49 Control Panel and vehicle information display Climate-controlled seat switches Interaction ...... 2-32 (if so equipped) ...... 2-50 Audio...... 2-32 Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ...... 2-51 Receiving a call ...... 2-33 Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-52 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch...... 2-53 Rear power sunshade (if so equipped) ...... 2-65 E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped)...... 2-53 Interior lights ...... 2-66 Power outlet...... 2-54 Console light ...... 2-67 Extended storage switch ...... 2-54 Map lights ...... 2-67 Storage...... 2-55 Personal lights ...... 2-67 Front-door pockets...... 2-55 Trunk light...... 2-68 Seatback pockets ...... 2-56 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ...... 2-68 Storagetrays...... 2-56 Programming HomeLink® ...... 2-69 Glovebox...... 2-57 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers .....2-70 Console box ...... 2-57 Operating the HomeLink® Overhead sunglasses storage ...... 2-58 Universal Transceiver ...... 2-71 Cup holders ...... 2-58 Programming trouble-diagnosis ...... 2-71 Windows ...... 2-60 Clearing the programmed information ...... 2-71 Power windows ...... 2-60 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® Dual Panel Moonroof (if so equipped) ...... 2-63 button...... 2-71 Power moonroof ...... 2-63 If your vehicle is stolen...... 2-72 INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Vent (P. 4-27) 2. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch (P. 2-45) 3. Supplemental front-impact air bag (P. 1-42) Horn (P. 2-49) 4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-8) Vehicle information display (P. 2-16) 5. Paddle shifters (if so equipped) (P. 5-16) 6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-42) 7. Audio controls* Navigation controls* 8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 9. Navigation display* Audio display* 10. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 11. Glove box (P. 2-55) 12. Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-42) 13. AUX input/USB port* 14. Heater and air conditioning controls (P. 4-29) 15. Shift lever (P. 5-16) 16. Display Commander* LII2445 2-2 Instruments and controls 17. Push-button ignition switch Refer to the page number indicated in (P. 5-11) parentheses for operating details. 18. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System* Cruise control switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-41) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-43) 19. Tilt and telescopic steering (P. 3-26) 20. Audio control switches* Vehicle information display control switches (P. 2-16) 21. Hood release (P. 3-22) 22. Fuse box (P. 8-18) 23. Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-52) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-53) Trunk release switch (P. 3-22) Rear power sunshade switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-65) 24. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-45) Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-5) *: Refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Instruments and controls 2-3 METERS AND GAUGES

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side of the meter clus- ter. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display.

LIC3191 1. Tachometer 4. Speedometer 2. Warning and indicator lights 5. Fuel gauge 3. Vehicle information display 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge Odometer Twin trip odometer

2-4 Instruments and controls Changing the display Push the TRIP RESET switch ᭺2 on the left side of the instrument panel to change the display as follows:

Trip → Trip → Odometer Mileage → Trip Resetting the trip odometer Pushing the TRIP RESET switch ᭺2 for more than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero. Average fuel economy and distance to empty information is also available. For ad- LIC2218 LIC3179 ditional information, refer to “Vehicle infor- Speedometer Odometer/Twin trip odometer mation display” in this section. The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. The odometer and the twin trip odometer ᭺1 are displayed in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

Instruments and controls 2-5 CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual for immediate action required. LIC3536 LIC3538 TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE The tachometer indicates engine speed in GAUGE revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev The gauge indicates the engine coolant ᭺1 engine into the red zone . temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range ᭺1 when CAUTION the gauge needle points within the zone When engine speed approaches the red shown in the illustration. zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause The engine coolant temperature varies serious engine damage. with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

2-6 Instruments and controls Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg- isters 0 (Empty). The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION ∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the ve- LIC2222 hicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this FUEL GAUGE service. The gauge indicates the approximate fuel ∙ For additional information, refer to level in the tank. “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in The gauge may move slightly during brak- this section. ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. The low fuel warning message shows in the vehicle information display when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Instruments and controls 2-7 WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Master warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) warning light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system Power steering warning light Security indicator light warning light

Brake warning light (parking brake) Seat belt warning light and chime Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light

Charge warning light Front fog light indicator light (green) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

CHECKING LIGHTS The following lights (if so equipped) will The following lights (if so equipped) will With all doors closed, apply the parking come on: come on briefly and then go off: brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without , or , , or , , , , starting the engine.

2-8 Instruments and controls If any light does not come on or operate in If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock Parking brake indicator a way other than described, it may indicate function is turned off. The brake system When the ignition switch is placed in the ON a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal- then operates normally but without anti- position, this light comes on when the function. Have the system checked. It is lock assistance. For additional information, parking brake is applied. recommended that you visit a NISSAN refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and dealer for this service. driving” section of this manual. Brake warning light Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display Automatic Emergency This light illuminates if there is a problem between the speedometer and tachom- Braking (AEB) system with the foot brake systems. eter. For additional information, refer to “Ve- warning light hicle information display” in this section. Low brake fluid warning light This light comes on when the ignition WARNING LIGHTS switch is placed in the ON position. It turns When the ignition switch is placed in the ON For additional information on warnings off after the engine is started. position, the light warns of a low brake fluid and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information level. If the light comes on while the engine display” in this section. This light illuminates when the AEB system is running, with the parking brake not ap- is set to OFF on the meter display. plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol- or Anti-lock Braking If the light illuminates when the AEB sys- lowing: System (ABS) tem is on, it may indicate that the system is 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake warning light unavailable. For additional information, re- fluid as necessary. For additional infor- fer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON and “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning it-yourself” section of this manual. position, the ABS warning light illuminates (I-FCW)” in the “Starting and driving” section and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is of this manual. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have operational. the warning system checked. It is rec- If the ABS warning light illuminates while Brake warning light ommended that you visit a NISSAN the engine is running or while driving, it (parking brake) dealer for this service. may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is This light functions for the foot brake sys- recommended that you visit a NISSAN tems. dealer for this service. Instruments and controls 2-9 WARNING It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN The engine oil pressure warning light is dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed not designed to indicate a low oil level. ∙ Your brake system may not be work- driving and abrupt braking. For additional Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For ing properly if the warning light is on. information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys- additional information, refer to “Engine oil” Driving could be dangerous. If you tem (ABS) warning light” in this section. in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this judge it to be safe, drive carefully to manual. the nearest service station for repairs. Charge warning light Otherwise, have your vehicle towed CAUTION because driving it could be If this light comes on while the engine is dangerous. running, it may indicate the charging sys- Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause tem is not functioning properly. Turn the ∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en- serious damage to the engine almost engine off and check the generator belt. If gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid immediately. Such damage is not cov- level may increase your stopping dis- the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited tance and braking will require greater light remains on, have the system checked. Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as pedal effort as well as pedal travel. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN it is safe to do so. ∙ If the brake fluid level is below the dealer for this service. MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake Low tire pressure warning fluid reservoir, do not drive until the CAUTION light brake system has been checked. It is Do not continue driving if the generator Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres- recommended that you visit a NISSAN belt is loose, broken or missing. dealer for this service. sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni- Engine oil pressure tors the tire pressure of all tires except the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning spare. indicator warning light The low tire pressure warning light warns This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If When the parking brake is released and the of low tire pressure or indicates that the the light flickers or comes on during nor- brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the TPMS is not functioning properly. mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, brake warning light and the ABS warning stop the engine immediately and call a After the ignition switch is placed in the ON light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair position, this light illuminates for about not functioning properly. Have the brake shop. 1 second and turns off. system checked and, if necessary, repaired. 2-10 Instruments and controls Low tire pressure warning TPMS malfunction ∙ If the light does not illuminate with If the vehicle is being driven with low tire If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the the ignition switch placed in the ON pressure, the warning light will illumi- low tire pressure warning light will flash for position, have the vehicle checked as nate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” approximately 1 minute when the ignition soon as possible. It is recommended warning also appears in the vehicle in- switch is placed in the ON position. The that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this formation display. light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the service. When the low tire pressure warning light system checked. It is recommended that ∙ If the light illuminates while driving, illuminates, you should stop and adjust you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. avoid sudden steering maneuvers or the tire pressure of all four tires to the The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, recommended COLD tire pressure shown does not appear if the low tire pressure pull off the road to a safe location and on the Tire and Loading Information la- warning light illuminates to indicate a stop the vehicle as soon as possible. bel located in the driver’s door opening. TPMS malfunction. Driving with under-inflated tires may The low tire pressure warning light does permanently damage the tires and in- not automatically turn off when the tire For additional information, refer to “Tire crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se- pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in- Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the rious vehicle damage could occur and flated to the recommended pressure, “Starting and driving” section and “Tire may lead to an accident and could re- the vehicle must be driven at speeds pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of sult in serious personal injury or above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the this manual. death. Check the tire pressure for all TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge the recommended COLD tire pressure to check the tire pressure. WARNING show on the Tire and Loading Infor- ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning ap- mation label located in the driver’s electric medical equipment. Those pears each time the ignition switch is placed door opening to turn the low tire pres- who use a pacemaker should contact in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still the electric medical equipment sure warning light remains illuminated. illuminates while driving after adjust- manufacturer for the possible influ- ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat For additional information, refer to “Vehicle ences before use. or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If information display” in this section, “Tire you have a flat tire, replace it with a Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire “Starting and driving” and “In case of emergency” sections of this manual. Instruments and controls 2-11 is flat and all tires are properly in- Master warning light For additional information, refer to “Vehicle flated, have the vehicle checked. It is information display” in this section. recommended that you visit a NISSAN The master warning light illuminates Power steering warning dealer for this service. whenever there is an active warning that light ∙ When replacing a wheel without the can be reviewed in the “warnings review” TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS content page in the meter, or if there is a will not function and the low tire pres- red-level warning being displayed (which WARNING sure warning light will flash for ap- cannot be dismissed). The master warning ∙ If the engine is not running or is proximately 1 minute. The light will re- light will illuminate red if a red-level warning turned off while driving, the power as- main on after 1 minute. Have your is being displayed, or yellow otherwise. sist for the steering will not work. tires replaced and/or TPMS system ∙ Push Engine Start Lock Warning Steering will be harder to operate. reset as soon as possible. It is recom- ∙ Key Fob Removed from Vehicle Warning ∙ When the power steering warning mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer light illuminates with the engine run- for these services. ∙ Incorrect Key (RED) ning, there will be no power assist for ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- ∙ Door/Trunk Open (vehicle stationary) the steering. You will still have control nally specified by NISSAN could affect ∙ Trunk Open (vehicle moving) of the vehicle, but the steering will be the proper operation of the TPMS. harder to operate. Have the power ∙ Door Open (RED with vehicle moving) steering system checked. It is recom- CAUTION ∙ Parking Brake ON (RED) mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the ∙ Low Washer Fluid regular tire pressure check. Be sure to ∙ I-Key System Fault When the ignition switch is placed in the ON check the tire pressure regularly. ∙ Low Tire Pressure position, the power steering warning light ∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds illuminates. After starting the engine, the of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the ∙ CVT Warning power steering warning light turns off. This TPMS may not operate correctly. ∙ Sonar Parking Sensor Error indicates the power steering is operational. ∙ Be sure to install the specified size of ∙ LED Headlight Failure (RED if no other If the power steering warning light illumi- tires to the four wheels correctly. red warnings are active) nates while the engine is running, it may ∙ Chassis Control warning indicate the power steering is not function- 2-12 Instruments and controls ing properly and may need servicing. Have switch is placed in the ON position, the sys- Unless checked and repaired, the supple- the power steering checked. It is recom- tem does not activate the warning light for mental restraint system (air bag system) mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the front passenger. and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func- this service. For additional information, refer to “Seat tion properly. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System When the power steering warning light illu- belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and minates with the engine running, there will supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. supplemental restraint system” section of be no power assist for the steering, but you this manual. will still have control of the vehicle. At this Supplemental air bag time, greater steering effort is required to WARNING operate the steering wheel, especially in warning light sharp turns and at low speeds. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON If the supplemental air bag warning or START position, the supplemental air light is on, it could mean that the front For additional information, refer to “Power bag warning light illuminates for about air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag steering” in the “Starting and driving” sec- 7 seconds and then turns off. This means and/or pretensioner systems will not tion of this manual. the system is operational. operate in an accident. To help avoid Seat belt warning light and injury to yourself or others, have your If any of the following conditions occur, the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is chime front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, recommended that you visit a NISSAN and pretensioner seat belt systems need The light and chime remind you to fasten dealer for this service. servicing: your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light INDICATOR LIGHTS or START position and remains illuminated remains on after approximately 7 sec- For additional information, refer to “Vehicle until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the onds. information display” in this section. same time, the chime sounds for about ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is Front fog light indicator flashes intermittently. securely fastened. light (green) ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light The seat belt warning light may also illumi- The front fog light indicator light illumi- does not come on at all. nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not nates when the front fog lights are on. For fastened when the front passenger’s seat It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN additional information, refer to “Fog light is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition dealer for these services. switch” in this section. Instruments and controls 2-13 Front passenger air bag The MIL may also come on steady if the after a few driving trips. If the light status light fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the does not turn off after a few driving vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is The front passenger air bag status light will the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed recommended that you visit a NISSAN be lit and the passenger front air bag will be tightly, and that the vehicle has at least dealer for this service. You do not need off depending on how the front passenger 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. seat is being used. to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. For additional information, refer to “Front After a few driving trips, the light passenger air bag and status light” in the should turn off if no other potential emis- ∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen- sion control system malfunction exists. been detected which may damage the tal restraint system” section of this manual. If this indicator light comes on steady for emission control system. To reduce or 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds avoid emission control system dam- High beam indicator light when the engine is not running, it indicates age: (blue) that the vehicle is not ready for an emission – do not drive at speeds above This blue light comes on when the head- control system inspection/maintenance 45 mph (72 km/h). light high beams are on and goes out when test. For additional information, refer to the low beams are selected. “Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance – avoid hard acceleration or decelera- (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer tion. The high beam indicator light also comes information” section of this manual. on when the passing signal is activated. – avoid steep uphill grades. Operation Malfunction Indicator Light – if possible, reduce the amount of (MIL) The MIL will come on in one of two ways: cargo being hauled or towed. ∙ MIL on steady — An emission control The MIL may stop blinking and come on If this indicator light comes on steady or steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec- blinks while the engine is running, it may system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer indicate a potential emission control mal- for this service. You do not need to have function. Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the vehicle information display. If the fuel- your vehicle towed to the dealer. filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off 2-14 Instruments and controls CAUTION information, refer to “Headlight and turn Vehicle Dynamic Control signal switch” in this section. Continued vehicle operation without (VDC) OFF indicator light having the emission control system Slip indicator light This indicator light comes on when the checked and repaired as necessary VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi- could lead to poor driveability, reduced This indicator will blink when the VDC sys- cates the VDC system has been turned off. fuel economy, and possible damage to tem is operating, thus alerting the driver to Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the emission control system. the fact that the road surface is slippery the engine and the system will operate Security indicator light and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. normally. For additional information, refer You may feel or hear the system working; to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” this is normal. in the “Starting and driving” section of this This light blinks when the ignition switch is manual. placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC (if so The light will blink for a few seconds after The VDC indicator light also comes on equipped) position. the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin. when you place the ignition switch in the The blinking security indicator light indi- The indicator light also comes on ON position. The light will turn off after cates that the security systems equipped when you place the ignition switch in the about 2 seconds if the system is opera- on the vehicle are operational. ON position. The light will turn off after ap- tional. If the light stays on or comes on For additional information, refer to “Security proximately 2 seconds if the system is op- along with the indicator light while systems” in this section. erational. If the light does not come on you are driving, have the VDC system have the system checked. It is recom- checked. It is recommended that you visit a Side light and headlight mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN dealer for this service. indicator light (green) this service. While the VDC system is operating, you might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys- The side light and headlight indicator light Turn signal/hazard tem working when starting the vehicle or illuminates when the side light or head- accelerating, but this is normal. lights are on (not including daytime run- indicator lights ning or signature lights). If the headlight The appropriate light flashes when the turn switch is in the AUTO position, the side light signal switch is activated. and headlight indicator light will illuminate Both lights flash when the hazard switch is when the headlights turn on. For additional turned on. Instruments and controls 2-15 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

AUDIBLE REMINDERS NISSAN Intelligent Key® Lock-in Brake pad wear warning Prevention The disc brake pads have audible wear The Intelligent Key buzzer sounds if the In- warnings. When a disc brake pad requires telligent Key is left inside the vehicle when replacement, it makes a high pitched the doors are closed and locked. When the scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo- buzzer sounds, be sure to take the Intelli- tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de- gent Key with you when leaving the vehicle. pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon For additional information, refer to “NISSAN as possible if the warning sound is heard. It Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks is recommended that you visit a NISSAN and adjustments” section of this manual. dealer for this service. Parking brake reminder chime Light reminder chime A chime sounds if the parking brake is set With the ignition switch placed in the OFF and the vehicle is driven. The chime will LIC3224 position, a chime sounds when the driver’s stop if the parking brake is released or the The vehicle information display is located door is opened if the headlights or parking vehicle speed returns to zero. to the left of the speedometer. It displays lights are on. such items as: Turn the headlight control switch off or to ∙ Home AUTO before leaving the vehicle. ∙ Audio Information ∙ Navigation Information ∙ Drive Computer Information ∙ Fuel Economy Information ∙ Driving Aids Information (if so equipped) ∙ Tire Pressure Information

2-16 Instruments and controls ∙ Sport Information (Oil pressure, Gear Oil ᭺2 OK - Change or select an item in the Temperature, Digital Speedometer, vehicle information display. Horsepower) ᭺3 — Scroll up or down the vehicle ∙ Indicators and Warnings information menu items. If the vehicle ∙ Vehicle and Meter Display Settings information display is not showing a menu with the buttons, ∙ Cruise Control Status pressing or will change to ∙ Odometer/twin trip odometer the previous/next audio preset. ∙ Gear Position Indicator (P, R, N, D) ᭺4 — go back or forward ∙ Distance To Empty and Fuel Indicator through the vehicle information menu items or to change from one display screen to the next. LIC3177 The OK, and buttons also HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE control audio and control panel functions INFORMATION DISPLAY in some conditions. Most screens and menus offer instruction prompts of the The vehicle information display can be steering switch buttons to indicate how to changed using the and control the vehicle information display. An buttons located on the steering wheel. orange cursor is shown to indicate where you are in the available menu items. A scroll ᭺1 SOURCE - Pressing SOURCE with the bar with up and down arrows will appear if ignition ON will display a list of available there is more than one page of menu audio sources in the vehicle informa- items. For additional information, refer to tion display. The audio sources can the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. then be selected with the , and OK buttons on the steering switch for direct access.

Instruments and controls 2-17 STARTUP DISPLAY SETTINGS When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC The setting mode allows you to change the position the screens that display in the ve- information displayed in the vehicle infor- hicle information display include: mation display as well as the model for ∙ Home several vehicle functions: ∙ Audio ∙ Driver Assistance ∙ Navigation ∙ Customize Display ∙ Drive Computer ∙ Vehicle Settings ∙ Fuel economy ∙ Maintenance ∙ Driving Aids (if so equipped) ∙ Clock ∙ Tire Pressures ∙ TPMS Settings ∙ Chassis Control (if so equipped) LIC3261 ∙ SPORT DRIVE COMPUTER ∙ Unit/Language ∙ Warning Review ∙ Key-Linked Settings The Drive Computer displays driving and ∙ Settings average trip information, and can be ac- ∙ Factory Reset The warnings review title screen will show cessed from the startup display on the ve- how many active warnings exist, or 0 in the hicle information display. Select the Drive event that no warnings are active. For ad- Computer icon, and press the OK button. ditional information on warnings and indi- To reset the driving and average trip infor- cators, refer to “Vehicle information display mation, use the or button to se- warnings and indicators” in this section. lect which item to reset, or select Reset All. To control what items display in the vehicle Select YES, and press the OK button to re- information display, refer to “Customize set information history. display” in this section.

2-18 Instruments and controls Driver Assistance The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the various driving aids and assistance options. Menu item Result Blind Spot (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the blind spot feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays the available parking aids. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Start- ing and driving” section of this manual. Sensor Allows user to turn the sensor on, off, or front only. Display Allows user to turn the display on or off. Volume Allows user to adjust the volume to Low/Med./High. Range Allows user to adjust the range to Near/Mid./Far. Emergency Brake Displays the available emergency brake options. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency Brak- ing (AEB)” and “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. System Allows user to turn the system on or off. Driver Attention (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the driver attention feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Driver Alert- ness (I-DA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Timer Alert Allows user to set or reset an alert at a specific time interval. Low Temperature Alert Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off. Chassis Control (if so equipped) Displays the available chassis control options. For addition information, refer to “Integrated Dynamics-control Module” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Active Trace Control Allows user to turn the Intelligent Trace Control on or off. Active Engine Brake Allows user to turn the Intelligent Engine Brake on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-19 Customize Display The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display Menu item Result Main Menu Selection Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. Home Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Audio Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Navigation Allows user to turn the navigation screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Drive Computer Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Driving Aids (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressure screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Chassis Control (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the chassis control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. SPORT Allows user to turn the SPORT screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Car Icon Color Displays available colors of the vehicle shown in the vehicle information display. ECO Info Settings Displays the various ECO info settings. ECO Drive Report Select to display this report when the ignition in switch is placed in the ON position. View History Select to view the vehicle’s history. Navigation Settings Displays the available navigation settings. Alerts Allows user to set available navigation alerts. View Mode Allows user to change the navigation view mode to “City” or “Arrow.” Welcome Effect Displays the various welcome effect settings.

2-20 Instruments and controls Vehicle Settings The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings. Menu item Result Lighting Displays the various lighting settings. Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Accent Lighting (if so equipped) Allows user to adjust the brightness of the accent lights. Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle. Light Off Delay Allows user to change the duration of time, from 0 to 180 seconds, that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off. Turn Indicator Displays the various turn indicator settings. 3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass on or off. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section. Locking Displays the various locking settings. Ext. Door Switch Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated. Selective Unlock Allows user to turn the selective unlock feature on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. Answer Back Horn Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Auto Door Unlock (if so equipped) Displays available options for the auto door unlock.

Instruments and controls 2-21 Menu item Result Wipers Displays the various wipers settings. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer switch” in this section. Speed Dependent (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off. Rain Sensor (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the rain sensor feature on or off. Driving Position (if so equipped) Displays the various driving position settings. Exit Seat Slide Allows user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Exit Steering Up (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the exit steering up on or off. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Remote Engine Start Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start feature on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely. For additional information, refer to “Remote Engine Start” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

2-22 Instruments and controls Maintenance WARNING does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator The maintenance menu allows the user to The tire replacement indicator is not a as a guide only and always perform set reminders for various vehicle mainte- substitute for regular tire checks, in- regular tire checks. Failure to perform nance items. cluding tire pressure checks. For addi- regular tire checks, including tire pres- tional information, refer to “Changing sure checks could result in tire failure. wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” Serious vehicle damage could occur section of this manual. Many factors in- and may lead to a collision, which could cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving result in serious personal injury or habits and road conditions affect tire death. wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance

Menu item Result Maintenance Displays various maintenance reminder options. Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Clock

Menu item Result Clock When selected, the following message appears: “Go to the settings menu on the center display to set clock”. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Instruments and controls 2-23 TPMS Settings The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display. Menu item Result TPMS Settings Displays available TPMS Settings. Tire Pressure Unit Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display. Unit/Language The Unit/Language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display. Menu item Result Mileage/Fuel Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display. Tire Pressure Unit Allows user to select the tire pressure display units. Temperature Allows user to select the temperature display units. Language Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display.

2-24 Instruments and controls Key-Linked Settings (if so equipped)

Menu item Result Key-Linked Settings Allows user to turn the Key-Linked Settings on or off. For additional information, refer to “Linking an Intelligent Key to the meter display” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Factory Reset The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status. Menu item Result Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or deny the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-25 LIC3749 2-26 Instruments and controls VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 18. Sensor (if so equipped) 34. Low Outside Temperature Alert WARNINGS AND INDICATORS 19. Park Sensor (if so equipped) 35. Oil and Filter 1. No Key Detected 20. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s 36. Tire Manual (if so equipped) 2. Key ID Incorrect 37. Other 21. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear 38. Loose Fuel Cap 3. Key Battery Low Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so 4. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s equipped) 39. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) Manual 22. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so 5. Shift to Park equipped) 40. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) 6. Push brake and start switch to drive 23. Chassis Control System Error: See No Key Detected 7. Engine start operation for Intelligent Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) This warning appears when the Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low) 24. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped) Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni- 8. Release Parking Brake 25. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator tion switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. 9. Low Fuel (if so equipped) For additional information, refer to “NISSAN 10. Low Washer Fluid 26. Driver Attention Alert — Take a Break? (if so equipped) Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks 11. Tire Pressure Low – Add Air and adjustments” section of this manual. 27. Driver Attention Alertness Malfunction 12. Door/Trunk Open (if so equipped) Key ID Incorrect 13. Alarm - Time for a break? (if so 28. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse This warning appears when the ignition equipped) switch is placed from the OFF position and 29. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual 14. Power will turn off to save the battery the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the 30. SPORT system. You cannot start the engine with 15. Power turned off to save the battery an unregistered key. 31. Illumination indicator 16. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights For additional information, refer to “NISSAN 32. Transmission Shift Position indicator 17. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks Manual (if so equipped) 33. Outside Temperature Display and adjustments” section of this manual. Instruments and controls 2-27 Key Battery Low If this warning illuminates, move the shift Release Parking Brake lever to the P (Park) position and start the This indicator illuminates when the Intelli- This warning illuminates in the message engine. gent Key battery is running out of power. area of the vehicle information display Push brake and start switch to drive when the parking brake is set and the ve- If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat- hicle is driven. tery with a new one. For additional infor- This indicator appears when the shift lever mation, refer to “Battery replacement” in is in the P (Park) position. Low Fuel the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. This indicator also appears when the ve- This warning illuminates when the fuel level I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual hicle has been started using the Remote in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as After the ignition switch is pushed to the Engine Start function. soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There ON position, this light comes on for a period This indicator means that the engine will will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank of time and then turns off. start by pushing the ignition switch with when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 the brake pedal depressed. You can start The I-Key System Error message warns of (Empty). a malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys- the engine from any position of the ignition tem. If the light comes on while the engine switch. Low Washer Fluid is stopped, it may be impossible to start Engine start operation for Intelligent This warning illuminates when the the engine. Key system (if I-Key battery level is low) windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. If the light comes on while the engine is Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. running, you can drive the vehicle. However, This indicator appears when the battery of For additional information, refer to in these cases, have the system checked. It the Intelligent Key is low and when the In- “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it- is recommended that you visit a NISSAN telligent Key system and the vehicle are not yourself” section of this manual. dealer for this service. communicating normally. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air Shift to Park If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing This warning appears when the low tire This warning illuminates when the ignition the brake pedal. For additional information, pressure warning light in the meter illumi- switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis- nates and low tire pressure is detected. The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, warning appears each time the ignition charge” in the “Starting and driving” section a chime sounds when the ignition switch is switch is placed in the ON position as long of this manual. in the ACC or OFF position. as the low tire pressure warning light re- 2-28 Instruments and controls mains illuminated. If this warning appears, button ignition switch positions” in the fer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres- “Starting and driving” section of this “Starting and driving” section of this sures of all four tires to the recommended manual. manual. COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Power turned off to save the battery Park Sensor (if so equipped) Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure This message appears after the ignition This indicator illuminates when the sensor warning light” in this section and “Tire Pres- switch is automatically turned off. For addi- is activated. For additional information, re- sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the tional information, refer to “Push-button ig- fer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this nition switch positions” in the “Starting and “Starting and driving” section of this manual. driving” section of this manual. manual. Door/Trunk Open Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) This warning illuminates when a door or This warning appears when the headlights the trunk has been opened. are left in the ON position when exiting the This warning illuminates when there is an vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the error with the system. For additional infor- Alarm - Time for a break? (if so OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar sys- equipped) mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of This indicator appears when the driver en- switch” in this section. this manual. ables the Timer Alert function within the Headlight System Error: See Owner’s Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Driving Aids Settings and the selected set Manual (if so equipped) Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so time is expired. The time is based on igni- equipped) tion on time and can be set up to six hours. This warning illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional infor- This indicator shows when the BSW and Power will turn off to save the battery mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal RCTA systems are engaged. This message appears in the vehicle infor- switch” in this section. For additional information, refer to “Blind mation display after a period of time if the Sensor (if so equipped) Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON po- Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” sition and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For This warning illuminates when the sensor section of this manual. additional information, refer to “Push- is activated. For additional information, re-

Instruments and controls 2-29 Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so Cruise control indicator (if so equipped) Driver Attention Alert - Take a Break? (if equipped) so equipped) This indicator shows the cruise control sys- This warning appears when one or more of tem status. This alert appears when the system has the following systems (if so equipped) is When cruise control is activated, a green detected that the driver may be displaying not functioning properly: circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The fatigue or a lack of attention. ∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW) vehicle information display will also display Driver Attention Alert Malfunction (if so the speed the cruise control was set at. If ∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) equipped) you accelerate past the set speed, the If one or more of these warning appears, speed will blink until you either cancel This warning appears when the Driver At- have the system checked. It is recom- cruise control or go back to the set speed. If tention Alert system is not functioning mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for cruise control is on and canceled, the properly. For additional information, refer to this service. speed will be displayed to show the speed “Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)” in the the vehicle will return to if the resume but- “Starting and driving” section of this Chassis Control System Error: See Own- ton is activated. er’s Manual (if so equipped) manual. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse This warning appears if the Integrated (if so equipped) Dynamics-control Module detects an error This warning may appear if the extended in the Intelligent Trace Control, Intelligent This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise storage switch is not pushed in. When this Engine Brake, or the Active Ride Control Control (ICC) system status. The status is warning appears, push in the extended systems. Have the system checked. It is shown by the color. For additional informa- storage switch to turn off the warning. For tion, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” recommended that you visit a NISSAN additional information, refer to “Extended dealer for this service. For additional infor- in the “Starting and driving” section of this storage switch” in this section. mation, refer to “Chassis control” in the manual. “Starting and driving” section of this CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual manual. This warning illuminates when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 2-30 Instruments and controls SPORT Low Outside Temperature WARNING This indicator illuminates when sport This warning appears if the outside tem- The tire replacement indicator is not a mode is activated. The sport mode screen perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera- substitute for regular tire checks, in- will remain on for about 6 seconds unless ture can be changed to display in Celsius or cluding tire pressure checks. For addi- the driver dismisses the notification early Fahrenheit. For additional information, re- tional information, refer to “Changing using the vehicle information display fer to “Settings” in this section. wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” switches. For additional information, refer section of this manual. Many factors in- Oil and Filter to “Sport mode” in the “Starting and driving” cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving section of this manual. This indicator appears when the customer habits and road conditions affect tire Illumination indicator set distance comes for changing the en- wear and when tires should be re- gine oil and filter. You can set or reset the placed. Setting the tire replacement in- This indicator shows the illumination ad- distance for checking or replacing these dicator for a certain driving distance justment of the instrument panel. For addi- items. For scheduled maintenance items does not mean your tires will last that tional information, refer to “Instrument long. Use the tire replacement indicator brightness control” in this section. and intervals, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. as a guide only and always perform Transmission Shift Position indicator regular tire checks. Failure to perform Tire regular tire checks, including tire pres- This indicator shows the transmission shift sure checks could result in tire failure. This indicator appears when the customer position. Serious vehicle damage could occur set distance is reached for replacing tires. Outside Temperature Display and may lead to a collision, which could You can set or reset the distance for replac- result in serious personal injury or The outside temperature display appears ing tires. death. in the center region of the vehicle information display.

Instruments and controls 2-31 CONTROL PANEL AND VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY INTERACTION Other gent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” in Some of the information and operations the “Starting and driving” section of this available on the control panel can also be This indicator appears when the customer manual. viewed and operated on the vehicle infor- set distance is reached for checking or re- mation display. The vehicle information Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) placing maintenance items other than the display operations can be conducted with engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other mainte- This message appears when the Blind the switches on the steering wheel. nance items can include such things as air Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic filter or tire rotation. The distance for Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable AUDIO checking or replacing the items can be set because a radar blockage is detected. For or reset. additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Use or and select on the Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert vehicle information display main menu. Loose Fuel Cap (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section The vehicle information display shows the This warning appears when the fuel-filler of this manual. status for the audio source currently in use. cap is not tightened correctly after the ve- Some examples of what will be displayed: hicle has been refueled. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the ∙ Source “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec- ∙ Artist tion of this manual. ∙ Song Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction ∙ Album (if so equipped) Pushing the source button will display a list This message appears when the Intelligent of available sources to select with the Cruise Control (ICC), Automatic Emergency steering switch controls if the ignition is on, Braking (AEB), or Intelligent Forward Colli- or cycle through the available audio sion Warning (I-FCW) systems become un- sources in accessory mode. available because the front radar is obstructed. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”, “Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB)”, or “Intelli-

2-32 Instruments and controls RECEIVING A CALL Available keys Action Using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone [Answer] Answers the received phone call. System, a received phone call can be operated on the vehicle information display as [Decline] Declines the received phone call. well as on the touch-screen display. INFO: 1. When there is an incoming call, the A cellular phone device must be connected and selected among other connected caller information and the operation Bluetooth® devices before hands-free operation. For additional information, refer to the keys are displayed on the vehicle infor- separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. mation display.

2. Use or to highlight the preferred item and press the OK button to select the item.

Instruments and controls 2-33 TEXT MESSAGING Available keys Action Using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone [Read] View or hear the received message. System, a received text message can be operated on the vehicle information dis- [Ignore] Ignore the received message. play as well as on the touch-screen display. To read/ignore an incoming text 1. When a new text message is received, a pop-up window and operation keys will appear with the sender’s name or phone number on the vehicle information display.

2. Use or to highlight the preferred item and press OK to select the item.

2-34 Instruments and controls To reply to/exit from a text Available keys Action 1. When a new text message is received [Reply] Available pre-determined messages will be displayed and [Read] is selected, operation keys on the vehicle information display if the steering are displayed on the vehicle informa- switch controls are used. Further operations, such as tion display. voice recognition reply operation, is available when using the touch-screen display. 2. Use or to highlight the pre- [Exit] Ends text message operation and the vehicle infor- ferred item and push the OK button to mation display will show the previous screen. select the item. INFO A cellular phone device must be connected and selected from among other connected Bluetooth® devices before hands-free operation. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Instruments and controls 2-35 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Turn-by-turn route guidance can be displayed on the vehicle information display. To view turn-by-turn route guidance on the vehicle information display, use or and scroll to on the vehicle information display menu.

LIC3228 LIC3163 City view Arrow view City view shows representation of intersec- Lane guidance will appear in the lower right tions with road curvature and surround- corner, if the data is available for that street. ings. A turn direction arrow with an icon indicat- Lane guidance will appear in the lower right ing your current route location is displayed. corner if the data is available for that street. A countdown bar will be shown on the left The next turn and the distance to the next side of the vehicle information display. The turn are displayed on the vehicle informa- bar gets smaller as you get closer to the tion display. A countdown bar is shown in next turn. the arrow. The bar gets smaller as you get closer to the next turn.

2-36 Instruments and controls LIC3229 LIC3230 Compass view Far screen view Compass view is displayed when no route Far screen view shows destination infor- is set, and shows current weather condi- mation, weather and speed limit informa- tions and speed limit information (if avail- tion (if available for the street). able).

Instruments and controls 2-37 Navigation settings Available items Action The navigation related display settings can [Alerts] When this item is turned on, the view of the turning be changed. point with an alarm sound will interrupt the displays other than navigation screen when the vehicle ap- 1. Select using or proaches the guide point. and press the OK button. A menu will display. [Arrow view] When this mode is selected, the Arrow view will be displayed on the vehicle information display. 2. Using or , select [Customize [City view] When this mode is selected, the view on the vehicle Display] and then select [Navigation information display will switch from the Arrow view Settings]. to the City view as the vehicle approaches a guide point. 3. Select the preferred item using 4. Press the OK button to turn on or off the [Alerts] setting or to toggle the view mode or . between [Arrow] or [City].

2-38 Instruments and controls SECURITY SYSTEMS

The icon will not move across the screen if the vehicle is moving over speeds of 4 mph (7 km/h), yet the information will still transfer to the vehicle information display. The turn-by-turn route guidance cannot be transferred to the vehicle information display if the navigation screen is already shown or if a warning is present. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

LIC3234 LIC2930 NAVIGATION SWIPE TO METER Your vehicle has two types of security sys- Turn-by-turn route guidance can also be tems: viewed in the vehicle information display by ∙ Vehicle security system using Navigation Swipe to Meter. This can be done by programming a route, touching ∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System the turn-by-turn route icon on the center display, and swiping towards the general VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM direction of the vehicle information display. The vehicle security system provides visual The turn-by-turn route icon will move and audible alarm signals if someone across the center display and transfer the opens the doors, trunk, or hood when the route information to the vehicle informa- system is armed. It is not, however, a motion display when the vehicle is not moving. tion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

Instruments and controls 2-39 The system helps deter vehicle theft but 3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all Vehicle security system activation cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the doors. The doors can be locked with The vehicle security system will give the theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo- the Intelligent Key, door handle request following alarm: nents in all situations. Always secure your switch, or mechanical key. vehicle even if parking for a brief period. ∙ The headlights blink and the horn Never leave your Intelligent Key in the ve- 4. Confirm that the security indicator sounds intermittently but synchro- hicle, and always lock the vehicle when un- light stays on for about 30 seconds. The nously. vehicle security system is now pre- attended. Be aware of your surroundings, ∙ The alarm automatically turns off after and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever armed. The vehicle security system will automatically shift into the armed a period of time. However, the alarm possible. reactivates if the vehicle is tampered phase. The security light begins to with again. Many devices offering additional protec- flash once every three seconds. If during tion, such as component locks, identifica- the pre-armed phase one of the follow- The alarm is activated by: tion markers, and tracking systems, are ing occurs, the system will not arm: available at auto supply stores and spe- ∙ opening any door or hood without us- cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer ∙ Any door is unlocked with the mechani- ing the key or Intelligent Key (even if the such equipment. Check with your insur- cal key, the Intelligent Key or door re- door is unlocked by releasing the door ance company to see if you may be eligible quest switch. inside lock knob). for discounts for various theft protection ∙ Ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON How to stop an activated alarm features. position. How to arm the vehicle security The alarm stops only by unlocking a door ∙ Even when the driver and/or passen- or the trunk with the mechanical key, push- system gers are in the vehicle, the system will ing the button on the Intelligent Key, activate with all the doors, hood and or pushing the request switch on the driv- 1. Close all windows. (The system can be trunk lid locked with the ignition armed even if the windows are open.) er’s or passenger’s door with the Intelligent switch placed in the LOCK position. Key in range of the door handle. 2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the ve- When placing the ignition switch in hicle. the ACC or ON position, the system will be released.

2-40 Instruments and controls NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER FCC Notice: SYSTEM For USA: The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System This device complies with Part 15 of the will not allow the engine to start without FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- the use of a registered key. lowing two conditions: (1) This device If the engine fails to start using a registered may not cause harmful interference, and key (for example, when interference is (2) this device must accept any interfer- caused by another registered key, an auto- ence received, including interference mated toll road device or automatic pay- that may cause undesired operation. ment device on the key ring), restart the NOTE: engine using the following procedures: Changes or modifications not expressly 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po- approved by the party responsible for sition for approximately 5 seconds. compliance could void the user’s author- LIC0474 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or ity to operate the equipment. Security indicator light LOCK position and wait approximately For Canada: This light blinks when the ignition switch is 10 seconds. This device complies with Industry placed in the LOCK position with the key 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). removed from the ignition switch. Operation is subject to the following two 4. Restart the engine while holding the This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle conditions: (1) this device may not cause device (which may have caused the in- Immobilizer System is operational. interference, and (2) this device must ac- terference) separate from the regis- cept any interference received, including If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is tered key. interference that may cause undesired malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN operation of the device. position. recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Instruments and controls 2-41 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WIC2748 LIC3187 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) SWITCH OPERATION ᭺1 Intermittent (INT) or (AUTO) — intermittent operation can be adjusted by The windshield wiper and washer operates turning the knob ᭺A . Also, the intermit- when the ignition switch is placed in the ON tent operation speed varies in accor- position. dance with the vehicle speed (if so Push the lever down to operate the wiper equipped). (For example, when the ve- at the following speed: hicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.) Further, the rain-sensing auto wiper system (if so equipped) will adjust the speed of the intermittent operation. For additional information, refer to “Rain- sensing auto wiper system” in this section. 2-42 Instruments and controls ᭺2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed op- CAUTION NOTE: eration ∙ Do not operate the washer continu- If the windshield wiper operation is in- 3 ᭺ High (HI) — continuous high speed op- ously for more than 30 seconds. terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may eration stop moving to protect its motor. If this ∙ Do not operate the washer if the occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF Push the lever up ᭺4 to have one sweep windshield-washer fluid reservoir is position and remove the snow or ice that operation (MIST) of the wiper. empty. is on and around the wiper arms. In ap- Pull the lever toward you ᭺5 to operate the ∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on washer. The wiper will also operate several reservoir with windshield-washer again to operate the wiper. times. fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based NOTE: windshield-washer fluid concen- The speed-dependent intermittent trates may permanently stain the function may be disabled. For additional grille if spilled while filling the information, refer to “Vehicle informa- windshield-washer fluid reservoir. tion display” in this section. ∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufac- WARNING turer’s recommended levels before In freezing temperatures the washer pouring the fluid into the windshield- solution may freeze on the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the and obscure your vision which may lead windshield-washer fluid reservoir to to an accident. Warm the windshield mix the windshield-washer fluid con- with the defroster before you wash the centrate and water. windshield.

Instruments and controls 2-43 – High — High sensitive operation ∙ When the windshield glass is coated – Low — Low sensitive operation with water repellent, the speed of the rain-sensing auto wipers may be To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system higher even though the amount of the off, push up the lever to the OFF position, or rainfall is small. pull down the lever to the LO or HI position. ∙ Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing For additional information on disabling the auto wiper system when you use a car rain-sensing feature, refer to “Vehicle infor- wash. mation display” in this section. ∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers may not operate if rain does not hit the rain CAUTION sensor even if it is raining. ∙ Do not touch the rain sensor and ∙ Using Genuine NISSAN wiper blades is around it when the wiper switch is in LIC3233 recommended for proper operation the AUTO position and the ignition of the rain-sensing auto wiper sys- RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER switch is in the ON position. The wip- tem. For additional information, refer SYSTEM (if so equipped) ers may operate unexpectedly and to “Windshield wiper blades” in the cause an injury or may damage a “Do-it-yourself” section of this The rain-sensing auto wiper system can wiper. manual. automatically turn on the wipers and ad- ∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers are in- just the wiper speed depending on the tended for use during rain. If the rainfall by using the rain sensor located on switch is left in the AUTO position, the the upper part of the windshield. wipers may operate unexpectedly To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or in- push the lever down to the AUTO position sects are stuck on or around the sen- ᭺1 . The wiper will sweep once while the sor. The wipers may also operate ignition switch is in the ON position. when exhaust gas or moisture affect the rain sensor. The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the front ᭺2 (High) or toward the rear ᭺3 (Low). 2-44 Instruments and controls REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL MIRROR (if so equipped) SWITCH DEFROSTER SWITCH NOTE: The top and bottom few rows of wires on the rear window are not part of the rear window defroster system. These wires make up the antenna for the audio system.

LIC2325 WIC1435 To defrost the rear window glass and out- HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH side mirror (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch Lighting on. The rear window defroster indicator ᭺1 Rotate the switch to the position, light on the switch comes on. Push the and the front parking, tail, license plate, switch again to turn the defroster off. and instrument panel lights will come on. The rear window defroster automatically ᭺2 Rotate the switch to the position, turns off after approximately 15 minutes. and the headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on. CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear CAUTION window, be careful not to scratch or Use the headlights with the engine running damage the rear window defroster. to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Instruments and controls 2-45 NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section. To turn on the autolight system: 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position ᭺1 . 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. 3. The autolight system automatically LIC3188 turns the headlights on and off. WHA1170 Autolight system Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the Be sure you do not put anything on top The autolight system allows the headlights OFF position and a door is opened and left of the autolight sensor located in the top side of the instrument panel. The auto- to be set so they turn on and off automati- open, the headlights remain on for a period light sensor controls the autolight; if it is cally. The autolight system can: of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset. covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if ∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking, it is dark out and the headlights will illu- tail, license plate and instrument panel To turn the autolight system off, turn the minate. If this occurs while parked with lights automatically when it is dark. switch to the OFF, ,or position. the engine off and the key in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could be- ∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light. come discharged. ∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you turn the key to OFF and all doors are closed.

2-46 Instruments and controls Battery saver system LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT The battery saver system automatically (DRL) SYSTEM turns off the following lights after a period The LED portion of the headlights auto- of time when the ignition switch is placed in matically illuminate at 100% intensity when the OFF position and the doors are closed: the engine is started and the parking brake ∙ Headlights, when the headlight switch released. The LED DRL operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position. When is in the or position you turn the headlight switch to the ∙ Interior lights, when left in the ON posi- position for full illumination the LED lights tion switch from LED DRL to the park function. If the parking brake is applied before the CAUTION engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi- Even though the battery saver feature nate. The LED DRL illuminate when the parking brake is released. The LED DRL re- LIC3192 automatically turns off the headlights main on while the engine is running. Headlight beam select after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight ᭺1 To select the high beam function, push when the engine is not running to avoid switch on for interior controls and switches the lever forward. The high beam lights discharging the vehicle battery. to illuminate, as those remain off while the come on and the light illumi- switch is in the OFF position. nates. WARNING ᭺2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam. When the LED DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is ᭺3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes necessary at dusk to turn on your head- the headlight high beams on and off. lights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Instruments and controls 2-47 Lane change signal ᭺2 Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed. Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times. Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic LIC3176 LIC3193 conditions. INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS TURN SIGNAL SWITCH CONTROL Turn signal NOTE: Press the “+” button to increase the bright- The 3 flash pass feature can be disabled. ᭺1 Move the lever up or down until it ness of instrument panel lights. For additional information, refer to “Ve- latches to signal the turning direction. hicle information display” in this section. Press the “-” button to decrease the bright- When the turn is completed, the turn ness of instrument panel lights. signal cancels automatically.

2-48 Instruments and controls HORN

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

WIC1440 LIC3174 FOG LIGHT SWITCH To sound the horn, push near the center pad of the steering wheel. To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the WARNING fog light switch to the position. Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so To turn the fog lights on with the headlight could affect proper operation of the switch in the AUTO position, the headlights supplemental front air bag system. must be on, then turn the fog light switch to Tampering with the supplemental front the position. air bag system may result in serious To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light personal injury. switch to the OFF position.

Instruments and controls 2-49 CLIMATE-CONTROLLED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

3. Adjust the desired amount of air using CAUTION the control knob. The climate- controlled seat blower remains on low ∙ The battery could run down if the speed for approximately 60 seconds climate-controlled seat is operated after turning the switch on or selecting while the engine is not running. the desired temperature. ∙ Do not use the climate-controlled seat for extended periods or when no 4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed one is using the seat. or cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the control knob ∙ Do not put anything on the seat which to the OFF (center) position. The indica- insulates heat, such as a blanket, tor light ᭺B on the control knob goes off cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, with the switch in the OFF (center) po- the seat may become overheated. sition. ∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy SIC4334 To check the air filter for the climate- on the seat or pierce it with a pin or The climate-controlled seat warms up or controlled seat, it is recommended that similar objects. This may result in damage to the climate-controlled cools down the front seat by blowing warm you visit a NISSAN dealer. or cool air from under the surface of the seat. seat. The climate control switch is located WARNING ∙ Any liquid spilled on the seat should on the center console. be removed immediately with a dry Do not use or allow occupants to use cloth The climate-controlled seat can be oper- the climate-controlled seats if you or ated as follows: the occupants cannot monitor seat ∙ The climate-controlled seat has an air temperatures or have an inability to feel filter. Do not operate the climate- 1. Start the engine. pain in those body parts in contact with controlled seat without an air filter. 2. Turn the control knob ᭺A to the heat the seat. Use of the climate-controlled This may result in damage to the side ᭺1 or the cool side ᭺2 . The indica- seats by such people could result in se- system. tor light ᭺B on the control knob will illu- rious injury. ∙ When cleaning the seat, never use minate. gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.

2-50 Instruments and controls HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

∙ If any malfunctions are found or the WARNING climate-controlled seat does not op- Do not use or allow occupants to use erate, turn the switch off and have the the seat heater if you or the occupants system checked. It is recommended cannot monitor elevated seat tempera- that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this tures or have an inability to feel pain in service. body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION ∙ The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. LIC3037 ∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex- The front seats are warmed by built-in tended periods or when no one is us- heaters. ing the seat. 1. Start the engine. ∙ Do not put anything on the seat which 2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, insulates heat, such as a blanket, as desired. The indicator light in the cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, switch will illuminate. the seat may become overheated. ∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy The heater is controlled by a thermo- on the seat or pierce it with a pin or stat, automatically turning the heater similar object. This may result in dam- on and off. The indicator light will re- age to the heater. main on as long as the switch is on. ∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat 3. When the seat is warmed or before you should be removed immediately with leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the a dry cloth. switch off. Instruments and controls 2-51 HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use Push the switch again to turn the heated gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any steering wheel system off manually. The similar materials. indicator light will go off. ∙ If any malfunctions are found or the NOTE: heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system If the surface temperature of the steer- checked. It is recommended that you ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

LIC0421 The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C). Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on. If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on.

2-52 Instruments and controls VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start- ing and driving” section of this manual. When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system, the Intelligent Trace Con- trol and Active Ride Control systems are also turned off. For additional information, refer to “Integrated Dynamics-control Mod- ule” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

LIC3344 LIC3357 The vehicle should be driven with the VDC The E-call (SOS) switch is used in combina- system on for most driving conditions. tion with a NissanConnect® Services sub- scription to call for assistance in case of an If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the emergency. VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will Pushing the switch will (with a paid sub- be reduced even if the accelerator is description) reach a response specialist that pressed to the floor. If maximum engine will provide assistance based on the situa- power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, tion described by the vehicle’s occupant. turn the VDC system off. For additional information, or to enroll your vehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/ To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC connect or call 855–426–6628. OFF switch. The indicator will come on.

Instruments and controls 2-53 POWER OUTLET EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

∙ Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information. ∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. ∙ Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. ∙ Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the ve- WIC1119 hicle battery. LDI2758 Console Box ∙ Avoid using power outlets when the The extended storage switch is used when The power outlet is for powering electrical air conditioner, headlights, or rear the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is accessories such as cellular telephones. It window defroster is on. located in the fuse panel to the left of the is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. ∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a steering wheel on the instrument panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, The power outlet is powered only when the plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned off. ensure the extended storage switch is ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. pushed fully in place, as shown. ∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If CAUTION good contact is not made, the plug ∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during may overheat or the internal tem- or immediately after use. perature fuse may open. ∙ When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

2-54 Instruments and controls STORAGE

LIC3266 LIC3268 LIC3181 Pulled position Pushed position FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

Instruments and controls 2-55 WARNING To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem, please observe the following items: ∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/headrest. ∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket. LIC0016 LIC3186 SEATBACK POCKETS Front console STORAGE TRAYS The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver’s and passenger’s seats. WARNING The pockets can be used to store maps. Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.

2-56 Instruments and controls LIC2915 LIC2429 WIC1504 Rear armrest GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle. To open the console box, press up on the Use the master key when locking or un- lever ᭺1 and raise the lid ᭺2 . locking the glove box. To close, push the lid down until the lock latches. WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

Instruments and controls 2-57 CAUTION ∙ Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. ∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

LIC2312 LIC3182 OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES Front cup holders STORAGE CUP HOLDERS To open the sunglasses holder, push and WARNING release. Avoid abrupt starting and braking Only store one pair of sunglasses in the when the cup holder is being used to holder. prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. WARNING Spilled liquid can also damage the seat climate system. Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s view and to help prevent an accident.

2-58 Instruments and controls LIC2915 LIC3183 LIC3184 Rear cup holders Bottle holder — front Bottle holder — rear CAUTION CAUTION Use only soft cups in the cup holder. ∙ Do not use the bottle holder for any Hard objects can injure you in an other objects that could be thrown accident. about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident. ∙ Do not use the bottle holder for open liquid containers.

Instruments and controls 2-59 WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS The driver’s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the WARNING windows. ∙ Make sure that all passengers have To open a window, push the switch and their hands, etc., inside the vehicle continue to hold it down until the desired while it is in motion and before closing window position is reached. To close a win- the windows. Use the window lock dow, pull the switch and continue to hold it switch to prevent unexpected use of up until the desired window position is the power windows. reached. ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave LIC3238 children, people who require the as- Driver’s side power window sistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem- switch perature inside a closed vehicle on a 1. Window lock switch warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of 2. Power door lock switch injury or death to people and pets. 3. Front passenger side The power windows operate when the ig- automatic switch nition switch is placed in the ON position, or for a period of time after the ignition switch 4. Right rear passenger side is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s 5. Left rear passenger side or passenger’s door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is 6. Driver side automatic switch canceled.

2-60 Instruments and controls Locking passengers’ windows When the window lock switch is depressed, only the driver’s side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

LIC2397 LIC0718 Front passenger’s power window Rear power window switch switch The rear power window switches open or The passenger’s window switch operates close only the corresponding windows. To only the corresponding passenger’s win- open the window, push the switch to the dow. To open the window partially, push the first detent and continue to hold it down switch down lightly until the desired win- until the desired window position is dow position is reached. To close the win- reached ᭺1 . To close the window, pull the dow partially, pull the switch up until the switch to the first detent and continue to desired window position is reached. hold up until the desired window position is reached ᭺2 .

Instruments and controls 2-61 Auto-reverse function If the windows do not close If the control unit detects something automatically caught in an automatic operation window If the power window automatic function as it is closing, the window will be immedi- (closing only) does not operate properly, ately lowered. perform the following procedure to initial- ize the power window system. The auto-reverse function may be activated when the window is closed by auto- 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po- matic operation when the ignition switch is sition. placed in the ON position or for a period of 2. Close the door. time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. 3. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch. Depending on the environment or driv- LIC0410 ing conditions, the auto-reverse func- 4. Pull the power window switch and hold tion may be activated if an impact or it to close the window, and then hold Automatic operation the switch for more than 3 seconds load similar to something being caught after the window is closed completely. To fully open a window equipped with au- in the window occurs. tomatic operation, push the window 5. Release the power window switch. Op- switch down to the second detent and re- WARNING erate the window by automatic func- lease it; it need not be held. The window tion to confirm the initialization is com- There are some small distances imme- automatically opens all the way. To stop plete. diately before the closed position which the window, lift the switch up while the win- cannot be detected. Make sure that all 6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for dow is opening. passengers have their hands, etc., in- other windows. side the vehicle before closing the To fully close a window equipped with au- If the power window automatic function window. tomatic operation, pull the switch up to the does not operate properly after perform- second detent and release it; it need not be ing the above procedure, have your vehicle held. To stop the window, push the switch checked. It is recommended that you visit a down while the window is closing. NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-62 Instruments and controls DUAL PANEL MOONROOF (if so equipped)

Sliding the moonroof Tilting the moonroof To slide the moonroof: To tilt the moonroof: ∙ To fully open the moonroof, push the ∙ To tilt the moonroof up, push and re- switch ᭺1 toward the open position un- lease the tilt switch ᭺3 . When the moon- til it reaches the second detent. If the roof is open, it will automatically close switch ᭺1 is pushed to the first detent, and then tilt up. only the sunshade will open. ∙ To tilt the moonroof down, push and ∙ To fully close the moonroof, push the release the tilt switch ᭺3 or push the switch ᭺2 toward the close position un- switch ᭺2 toward the close position until it reaches the second detent. If the til it reaches the first detent. switch ᭺2 is pushed to the first detent, ∙ To tilt the moonroof down and close the the moonroof will close but the sun- sunshade at the same time, push the shade will remain open. LIC3477 switch ᭺2 to the close position until it POWER MOONROOF ∙ To open or close the moonroof part reaches the second detent. way, release the switch ᭺1 or ᭺2 while The moonroof will only operate when the the moonroof is sliding open or closed. Auto-reverse function (when ignition switch is in the ON position. The The moonroof will stop at the desired closing or tilting down the power moonroof is operational for a period position. moonroof) of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s The auto-reverse function can be acti- door or the front passenger’s door is vated when the moonroof is closed or opened during this period of time, the tilted down by automatic operation when power to the moonroof is canceled. the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Instruments and controls 2-63 Depending on the environment or driv- the moonroof will fully close gradually. ing conditions, the auto-reverse func- Make sure nothing is caught in the moon- tion may be activated if an impact or roof. load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs. WARNING ∙ In an accident you could be thrown WARNING from the vehicle through an open There are some small distances imme- moonroof. Always use seat belts and diately before the closed position which child restraints. cannot be detected. Make sure that all ∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or passengers have their hands, etc., in- extend any portion of their body out side the vehicle before closing the of the moonroof opening while the moonroof. vehicle is in motion or while the When closing moonroof is closing. LIC2644 Sunshade If the control unit detects something CAUTION caught in the moonroof as it moves to the ∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or To open the sunshade: front, the moonroof will immediately open sand from the moonroof before backward. ∙ To fully open the sunshade, push the opening. switch ᭺1 toward the open position un- When tilting down ∙ Do not place heavy objects on the til it reaches the first detent. If the control unit detects something moonroof or surrounding area. ∙ To fully open the sunshade and the caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof together, push the switch ᭺1 moonroof will immediately tilt up. toward the open position until it reaches the second detent. If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens;

2-64 Instruments and controls REAR POWER SUNSHADE (if so equipped)

To close the sunshade: ∙ To fully close the sunshade, push the switch ᭺2 toward the close position until it reaches the second detent. ∙ Pushing the switch ᭺2 to the first detent will close the moonroof only. If the moonroof does not close Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WIC1443 LIC3231 The rear sunshade operates when the ig- CAUTION nition switch is in the ACC or ON position. ∙ Do not place objects (such as newspa- The rear sunshade switch is located on the pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the front console. screen inlet port. Doing so may en- ∙ To raise the sunshade, push the upper tangle these objects in the screen when it is extending or retracting, side of the switch ᭺1 . causing improper operation or dam- ∙ To lower the sunshade, push the lower age to the screen. 2 side of the switch ᭺. ∙ Do not push the sunshade arm with ∙ The switch need not be held down. your hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result.

Instruments and controls 2-65 INTERIOR LIGHTS

∙ Do not hang any object on the arm rail NOTE: as this may result in improper opera- The step lights illuminate when the tion or damage the screen. driver and passenger doors are opened ∙ Do not forcefully pull the screen. Do- regardless of the interior light switch po- ing so may elongate the screen. Im- sition. These lights will turn off auto- proper operation or damage to the matically after a period of time while screen may result. doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged. ∙ To avoid personal injury, keep your hands, fingers and head away from CAUTION the sunshade arm, arm rail and screen inlet port. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could re- ∙ Do not allow children near the rear sult in a discharged battery. sunshade system. They could be LIC2302 injured. ᭺1 The interior lights can be turned on ∙ Do not pull or push the rear sunshade. regardless of door position. The lights This could cause improper operation will go off after a period of time unless or damage it. the ignition switch is placed in the ON position when any door is opened. ᭺2 The interior lights can be set to operate when the doors are opened. To turn off the interior lights when a is door open, push the switch; the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or the driver’s door is closed and locked. The lights will also go off after a period of time when the doors are open. 2-66 Instruments and controls LIC2303 LIC2304 LIC1083 CONSOLE LIGHT MAP LIGHTS PERSONAL LIGHTS The console light will turn on whenever the To turn the map lights on, push the To turn the rear personal lights on, push the parking lights or headlights are illuminated. switches. To turn them off, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch switches again. again. The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control in the vehicle information display. CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

Instruments and controls 2-67 TRUNK LIGHT HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro- WARNING opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the vides a convenient way to consolidate the light goes off. For additional information, functions of up to three individual hand- ∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal refer to “Exterior and interior lights” in the held transmitters into one built-in device. Transceiver with any garage door “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. opener that lacks safety stop and re- HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: verse features as required by federal ∙ Will operate most radio frequency de- safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models vices such as garage doors, gates, manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A home and office lighting, entry door garage door opener which cannot de- locks and security systems. tect an object in the path of a closing ∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No garage door and then automatically separate batteries are required. If the stop and reverse does not meet cur- vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis- rent federal safety standards. Using a connected, HomeLink® will retain all garage door opener without these programming. features increases the risk of serious injury or death. When the HomeLink® Universal Trans- ∙ During the programming procedure ceiver is programmed, retain the original your garage door or security gate will transmitter for future programming pro- open and close (if the transmitter is cedures (Example: new vehicle pur- within range). Make sure that people chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the or objects are clear of the garage door, programmed HomeLink® Universal gate, etc., that you are programming. Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” in this section.

2-68 Instruments and controls ∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. LIC2365 LIC2366 NOTE: 1. Position the end of your hand-held 2. Using both hands, simultaneously transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from press and hold the desired HomeLink® Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi- the HomeLink® surface, keeping the button and hand-held transmitter but- tion when programming HomeLink®. It is HomeLink® indicator light ᭺1 in view. ton. DO NOT release until the also recommended that a new battery HomeLink® indicator light ᭺1 flashes be placed in the hand-held transmitter slowly and then rapidly. When the indi- of the device being programmed to cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons HomeLink® for quicker programming may be released. (The rapid flashing and accurate transmission of the radio indicates successful programming.) frequency. NOTE: Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in “Programming HomeLink® for Cana- dian customers and gate openers” in this section. Instruments and controls 2-69 3. Press and hold the programmed 5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” door opener by using the “Training” proce- HomeLink® button and observe the in- button. dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®” dicator light. Step 2 with the following: 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press ᭺1 ∙ If the indicator light is and hold the trained HomeLink® but- NOTE: solid/continuous, programming is ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat complete and your device should the “press/hold/release” sequence up When programming a garage door activate when the HomeLink® button to three times to complete the training opener, etc., unplug the device during is pressed and released. process. HomeLink® should now acti- the “cycling” process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener com- ᭺1 vate your rolling code equipped device. ∙ If the indicator light blinks rapidly ponents. for 2 seconds and then turns to a 7. If you have any questions or are having solid/continuous light, continue difficulty programming your 1. For additional information, refer to “Pro- with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de- HomeLink® buttons, refer to the gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this vice. A second person may make the HomeLink® web site at: section. following steps easier. Use a ladder or www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- 2. Using both hands, simultaneously other device. Do not stand on your 3515. press and hold the desired HomeLink® vehicle to perform the next steps. PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR button and the hand-held transmitter 4. At the receiver located on the garage button. During training, your hand-held door opener motor in the garage, lo- CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE transmitter may automatically stop cate the “learn” or “smart” button (the OPENERS transmitting. Continue to press and name and color of the button may vary Canadian radio-frequency laws require hold the desired HomeLink® button by manufacturer but it is usually lo- transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) cated near where the hanging an- after several seconds of transmission – your hand-held transmitter every tenna wire is attached to the unit). If which may not be long enough for 2 seconds until the frequency signal there is difficulty locating the button, HomeLink® to pick up the signal during has been learned. The HomeLink® indi- reference the garage door opener’s training. Similar to this Canadian law, some cator light will flash slowly and then manual. U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim- rapidly after several seconds upon eout” in the same manner. successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- slowly and then rapidly. When the indi- culties training a gate operator or garage cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons 2-70 Instruments and controls may be released. The rapid flashing in- ∙ Position the hand-held transmitter with To clear all programming: dicates successful training. its battery area facing away from the 1. Press and hold the two outer Proceed with “Programming HomeLink® surface. HomeLink® buttons until the indicator HomeLink®” step 3 to complete. ∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink® light begins to flash in approximately If the device was unplugged during the and hand-held transmitter buttons 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than programming procedure, remember without interruption. 20 seconds. to plug it back in when programming is completed. ∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 2. Release both buttons. 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the OPERATING THE HOMELINK® HomeLink® is now in the programming HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit- mode and can be programmed at any UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER ter in that position for up to 15 seconds. time beginning with “Programming The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after If HomeLink® is not programmed within HomeLink®” - Step 1. it is programmed, can be used to activate that time, try holding the transmitter in another position – keeping the indicator REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE the programmed device. To operate, sim- HOMELINK® BUTTON ply press and release the appropriate pro- light in view at all times. grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans- If you have any questions or are having To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal ceiver button. The amber indicator light will difficulty programming your HomeLink® Transceiver button, complete the following: illuminate while the signal is being trans- buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: mitted. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. button. DO NOT release the button. For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED 2. The indicator light will begin to flash time. INFORMATION after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro- PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- The following procedure clears the programming HomeLink®” - Step 1. grammed information from both buttons. DIAGNOSIS For questions or comments, contact Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How- If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or ever, individual buttons can be repro- 1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico). hand-held transmitter information: grammed. For additional information, refer ∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter bat- to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink® teries with new batteries. button” in this section. Instruments and controls 2-71 The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but- FCC Notice: ton has now been reprogrammed. The For USA: new device can be activated by pressing the HomeLink® button that was just pro- This device complies with Part 15 of the grammed. This procedure will not affect FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- any other programmed HomeLink® but- lowing two conditions: (1) This device tons. may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference re- IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN ceived, including interference that may If your vehicle is stolen, you should change cause undesired operation. the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into NOTE: HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of Changes or modifications not expressly each device or call the manufacturer or approved by the party responsible for dealer of those devices for additional infor- compliance could void the user’s author- mation. ity to operate the equipment. When your vehicle is recovered, you will For Canada: need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni- versal Transceiver with your new trans- This device complies with Industry mitter information. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

2-72 Instruments and controls 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys...... 3-2 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-2 notwork...... 3-21 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Hood ...... 3-22 keys...... 3-3 Trunk lid ...... 3-22 Doors ...... 3-4 Opener operation ...... 3-23 Locking with key...... 3-5 Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-23 Locking with inside lock knob...... 3-5 Interior trunk access ...... 3-23 Locking with power door lock switch ...... 3-5 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-24 Automatic door locks...... 3-6 Opening the fuel-filler door ...... 3-24 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-6 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-24 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-6 Steering wheel ...... 3-26 Operating range...... 3-8 Manual operation (if so equipped) ...... 3-27 Door locks/unlocks precaution ...... 3-8 Automatic operation (if so equipped) ...... 3-27 NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation ...... 3-9 Sun visors ...... 3-28 How to use the remote keyless entry Vanity mirrors ...... 3-29 function ...... 3-13 Mirrors ...... 3-29 Warning signals ...... 3-16 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror ...... 3-29 Troubleshooting guide ...... 3-16 Outside mirrors ...... 3-30 Remote Engine Start ...... 3-19 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .....3-31 Remote Engine Start operating range ...... 3-19 Memory Storage Function (Key-Link)...... 3-32 Remote starting the vehicle ...... 3-19 Memory storage function ...... 3-32 Extending engine run time ...... 3-20 Entry/exit function ...... 3-33 Canceling a Remote Engine Start...... 3-20 System operation ...... 3-34 KEYS

Since the registration process requires ∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key. erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, ∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you sharply against another object. have to the NISSAN dealer. ∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli- A key number plate is supplied with your gent Key. keys. Record the key number and keep it in ∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom- mediately wipe until it is completely mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for dry. duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an is very important to keep track of your key extended period in an area where number plate. temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F). LPD2346 ∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with 1. Intelligent Keys (two sets) A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to a key holder that contains a magnet. 2. Mechanical keys duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can 3. Key number plate (one plate) ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near be duplicated without knowing the key equipment that produces a magnetic NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® number. field, such as a TV, audio equipment Your vehicle can only be driven with the and personal computers. CAUTION Intelligent Keys which are registered to If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System com- Listed below are conditions or occur- recommends erasing the ID code of that ponents. rences which will damage the Intelli- Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may Never leave these keys in the vehicle. gent Key: prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli- ∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor- As many as four Intelligent Keys can be contains electrical components, to mation regarding the erasing procedure, it registered and used with one vehicle. The come into contact with water or salt is recommended that you visit a NISSAN new keys must be registered by a NISSAN water. This could affect the system dealer. dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key function. System of your vehicle. 3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments CAUTION NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot. You can only drive your vehicle using the For additional information, refer to “Doors” Intelligent Keys which are registered to the in this section and “Storage” in the “Instru- NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System comments and controls” section of this manual. ponents in your vehicle. Valet hand-off The mechanical key can be used for all the locks. When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep Never leave the keys in the vehicle. the mechanical key with you to protect Additional or replacement keys: your belongings. If you still have a key, the key number is not SPA1951 To prevent the glove box from being necessary when you need extra NISSAN Mechanical key opened during valet hand-off, follow the Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex- procedures below. isting key can be duplicated without know- The Intelligent Key contains the mechani- 1. Remove the mechanical key from the ing the key number. As many as four cal key, which can be used in case of a Intelligent Key. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys discharged battery. 2. Lock the glove box with the mechani- can be used with one vehicle. You should To remove the mechanical key, release the cal key. bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. tem keys that you have to the NISSAN 3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet dealer for registration. This is because the To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it and keep the mechanical key with you. registration process will erase the memory into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob of all key codes previously registered into returns to the lock position. For additional information, refer to “Stor- age” in the “Instruments and controls” sec- the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af- The mechanical key can be used for operation of this manual. ter the registration process, these compo- tion in the same way as an ordinary key. nents will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 DOORS given to the dealer at the time of registra- When the doors are locked using one of the ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death tion will no longer be able to start your following methods, the doors cannot be through unintended operation of the vehicle. opened using the inside or outside door vehicle and/or its systems, including handles. The doors must be unlocked to entrapment in windows and/or inad- CAUTION open the doors. vertent door lock activation, do not Do not allow the immobilizer system leave children, people who require the key, which contains an electrical tran- WARNING assistance of others and/or pets un- sponder, to come into contact with wa- ∙ Always have the doors locked while attended in your vehicle. Additionally, ter or salt water. This could affect sys- driving. Along with the use of seat the temperature inside a closed ve- tem function. belts, this provides greater safety in hicle on a warm day can quickly be- the event of an accident by helping to come high enough to cause a signifi- prevent persons from being thrown cant risk of injury or death to people from the vehicle. This also helps keep and/or pets. children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. ∙ Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPD2129 LPD2092 LPD2093 Driver’s side Inside lock LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCKING WITH KEY LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB LOCK SWITCH To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as To lock the door without the key, move the To lock all the doors without a key, push the shown. inside lock knob to the lock position ᭺1 , door lock switch (driver’s or front passen- then close the door. Manual ger’s side) to the lock position ᭺1 . When To unlock the door without the key, move locking the door this way, be certain not to To lock a door, turn the key toward the front the inside lock knob to the unlock position leave the key inside the vehicle. of the vehicle ᭺1 . To unlock, turn the key ᭺2 . To unlock all the doors without a key, push toward the rear of the vehicle ᭺2 . the door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to the unlock position ᭺2 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Lockout protection WARNING When the power door lock switch (driver’s ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect or front passenger’s side) is moved to the electric medical equipment. Those lock position with the Intelligent Key left in who use a pacemaker should contact the vehicle and any door open, all doors will the electric medical equipment unlock automatically and a chime will manufacturer for the possible influ- sound after the door is closed. ences before use. AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS ∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. ∙ All doors lock automatically when the The FAA advises the radio waves may vehicle speed reaches 15 mph affect aircraft navigation and com- (24 km/h). munication systems. Do not operate ∙ All doors unlock automatically when the the Intelligent Key while on an air- transmission is placed in the P (Park) LPD2570 plane. Make sure the buttons are not position or when the ignition switch is CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK operated unintentionally when the placed in the OFF position. unit is stored for a flight. Child safety locks help prevent the rear ∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the NOTE: doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the ve- vehicle when you leave the vehicle. The automatic door unlock function can hicle. The Intelligent Key system can operate all be changed using the “Vehicle Settings” the door locks using the remote control of the vehicle information display. For The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors. function or pushing the request switch on additional information, refer to “Vehicle the vehicle without taking the key out from information display” in the “Instruments When the lever is in the unlock position ᭺2 , a pocket or purse. The operating environ- and controls” section of this manual. the door can be opened from the outside ment and/or conditions may affect the In- or the inside. telligent Key system operation. When the lever is in the LOCK position ᭺1 , the door can be opened only from the outside.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Be sure to read the following before using ∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park- As many as four Intelligent Keys can be the Intelligent Key system. ing meter. registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of In such cases, correct the operating condi- additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom- CAUTION tions before using the Intelligent Key func- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with tion or use the mechanical key. you when operating the vehicle. Although the life of the battery varies de- The Intelligent Key is capable of receiving pending on the operating conditions, the and transmitting radio waves. The Intelli- battery’s life is approximately two years. If gent Key system transmits weak radio the battery is discharged, replace it with a waves from various distances. Environ- new one. mental conditions may interfere with the When the Intelligent Key battery is low, a operation of the Intelligent Key system un- yellow indicator illuminates with the mes- der the following operating conditions: sage “Key ID Incorrect” in the vehicle information display. For additional information, ∙ When operating near a location where refer to “Vehicle information display warn- strong radio waves are transmitted, ings and indicators” in the “Instruments such as a TV tower, power station and and controls” section of this manual. broadcasting station. Since the Intelligent Key is capable of re- ∙ When in possession of wireless equip- ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near ment, such as a cellular telephone, equipment which transmits strong radio transceiver, or a CB radio. waves, such as signals from a TV and per- ∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact sonal computer, the battery life may be- with or covered by metallic materials. come shorter. ∙ When any type of radio wave remote For additional information, refer to “Battery control is used nearby. replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 NOTE: If all doors are already unlocked, opening the trunk does NOT require an Intelligent Key to be in range of the trunk request switch or rear of the vehicle. When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch ᭺1 . LPD2554 If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS switches may not function. PRECAUTION When the Intelligent Key is within the oper- ∙ Do not push the door handle request ating range, it is possible for anyone, even switch with the Intelligent Key held in someone who does not carry the Intelli- your hand as illustrated. The close dis- gent Key, to push the request switch to tance to the door handle will cause the lock/unlock the doors within range. Intelligent Key system to have difficulty LPD2073 recognizing that the Intelligent Key is OPERATING RANGE outside the vehicle. The Intelligent Key functions can only be ∙ After locking with the door handle reused when the Intelligent Key is within the quest switch, verify the doors are se- specified operating range from the request curely locked by testing them. switch ᭺1 .

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors. ∙ Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

LPD2399 LPD2347 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® Locking doors OPERATION 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- You can lock or unlock the doors without tion, place the ignition switch in the taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket LOCK position and make sure you carry or bag. the Intelligent Key with you. When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, 2. Close all doors. you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing 3. Push any door handle request switch the door handle request switch within the while carrying the Intelligent Key with range of operation. you. 4. All doors will lock. 5. The hazard warning lights flash twice, a chime sounds twice, and the front and tail lights may turn on for 10 seconds. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 ∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the door Lockout protection handle request switch while any door To prevent the Intelligent Key from being is open. However, doors lock with the accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout mechanical key even if any door is protection is equipped with the Intelligent open. Key system. ∙ Doors do not lock with the door When any door is open, the doors are handle request switch with the Intel- locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put ligent Key inside the vehicle and a inside the vehicle and all the doors are beep sounds to warn you. However, closed; a chime will sound and the lock will when an Intelligent Key is inside the automatically unlock. vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key. NOTE: The doors may not lock when the Intelli- LPD2165 CAUTION gent Key is in the same hand that is op- NOTE: ∙ After locking the doors using the re- erating the request switch to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, ∙ Request switches for all doors and quest switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by pocket or your other hand. trunk lid can be deactivated when the operating the door handles or the “Ext. Door Switch” setting is switched trunk lid request switch. to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For addi- ∙ When locking the doors using the re- tional information, refer to “Vehicle quest switch, make sure to have the information display” in the “Instru- Intelligent Key in your possession be- ments and controls” section of this fore operating the request switch to manual. prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle. ∙ Doors lock with the door handle re- ∙ The request switch is operational only quest switch ᭺1 while the ignition when the Intelligent Key has been de- switch is not in the LOCK position. tected by the Intelligent Key system.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments CAUTION The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions: ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials. LPD2347 LPD2165 Unlocking doors NOTE: 1. Carry the Intelligent Key. ∙ If “Selective Unlock” is turned off in the Vehicle Settings, all doors will un- 2. Push the door handle request switch. lock upon the first request switch ᭺1 3. The door on which the request switch press. was pressed will unlock and the hazard warning lights flash once, the outside ∙ Request switches for all doors and buzzer sounds once, and the front and trunk lid can be deactivated when the tail lights may turn on for 30 seconds. “Ext. Door Switch” is switched to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle 4. Push the door handle request switch information display. For additional again within one minute, the outside information, refer to “Vehicle infor- buzzer sounds once and the remaining mation display” in the “Instruments doors unlock. and controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 If a door handle is pulled while unlocking The interior light can be turned off without the doors, that door may not be unlocked. waiting by performing one of the following Returning the door handle to its original operations: position will unlock the door. If the door ∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po- does not unlock after returning the door sition. handle, push the door handle request switch to unlock the door. ∙ Locking the doors with the remote control. All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is per- ∙ Switching the room light switch to the formed within one minute after pushing OFF position. the request switch. ∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the ∙ Opening any door. OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For addi- ∙ Pushing the ignition switch. tional information, refer to “Vehicle in- LPD2351 The interior light timer illuminates for a pe- formation display” in the “Instruments riod of time when a door is unlocked and and controls” section of this manual. Opening the trunk lid the room light switch is in the DOOR posi- 1. Push the trunk opener request switch tion. ᭺A for more than 1 second while carrying the Intelligent Key with you. 2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound four times. 3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk. Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key. 3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments When all doors are locked and the trunk lid CAUTION is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the After locking the doors using the Intel- trunk will open. ligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the HOW TO USE THE REMOTE door handles. KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle. LPD2257 The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions: Locking doors ∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK operational range. position. ∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- 2. Close all doors. charged. 3. Press the button on the Intelli- CAUTION gent Key. When locking the doors using the Intel- 4. The hazard warning lights flash twice, ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the horn beeps once, and the front and the vehicle. tail lights may turn on for 10 seconds. 5. All doors will be locked.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 NOTE: ∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the If Selective Unlock is turned off in the vehicle information display. For addi- Vehicle Settings, all doors will unlock tional information, refer to “Vehicle in- upon the first press of the Intelli- formation display” in the “Instruments gent Key remote. For additional informa- and controls” section of this manual. tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” Opening windows section of this manual. The Intelligent Key allows you to simultane- All doors will be locked automatically un- ously open windows equipped with auto- less one of the following operations is per- matic operation. formed within one minute after pressing ∙ To open the windows, press and hold the button: the button on the Intelligent Key LPD2258 ∙ Opening any doors. for longer than 3 seconds. The door windows will lower while holding Unlocking doors ∙ Pushing the ignition switch. down the button on the Intelligent The interior light illuminates for a period of Key. 1. Press the button on the Intelligent time when a door is unlocked and the Key. room light switch is in the DOOR position. NOTE: 2. The driver’s door will unlock and the The light can be turned off without waiting The windows will stop lowering at the hazard warning lights flash once, and by performing one of the following opera- time the button is released. the front and tail lights may turn on for tions: 30 seconds. However, the Intelligent Key cannot be ∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po- used from inside the vehicle to lower the 3. Press the button again within sition. windows.The door windows cannot be one minute and the remaining doors closed with the Intelligent Key. unlock. ∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key. ∙ Switching the room light switch to the OFF position. 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments The panic alarm stops when: ∙ It has run for a period of time, or ∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key. ∙ The request switch on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelli- gent Key is in range of the door handle. ∙ The trunk open request switch is pressed while the Intelligent key is in range of the trunk request switch area and the doors are locked.

WPD0364 WPD0361 Releasing the trunk lid Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- Press the button for longer than ened, you may activate the panic alarm to 1 second to open the trunk lid. The trunk call attention by pressing and holding release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. the button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 1 second. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 NOTE: Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is trig- If you change the answer back horn and gered. light flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the vehicle information display WARNING SIGNALS screen will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from To help prevent the vehicle from moving the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle unexpectedly by erroneous operation of information display screen can also be the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the used to change the answer back horn vehicle from being stolen, a chime or mode. For additional information, refer buzzer sounds from inside and outside the to “Vehicle information display” in the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the “Instruments and controls” section of instrument panel. this manual. When a chime or beep sounds or a warning LPD2259 is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle To deactivate: Press and hold the and the Intelligent Key. Answer back horn feature and buttons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard indicator lights will flash three For additional information, refer to If desired, the answer back horn feature “Troubleshooting guide” in this section and can be deactivated using the Intelligent times to confirm that the answer back horn feature has been deactivated. “Vehicle information display” in the “Instru- Key. When it is deactivated and the ments and controls” section of this manual. button is pressed, the hazard indicator To activate: Press and hold the TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE lights flash twice. When the button is and buttons for at least 2 seconds pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights once more. Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that nor the horn operates. The hazard indicator lights will flash once are programmed for the vehicle. If another and the horn will sound once to confirm Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve- that the horn beep feature has been reac- hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif- tivated. ferently than expected.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

The red “Shift to Park” warning ap- When pushing the ignition switch to pears on the vehicle information dis- The shift lever is not in the P (Park) Move the shift lever to the P (Park) stop the engine play and the inside warning chime position. position. sounds continuously.

The door open warning appears on When opening the driver’s door to get The ignition switch is in the ACC Place the ignition switch in the ON po- the display and the inside warning out of the vehicle position. sition or close the driver’s door. chime sounds continuously.

The yellow “No Key Detected” warning appears on the vehicle information display, the outside chime sounds The Intelligent Key is not detected in- Place the ignition switch in the OFF three times and the inside warning side of the vehicle. position. When closing the door after getting chime sounds for approximately three out of the vehicle seconds. The red “Shift to Park” warning ap- The ignition switch is in the ACC or pears on the vehicle information dis- OFF position and the shift lever is not Carry the Intelligent Key with you. play and the inside and outside in the P (Park) position. chimes sound continuously.

The outside chime sounds for approxi- When closing the door with the inside mately three seconds and all the The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. lock knob turned to LOCK doors unlock.

When pushing the door handle re- The outside chime sounds for approxi- quest switch or the LOCK button on The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. mately three seconds. the Intelligent Key to lock the door

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

Replace the battery with a new one. The Intelligent Key battery indicator For additional information, refer to The battery charge is low. appears on the display. “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it- When pushing the ignition switch to yourself” section of this manual. start the engine The yellow “Key ID Incorrect” warning The Intelligent Key is not detected in- Carry the registered Intelligent Key appears on the vehicle information side of the vehicle. with you. display.

The outside chime sounds for approxi- When closing the trunk lid mately 10 seconds and the trunk lid The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. opens.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REMOTE ENGINE START

Laws in some local communities may re- of others or pets unattended in your ve- strict the use of remote starters. For ex- hicle. Additionally, the temperature in- ample, some laws require a person using side a closed vehicle on a warm day can Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in quickly become high enough to cause a view. Check local regulations for any re- significant risk of injury or death to quirements. people and pets. Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi- CAUTION tional information, refer to “Conditions the When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- Remote Engine Start will not work” in this charged or other strong radio wave section. sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating Other conditions can affect the perfor- range becomes narrower, and the Intel- mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. LPD2078 ligent Key may not function properly. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN The button will be on the NISSAN In- Intelligent Key®” in this section. The Remote Engine Start function can only telligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote En- be used when the Intelligent Key is within gine Start. This feature allows the engine to REMOTE ENGINE START the specified operating range from the ve- start from outside the vehicle. OPERATING RANGE hicle. The following features may be affected when Remote Engine Start is used: WARNING The Remote Engine Start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the ve- ∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate To help avoid risk of injury or death hicle. control system will default to either a through unintended operation of the heating or cooling mode depending on vehicle and/or its systems, including REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE outside and cabin temperatures. For entrapment in windows or inadvertent To use the Remote Engine Start feature to additional information, refer to “Remote door lock activation, do not leave chil- start the engine perform the following: Engine Start logic” in the “Monitor, cli- dren, people who require the assistance mate, audio, phone and voice recogni- 1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle. tion systems” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 2. Press the button to lock all EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE doors. The Remote Engine Start feature can be START 3. Within 5 seconds press and hold extended one time by performing the To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform the button until the turn signal steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle” one of the following: lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If in this section. Run time will be calculated the vehicle is not within view press and as follows: ∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle hold the button for at least 2 sec- and press until the parking lights ∙ The first 10 minute run time will start turn off. onds. when the Remote Engine Start function The following events will occur when the is performed. ∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers. engine starts: ∙ The second 10 minutes will start imme- ∙ Cycle the ignition switch ON and then ∙ The parking lights will turn on and re- diately when the Remote Engine Start OFF. main on as long as the engine is run- function is performed again. For ex- ning. ∙ The extended engine run time has example, if the engine has been running pired. ∙ The doors will be locked and the climate for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are control system may come on. added, the engine will run for a total of ∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired. 15 minutes. ∙ The engine will continue to run for ∙ The engine hood has been opened. ∙ Extending engine run time will bring you 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend ∙ The shift lever is moved out of park. the time for an additional 10 minutes. to the two Remote Engine Start limit. ∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry For additional information, refer to “Ex- A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, into the vehicle. tending engine run time” in this section. or a single Remote Engine Start with an Depress and hold the brake then push the extension, are allowed between ignition ∙ The ignition switch is pushed without push-button ignition switch to the ON po- cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled an Intelligent Key in the vehicle. to the ON position and then back to the sition before driving. For additional infor- ∙ The ignition switch is pushed with an OFF position before the Remote Engine mation, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the Start procedure can be used again. “Starting and driving” section of this brake pedal is not depressed. manual.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE ∙ The I–Key Indicator Light remains solid START WILL NOT WORK in the vehicle information display. The Remote Engine Start will not operate if ∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry any of the following conditions are present: into the vehicle. ∙ “Remote Engine Start” is turned off in ∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single the “Locking” section of the Vehicle Set- Remote Engine Start with an extension, tings menu. have already been used. ∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON ∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park). position. ∙ There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle. ∙ The hood is not securely closed. ∙ The Remote Engine Start function has ∙ The hazard warning lights are on. been switched to the OFF position in ∙ The engine is still running. The engine Vehicle Settings of the vehicle informa- must be completely stopped. Wait at tion display. For additional information, least 6 seconds if the engine goes from refer to “Vehicle information display” in running to off. This is not applicable the “Instruments and controls” section when extending engine run time. of this manual. The Remote Engine Start may display a ∙ The button is not pressed and warning or indicator in the vehicle informa- held for at least 2 seconds. tion display. For additional information, re- ∙ The button is not pressed and fer to “Vehicle information display” in the held within 5 seconds of pressing the “Instruments and controls” section of this lock button. manual. ∙ The brake is pressed. ∙ The doors are not closed and locked. ∙ The trunk or a back door is open. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 HOOD TRUNK LID

WARNING ∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Ex- haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. ∙ Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the LPD2613 rear seatback and trunk lid securely ᭺1 Pull the hood lock release handle lo- When closing the hood, lower it slowly and latched when not in use, and prevent cated below the driver side instrument make sure it locks into place. children’s access to car keys. panel. The hood will spring up slightly. ᭺2 Push the lever at the front of the hood WARNING to the side as illustrated with your fin- ∙ Make sure the hood is completely gertips and raise the hood. closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. ∙ If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk. To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illuminated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light. The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the interior of the trunk lid. LPD2707 WPD0385 INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS Instrument panel INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE The trunk can be accessed from the pas- OPENER OPERATION senger side of the rear seat. WARNING To open the trunk lid, push the opener 1. Move the front passenger seat to the switch. Closely supervise children when they most forward position. are around cars to prevent them from To close the trunk lid, lower and push the playing and becoming locked in the 2. Open the access cover on the rear par- trunk lid down securely. trunk where they could be seriously in- cel shelf. NOTE: jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched 3. Push down on the button on the rear You can open the trunk lid with the Intel- when not in use, and prevent children’s parcel shelf. ligent Key. For additional information, access to car keys. 4. Fold down the passenger’s side seat- refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in this back. section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23 FUEL-FILLER DOOR

WARNING 2. To open the fuel-filler door, push the right side of the fuel-filler door to re- ∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the lease. cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely these areas by passengers without and lock the doors. proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or NOTE: sudden stop. The fuel-filler door will unlock using the ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or key only when all doors are unlocked. straps to help prevent it from sliding Unlocking the driver’s door will not un- or shifting. Do not place cargo higher lock the fuel-filler door. than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could FUEL-FILLER CAP cause personal injury. WPD0454 WARNING ∙ When returning the seatbacks to the OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR upright position, be certain they are ∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and The fuel-filler door automatically unlocks completely secured in the latched po- highly explosive under certain condi- when the driver’s door is unlocked. sition. If they are not completely se- tions. You could be burned or seri- cured, passengers may be injured in 1. Unlock the fuel-filler door using one of ously injured if it is misused or mis- an accident or sudden stop. the following operations. handled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or ∙ Closely supervise children when they ∙ Unlock the driver’s door with the In- sparks near the vehicle when are around cars to prevent them from telligent Key. refueling. playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously ∙ Push the power door lock switch to ∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank injured. Keep the car locked, with the the unlock position. after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off rear seatback and trunk lid securely automatically. Continued refueling ∙ Push the door handle request switch. latched when not in use, and prevent may cause fuel overflow, resulting in children’s access to car keys. fuel spray and possibly a fire.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ Use only an original equipment type CAUTION ∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more properly may cause the Mal- a built-in safety valve needed for than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi- proper operation of the fuel system additional information, refer to “Fuel nate. If the light illuminates be- and emission control system. An in- recommendation” in the “Technical cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or correct cap can result in a serious mal- and consumer information” section of missing, tighten or install the cap and function and possible injury. It could this manual. continue to drive the vehicle. also cause the Malfunction Indi- The light should turn off after a cator Light (MIL) to come on. ∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not prop- few driving trips. If the light does ∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body erly tightened. It may take a few driv- not turn off after a few driving trips, to attempt to start your vehicle. ing trips for the message to be have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN ∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel- dealer for this service. the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity filler cap properly after the Loose Fuel can cause an explosion of flammable Cap warning appears may cause ∙ For additional information, refer to liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or the Malfunction Indicator Light “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in trailer. To reduce the risk of serious (MIL) to illuminate. the “Instruments and controls” sec- injury or death when filling portable tion of this manual. fuel containers: ∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, – Always place the container on the flush it away with water to avoid paint ground when filling. damage. – Do not use electronic devices when filling. – Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it. – Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25 STEERING WHEEL

WARNING ∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. ∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or LPD0482 LPD2649 fatal injuries from the air bag if you To remove the fuel-filler cap: Loose Fuel Cap warning are up against it when it inflates. Al- ways sit back against the seatback 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock- The Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the and as far away as practical from the wise to remove. vehicle information display when the fuel- steering wheel. Always use the seat 2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder filler cap is not tightened correctly after the belts. ᭺1 while refueling. vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be dis- To install the fuel-filler cap: played. To turn off the warning, perform the 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the following: fuel-filler tube. 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a soon as possible. For additional infor- single click is heard. mation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in this section. 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments CAUTION For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Failure to reset the tilt and tele- scoping functions of the steering wheel, after the vehicle’s battery has been discharged, may prevent the steering wheel position from being adjusted. For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Both the tilt and telescopic steering operation must be reset after the vehicle’s battery has been discharged in order to prevent the tilt and telescopic operation LPD2359 LPD2439 from locking in one position. When the bat- MANUAL OPERATION AUTOMATIC OPERATION tery has been recharged or replaced, per- (if so equipped) (if so equipped) form the following: Tilt and telescopic operation Tilt and telescopic operation ∙ For tilt operation, adjust the switch ᭺1 so the steering wheel moves to the Pull the lock lever ᭺1 down: To adjust the steering wheel move the highest position ᭺2 that can be ∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in switch ᭺1 in the following directions: reached. direction ᭺2 to the desired position. ∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in ∙ For telescopic operation, adjust the ∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or direction ᭺2 to the desired tilt position. switch ᭺1 so the steering wheel moves ᭺3 backward in direction to the desired ∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or to the most forward and backward po- position. backward in direction ᭺3 to the desired sition ᭺3 that can be reached. Push the lock lever ᭺1 up firmly to lock the telescopic position. Performing these operations resets the steering wheel in place. range of the steering wheel’s tilt and telescopic function. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27 SUN VISORS

Entry/Exit function ᭺1 To block glare from the front, swing (if so equipped) down the sun visor. ᭺2 The automatic drive positioner system (if To block glare from the side, remove so equipped) will make the steering wheel the sun visor from the center mount move up automatically when the driver’s and swing the visor to the side. door is opened and the ignition switch is in ᭺3 Slide the extension sun visor in or out the LOCK position. This lets the driver get as needed. into and out of the seat more easily. The steering wheel moves back into position CAUTION when the driver’s door is closed and the ignition switch is pushed. ∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original For additional information, refer to “Auto- position. matic drive positioner” in this section. ∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor forcibly downward.

WPD0344 3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments MIRRORS

NOTE: Do not hang any objects over the sensors ᭺1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation. The indicator light ᭺2 will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating. To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press the O button. The indicator light will turn off.

LPD2312 LPD0469 To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature VANITY MIRRORS again, press the | button again. The in- AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE dicator light will turn on. REARVIEW MIRROR To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun For additional information, refer to the visor down and flip open the mirror cover. The inside mirror is designed so that it au- “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the The vanity mirror will illuminate when the tomatically dims during nighttime condi- “Instruments and controls” section of this mirror cover is open. tions and according to the intensity of the manual. headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29 WARNING The outside mirror surfaces will return to their original position when one of the fol- ∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror lowing has occurred: on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving ∙ The shift lever is moved to any position to the right. Using only this mirror other than R (Reverse). could cause an accident. Use the in- ∙ The outside mirror control switch is set side mirror or glance over your shoul- to the neutral or center position. der to properly judge distances to other objects. ∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. ∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your ve- NOTE: hicle and cause an accident. If the outside mirror control switch is in LPD2352 Reverse tilt-down feature the center (neutral) position, mirror sur- (if so equipped) face will NOT turn downward when the OUTSIDE MIRRORS shift lever is moved to R (Reverse). The outside mirror remote control will op- The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both outside mirror surfaces downward to pro- For additional information regarding this erate only when the ignition switch is in the vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle feature, refer to “Automatic drive posi- ACC or ON position. when the mirror control switch is in either tioner” in this section. Move the small switch ᭺1 to select the right the L or R position. or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de- The mirrors automatically return to their sired position using the large switch ᭺2 . original position when you shift out of R Move the small switch ᭺1 to the center (Reverse). (neutral) position to prevent accidentally moving the mirror.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped)

Automatic anti-glare outside The automatic drive positioner system has mirror (Driver’s side only) three features: (if so equipped) ∙ Memory storage function (key-link) The outside mirror will automatically dim ∙ Memory storage function (switch) during nighttime conditions to reduce the ∙ Entry/exit function glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti-glare feature Key-link, when enabled, automatically re- operates only when the ignition switch is tains the driver’s last seat, automatic steer- placed in the ON position. ing wheel, and outside mirror positions for that specific key when the ignition is turned The automatic anti-glare feature will be on from ON to OFF. when starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the automatic anti-glare rearview Each memory switch button (1 or 2) on the mirror will illuminate when the automatic driver’s door can also store one additional MPA0008 anti-glare feature is operating. position which is independent of the key- Foldable outside mirrors linked position. To turn off the anti-glare feature, press Pull the outside mirror toward the door to the button on the inside rearview fold it. mirror. The indicator light will turn off. Heated mirrors (if so equipped) To turn on the anti-glare feature again, press the button on the inside rear- The electric control type outside mirrors view mirror. The indicator light will turn on. can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice For additional information, refer to “Auto- for improved visibility. Push the rear win- matic anti-glare rearview mirror” in this dow defroster switch to activate the heat- section. ing function. Push the switch again to deactivate, or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31 Once step 4 is completed, every time the ignition is switched from ON to OFF, the memory positions of the driver’s seat, automatic steering wheel and the outside mirrors are linked to the Intelligent Key. Follow the same procedure if you want to link the 2nd, 3rd or 4th Intelligent Key.

NOTE: If new memory positions are set prior to turning the ignition from ON to OFF, the previously linked memory positions for the respective key will be overwritten by LPD2432 new positions. LPD2348 MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Recalling Intelligent Key Memory MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION (Key-Link) Positions Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering Use the following process to setup key-link: If the “Key-Linked Settings” are enabled in column (if so equipped), and outside mir- the vehicle information display for that par- rors can be stored in the automatic drive 1. Unlock the vehicle with the desired In- ticular key, every time you enter the vehicle positioner memory. Follow these proce- telligent Key while the ignition is OFF. the driver’s seat, automatic steering wheel, dures to use the memory system. 2. Place the ignition in the ON position. and outside mirrors will automatically 1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC po- move to the driver’s last position of the 3. Within the “Settings” menu of the ve- sition (The vehicle should be stopped respective Intelligent Key. hicle information display, select “Key- while setting the memory). Linked Settings” and press the OK but- NOTE: 2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering col- ton on the steering switch. umn (if so equipped), and outside mir- The key-linked memory positions can be rors to the desired positions by manu- 4. While in the menu, press the OK button different from the positions stored in the ally operating each adjusting switch. on the steering switch to turn the sys- memory switch (1 or 2). tem ON/OFF. For additional information, refer to 3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts ∙ If a memory position has been stored in 5. If there is a desire to change to another and supplemental restraint system” the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light Intelligent Key while in the vehicle, the section of this manual, and “Steering for the respective switch will stay on for user must place the ignition switch in wheel” and “Outside mirrors” in this sec- approximately 5 seconds. the OFF position and initiate communi- tion. cation from the desired Intelligent Key. Linking an Intelligent Key to the 3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec- meter display (if so equipped) a. Ignition from ON position to the OFF onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2). b. Unlock door with the desired Intelli- Each Intelligent Key, up to a maximum of gent Key 4. The indicator light for the pushed four, can be linked to the meter display. memory switch will come on and stay c. The desired Intelligent Key number on for approximately 5 seconds. 1. When the system is enabled, the recog- should appear on the meter display. nized Intelligent Key is displayed at start 5. The chime will sound if the memory up, as well as within “Key-Linked Set- ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION has been stored. tings”. This system is designed so that the driver’s NOTE: 2. When the system is active, the meter seat and automatic operation steering col- setting items are memorized for each umn will automatically move when the If a new memory position is stored in the Intelligent Key that has been enabled in shift lever is in the P (Park) position. This same memory switch, the previous allows the driver to get into and out of the the system. memory position will be overwritten by driver’s seat more easily. the new stored position. 3. The auto drive positioner system is The driver’s seat will slide backward and memorized automatically when the ig- the steering wheel will move up: Confirming memory storage nition switch is turned from ON to OFF Push the SET switch. by the Intelligent Key with no need to ∙ When the driver’s door is opened set separate buttons for recalling and and the ignition switch is in the ∙ If a memory position has not been memorizing positions. OFF position. stored in the switch (1 or 2) the indicator ∙ When the ignition switch is turned from light for the respective switch will come 4. If two Intelligent Keys are in the vehicle, ACC to OFF with the driver’s door open. on for approximately 0.5 seconds. the system will recognize the Intelli- gent Key that was used most recently, such as to unlock/lock the door.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33 The driver’s seat and steering wheel will SYSTEM OPERATION return to the previous position: The automatic drive positioner system will ∙ When the ignition switch is turned to not work or will stop operating under the ACC or ON while the shift lever is in the P following conditions: (Park) position. ∙ When the vehicle speed is above 0 mph The entry/exit function can be adjusted or (0 km/h) or 4 mph (7km/h) for some canceled through the “Vehicle Settings” in limited functions such as linking a key the vehicle information display by perform- fob to the meter when the power ing the following: source is turned on from off or during the exit function. ∙ Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF. ∙ When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive posi- ∙ Switch the Exit Steering Up from ON to tioner is operating. OFF. ∙ When the adjusting switch for the driv- Restarting the entry/exit function er’s seat and steering column is turned on while the automatic drive positioner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the is operating. fuse opens, the stored memory positions may be lost and some of the functions will ∙ When the seat has already been moved be restricted. to the memorized position. ∙ When no seat position is stored in the 1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h). memory switch. OR ∙ When the shift lever is moved from P 2. Open and close the driver’s door more (Park) to any other position. than two times with the ignition switch in the OFF position. The entry/exit function should now work properly. 3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual...... 4-2 How to switch the display ...... 4-18 RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ...... 4-3 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-19 RearView Monitor system operation ...... 4-4 Intelligent Around View Monitor system How to read the displayed lines...... 4-5 limitations...... 4-20 Difference between predicted and System maintenance...... 4-22 actual distances...... 4-5 Moving Object Detection (MOD) How to park with predicted course (if so equipped) ...... 4-23 lines ...... 4-7 MOD system operation ...... 4-24 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-8 Turning MOD on and off ...... 4-25 How to turn on and off predicted MOD system limitations ...... 4-26 course lines ...... 4-9 System maintenance...... 4-27 RearView Monitor system limitations ...... 4-9 System maintenance...... 4-10 Vents...... 4-27 Intelligent Around View Monitor Heater and Air Conditioner (automatic) ...... 4-29 (if so equipped) ...... 4-11 Automatic operation ...... 4-30 Intelligent Around View Monitor system Manual operation ...... 4-31 operation...... 4-12 Operating tips ...... 4-32 Difference between predicted and Servicing air conditioner...... 4-33 actual distances...... 4-16 USB/iPod® charging ports (if so equipped) ...... 4-33 How to park with predicted course Antenna...... 4-33 lines ...... 4-17 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-34 NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S MANUAL

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual that includes the following information. ∙ NissanConnect® Services ∙ Navigation system (if so equipped) ∙ Audio system ∙ Apple CarPlayTM ∙ Android AutoTM ∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system ∙ Viewing information ∙ Other settings ∙ Voice recognition ∙ General system information

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

LHA3579 1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3 WARNING CAUTION ∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in- Do not scratch the camera lens when structions for proper use of the Rear- cleaning dirt or snow from the front of View Monitor system could result in the camera. serious injury or death. The RearView Monitor system automati- ∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when feature and is not a substitute for the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) proper backing. Always turn and look position. While in R (Reverse), pressing the out the windows and check mirrors to CAMERA button will cycle through guide- be sure that it is safe to move before line options. The radio can still be heard operating the vehicle. Always back up while the RearView Monitor is active. slowly.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to LHA3581 the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to To display the rear view, the RearView Moni- help avoid damaging the vehicle. tor system uses a camera located just above the vehicle’s license plate᭺1 . ∙ The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM reference only when the vehicle is on a OPERATION level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference With the ignition switch in the ON position, only and may be different than the move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po- actual distance between the vehicle sition to operate the RearView Monitor. and displayed objects.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Vehicle width guide lines ᭺5 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED Indicate the vehicle width when backing AND ACTUAL DISTANCES up. The displayed guidelines and their loca- Predicted course lines ᭺6 tions on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill Indicate the predicted course when back- surfaces or projecting objects will be actu- ing up. The predicted course lines will be ally located at distances different from displayed on the monitor when the shift those displayed in the monitor relative to lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When steering wheel is turned. The predicted in doubt, turn around and view the objects course lines will move depending on how as you are backing up, or park and exit the much the steering wheel is turned and will vehicle to view the positioning of objects not be displayed while the steering wheel is behind the vehicle. in the straight-ahead position. LHA1196 The vehicle width guide lines and the width HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED of the predicted course lines are wider than LINES the actual width and course. Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line ᭺A are displayed on the monitor. Distance guide lines Indicate distances from the vehicle body. ∙ Red line ᭺1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) ∙ Yellow line ᭺2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) ∙ Green line ᭺3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) ∙ Green line ᭺4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m) Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 LHA3614 LHA3616 LHA1201 Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis- When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the object tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide distance guide lines and the vehicle width The predicted course lines ᭺A do not touch lines are shown closer than the actual dis- guide lines are shown farther than the actual the object in the display. However, the ve- tance. Note that any object on the hill is further distance. Note that any object on the hill is hicle may hit the object if it projects over than it appears on the monitor. closer than it appears on the monitor. the actual backing up course. 4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems object when backing up to the position ᭺A if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

LHA3522 ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. While on a RearView Monitor screen, touch the touch-screen display. The Camera Settings screen will come up. 2. Touch the Display Settings key. 3. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,” LHA1198 “Color,” or “Black Level” key. 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the pre- 4. Adjust the item by touching the + or — dicted course lines ᭺B enter the park- key on the touch-screen display. ing space ᭺C .

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference. Do not adjust any of the display settings LIMITATIONS The lines are highly affected by the of the RearView Monitor while the ve- number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking WARNING hicle position, road conditions and road grade. brake is firmly applied. Listed below are the system limitations HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate ∙ Make sure that the trunk is securely the vehicle in accordance with these closed when backing up. PREDICTED COURSE LINES system limitations could result in seri- ∙ Do not put anything on the rearview To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course ous injury or death. camera. The rearview camera is in- lines while in the P (Park) position: ∙ The system cannot completely elimi- stalled above the license plate. nate blind spots and may not show 1. Touch the Settings key. ∙ When washing the vehicle with high every object. pressure water, be sure not to spray it 2. Touch the Camera key. ∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor- around the camera. Otherwise, water 3. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key ner areas of the bumper cannot be may enter the camera unit causing to turn the feature ON or OFF. viewed on the RearView Monitor be- water condensation on the lens, a cause of its monitoring range limita- malfunction, fire or an electric shock. To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course tion. The system will not show small ∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci- lines while in the R (Reverse) position: objects below the bumper, and may sion instrument. Otherwise, it may 1. Touch the touch-screen display. not show objects close to the bumper malfunction or cause damage result- or on the ground. ing in a fire or an electric shock. 2. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key ∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni- to turn the feature ON or OFF. tor differ from actual distance be- The following are operating limitations and cause a wide-angle lens is used. do not represent a system malfunction: ∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will ∙ When the temperature is extremely appear visually opposite compared to high or low, the screen may not clearly when viewed in the rearview and out- display objects. side mirrors.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 ∙ When strong light directly shines on the If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera, objects may not be displayed camera ᭺1 , the RearView Monitor may not clearly. display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a ∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip- the screen. This is due to strong re- ing it with a dry cloth. flected light from the bumper. ∙ The screen may flicker under fluores- cent light. ∙ The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects. ∙ Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment. LHA3581 ∙ There may be a delay when switching SYSTEM MAINTENANCE between views. ∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the CAUTION camera, the RearView Monitor may not ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner display objects clearly. Clean the cam- to clean the camera. This will cause era. discoloration. ∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens. ∙ Do not damage the camera as the Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth monitor screen may be adversely dampened with a diluted mild cleaning affected. agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

LHA3579 1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 WARNING The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in ∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in- situations such as slot parking or parallel structions for the proper use of the parking. Intelligent Around View Monitor system could result in serious injury or The monitor displays various views of the death. position of the vehicle in a split screen for- mat. Not all views are available at all times. ∙ The Intelligent Around View Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a Available views: substitute for proper vehicle opera- ∙ Front View tion because it has areas where ob- An approximately 150–degree view of jects cannot be viewed. The four cor- the front of the vehicle. ners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always ∙ Rear View appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear An approximately 150–degree view of LHA3587 views. Always check your surround- the rear of the vehicle. To display the multiple views, the Intelligent ings to be sure that it is safe to move ∙ Bird’s-Eye View Around View Monitor system uses cam- before operating the vehicle. Always The surrounding views of the vehicle eras located in the front grille, on the vehi- operate the vehicle slowly. from above. cle’s outside mirrors and one just above the vehicle’s license plate ᭺1 . ∙ The driver is always responsible for ∙ Front-Side View safety during parking and other The view around and ahead of the front INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW maneuvers. passenger’s side wheel. MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION CAUTION With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po- Do not scratch the camera lens when sition or press the CAMERA button to oper- cleaning dirt or snow from the front of ate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. the camera.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems When the camera is first activated with the ∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’s- ∙ The vehicle width and predicted bird’s-eye view in the display, a red icon (if so eye view as a reference. The lines and course lines are wider than the actual equipped) will flash on the screen. This in- the bird’s-eye view are greatly af- width and course. dicates that the sonar system (if so fected by the number of occupants, ∙ The displayed lines will appear equipped) is activated. For additional infor- cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road slightly off to the right, because the mation on the front and rear sonar system condition and road grade. (if so equipped), refer to “Front and rear so- rearview camera is not installed in the nar system” in the “Starting and driving” ∙ If the tires are replaced with different rear center of the vehicle. sized tires, the predicted course lines section of this manual. and the bird’s-eye view may be dis- The screen displayed on the Intelligent played incorrectly. Around View Monitor will automatically re- ∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob- turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after jects viewed in the monitor are fur- the CAMERA button has been pressed with ther than they appear. When driving the shift lever in a position other than the R the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed (Reverse) position. in the monitor are closer than they Available views appear. ∙ Objects in the rear view will appear WARNING visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside ∙ The distance guide lines and the ve- mirrors. hicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a ∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to paved, level surface. The apparent properly judge distances to other distance viewed on the monitor may objects. be different than the actual distance ∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road, between the vehicle and displayed there may be a difference between objects. the predicted course lines and the actual course line.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE: When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight- ahead position, both the right and left predicted course lines ᭺6 are displayed. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

SAA1840 SAA1896 Front view Rear view Front and rear view Vehicle width guide lines ᭺5 : Guiding lines that indicate the approximate Indicate the approximate vehicle width vehicle width and distance to objects with when backing up. reference to the vehicle body line ᭺A are Predicted course lines ᭺6 : displayed on the monitor. Indicate the predicted course when oper- Distance guide lines ating the vehicle. The predicted course Indicate distances from the vehicle body: lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted ∙ Red line ᭺1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) course lines will move depending on how ∙ Yellow line ᭺2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) much the steering wheel is turned and will ∙ Green line ᭺3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m) not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. ∙ Green line ᭺4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m) 4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The non-viewable area ᭺2 is highlighted in yellow for several seconds after the bird’s- eye view is displayed. It will be shown only the first time after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

WARNING ∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear further than the actual distance. ∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views. ∙ Objects that are above the camera LHA4394 cannot be displayed. LHA2652 Bird’s-eye view ∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be Front-side view The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead misaligned when the camera position Guiding lines view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the alters. Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle position and the predicted course ∙ A line on the ground may be mis- width and the front end of the vehicle are to a parking space. aligned and is not seen as being displayed on the monitor. The vehicle icon ᭺1 shows the position of straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line The front-of-vehicle line ᭺1 shows the front the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis- proceeds away from the vehicle. part of the vehicle. tance between objects viewed in the bird’s- eye view may differ somewhat from the The side-of-vehicle line ᭺2 shows the ap- actual distance to the vehicle. proximate vehicle width including the outside mirrors. The areas that the cameras cannot cover ᭺2 are indicated in black. The extensions ᭺3 of both the front ᭺1 and side ᭺2 lines are shown with a green dotted line. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

LHA3614 LHA3616 Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor. closer than it appears on the monitor. 4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems object when backing up to the position ᭺A if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING ∙ If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. ∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line. ∙ If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures: – Turn the steering wheel from lock LHA1201 LHA3588 to lock while the engine is running. Backing up near a projecting Backing up behind a projecting – Drive the vehicle on a straight road object object for more than 5 minutes. ∙ When the steering wheel is turned ᭺A ᭺C The predicted course lines do not touch The position is shown farther than the with the ignition switch in the ACC po- ᭺B the object in the display. However, the ve- position in the display. However, the position, the predicted course lines may ᭺C hicle may hit the object if it projects over sition is actually at the same distance as be displayed incorrectly. the actual backing up course. the position ᭺A . The vehicle may hit the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines ᭺D parallel to the parking space ᭺C while referring to the predicted course lines. 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake. HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views. If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are: LHA1197 LHA1198 ∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen 1. Visually check that the parking space is 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting ∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen safe before parking your vehicle. the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines ᭺B enter the park- If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed ing space ᭺C . available views are: on the screen ᭺A when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position. ∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen ∙ Front view/front-side view split screen 4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position, NOTE: the only available view is front view/front- Do not adjust any of the display settings side view split screen. of the Intelligent Around View Monitor The display will switch from the Intelligent while the vehicle is moving. Make sure Around View Monitor screen when: the parking brake is firmly applied. ∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) ∙ A different screen is selected.

LHA3590 ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. Touch the touch-screen display with the Intelligent Around View Monitor on. 2. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,” “Color,” or “Black Level” key. 3. Adjust the item by touching the + or — key on the touch-screen display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 WARNING ∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could Listed below are the system limitations cause a malfunction or cause damage for Intelligent Around View Monitor. resulting in a fire or an electric shock. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations There are some areas where the system could result in serious injury or death. will not show objects and the system does ∙ Do not use the Intelligent Around View not warn of moving objects. When in the Monitor with the outside mirrors in front or rear view display, an object below the stored position, and make sure the bumper or on the ground may not be that the trunk is securely closed when viewed ᭺1 . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall operating the vehicle using the Intelli- object near the seam ᭺2 of the camera gent Around View Monitor. viewing areas will not appear in the moni- ∙ The apparent distance between ob- tor. jects viewed on the Intelligent Around The following are operating limitations and View Monitor differs from the actual do not represent a system malfunction: distance. ∙ There may be a delay when switching ∙ The cameras are installed on the front between views. grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put any- ∙ When the temperature is extremely thing on the vehicle that covers the high or low, the screen may not display cameras. objects clearly. LHA3620 ∙ When washing the vehicle with high ∙ When strong light directly shines on the INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW pressure water, be sure not to spray it camera, objects may not be displayed MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS around the cameras. Otherwise, wa- clearly. ter may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a ∙ The screen may flicker under fluores- malfunction, fire or an electric shock. cent light.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ∙ The colors of objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects. ∙ Objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environment. ∙ There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird’s-eye view. ∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry LHA3591 LHA3592 cloth. System temporarily unavailable When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiv- When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen, ing temporary electronic disturbances there are abnormal conditions in the Intel- from surrounding devices. This will not hin- ligent Around View Monitor. This will not der normal driving operation but the sys- hinder normal driving operation but the tem should be inspected if it occurs fre- system should be inspected. It is recom- quently. It is recommended that you visit a mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN dealer for this service. this service.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras ᭺1 , the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3587 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. ∙ Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)

LHA3579 1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 WARNING MOD SYSTEM OPERATION ∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in- The MOD system will turn on automatically structions for proper use of the Mov- under the following conditions: ing Object Detection system could re- ∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) sult in serious injury or death. position. ∙ The MOD system is not a substitute ∙ When vehicle speed decreases below for proper vehicle operation and is not approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the designed to prevent contact with ob- camera screen is displayed. jects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver. LHA4190 ∙ The system is deactivated at speeds Front and bird’s-eye views above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is dis- ∙ The MOD system is not designed to played: detect surrounding stationary objects. ∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is The MOD system can inform the driver of stopped, the MOD system detects mov- moving objects near the vehicle when ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The backing out of garages, maneuvering in MOD system will not operate if the out- parking lots and in other such instances. side mirrors are moving in or out, in the The MOD system detects moving objects stowed position, or if either front door is by using image processing technology on opened. the image shown in the display.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is beeping, the MOD system does not chime In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame ᭺1 is displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected. The yellow frame ᭺2 is displayed on each view in the front view and rear view modes. A blue MOD icon ᭺3 is displayed in the view where the MOD system is operative. A gray LHA4191 LHA4193 MOD icon is displayed in the view where the Rear and bird’s-eye views Rear and front-side views MOD system is not operative. ∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) The MOD system does not detect moving position and the vehicle speed is below objects in the front-side view. The MOD If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the icon is not displayed on the screen when in icon ᭺3 is not displayed. MOD system detects moving objects in this view. TURNING MOD ON AND OFF the front view. When the MOD system detects moving ob- To turn the MOD system on or off, press and ∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard hold the CAMERA button for more than position and the vehicle speed is below and a yellow frame will be displayed on the 2 seconds. approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the view where the objects are detected. While MOD system detects moving objects in the MOD system continues to detect mov- the rear view. The MOD system will not ing objects, the yellow frame continues to operate if the trunk is open. be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – When camera orientation is not in NOTE: its usual position, such as when a The blue MOD icon will change to orange WARNING mirror is folded. if one of the following has occurred: Listed below are the system limitations – When there is dirt, water drops or ∙ When the system is malfunctioning. for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle snow on the camera lens. in accordance with these system limita- ∙ When the component temperature tions could result in serious injury or – When the position of the moving reaches a high level (icon will blink). death. objects in the display is not changed. ∙ When the Rear View camera has de- ∙ Do not use the MOD system when tected a blockage (icon will blink). ∙ The MOD system might detect flowing towing a trailer. The system may not If the icon light continues to illuminate function properly. water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, mov- orange, have the MOD system checked. It ∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio ing shadows, etc. is recommended that you visit a NISSAN system volume or open vehicle win- dealer for this service. dow) will interfere with the chime ∙ The MOD system may not function sound, and it may not be heard. properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the mov- ∙ The MOD system performance will be ing objects. limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects ∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the such as: parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the – When there is low contrast be- sensing zone may be altered and the tween background and the moving MOD system may not detect objects objects. properly. – When there is a blinking source of ∙ When the temperature is extremely light. high or low, the screen may not dis- – When strong light such as another play objects clearly. This is not a vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is malfunction. present.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems VENTS

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras ᭺1 , the MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3587 LHA3577 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Side Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent CAUTION slides. ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner Open or close the vents by using the dial. to clean the camera. This will cause Move the dial toward the to open the discoloration. vents or toward the to close them. ∙ Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 LHA3578 LHA3599 Center Rear (center console)

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic)

10. ON-OFF button 11. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch WARNING ∙ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. ∙ Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. ∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the inte- LHA3575 rior air to become stale and the win- 1. Front defroster button 5. Fresh air intake button dows to fog up. 2. Temperature control dial (driver’s 6. Air recirculation button side)/AUTO button 7. A/C air conditioner button 3. Display screen 8. MODE (manual air flow control) 4. Temperature control dial (passen- button ger’s side)/DUAL button 9. Fan speed control buttons Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 NOTE: ∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from Dehumidified defrosting or the vents in hot, humid conditions as defogging ∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve- the air is cooled rapidly. This does not hicle can build up in the air conditioner indicate a malfunction. 1. Press the front defroster button unit. Odor can enter the passenger on. compartment through the vents. 3. You can individually set driver’s and front passenger’s side temperature using 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set ∙ When parking, set the heater and air each temperature control dial. When the the maximum temperature to aid in conditioner controls to turn off air recir- DUAL button is pressed or passenger’s defrosting or defogging. culation to allow fresh air into the pas- side temperature dial is turned, the DUAL senger compartment. This should help indicator will come on. To turn off the ∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside reduce odors inside the vehicle. passenger’s side temperature control, of the windows, use the fan speed press the DUAL button. control buttons to set the fan speed to AUTOMATIC OPERATION maximum. Heating (A/C OFF) Cooling and/or dehumidified ∙ As soon as possible after the wind- heating (AUTO) The air conditioner does not activate. When shield is clean, press the AUTO button to you need to heat only, use this mode. return to the automatic mode. This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a 1. Press the AUTO button. ∙ When the front defroster button constant temperature. Air flow distribution 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set is pressed, the air conditioner will auto- and fan speed are also controlled auto- the desired temperature. matically be turned on at outside tem- matically. peratures above 36°F (2°C). The air recir- ∙ The temperature of the passenger culate mode automatically turns off, 1. Press the AUTO button on. compartment will be maintained auto- allowing outside air to be drawn into the matically. Air flow distribution and fan 2. Turn the temperature control dial to passenger compartment to further im- speed are also controlled automatically. the left or right to set the desired tem- prove the defogging performance. perature. ∙ Do not set the temperature lower than When the air recirculate mode auto- the outside air temperature. Otherwise, matically turns off, the air fresh mode ∙ The temperature of the passenger the system may not work properly. will automatically turn on. compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan ∙ Not recommended if windows fog up. speed are also controlled automatically. 4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Remote Engine Start with dial to the right. Temperature can be ad- conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, Intelligent Climate Control justed on the driver’s and passenger’s side. press the button again. (if so equipped) Air recirculation The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Vehicles equipped with automatic climate Press the air recirculation button to controls and Remote Engine Start function recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. Air flow control may go into automatic heating or cooling The indicator light on the button will Pressing the MODE button manually con- mode when Remote Engine Start is acti- come on. trols air flow and selects the air outlet: vated depending on outside and cabin The air recirculation cannot be activated temperatures. During this period, the cli- — Air flows mainly from center mate control display and buttons will be when the air conditioner is in the and side vents. front defrosting mode. inoperable until the ignition switch is — Air flows mainly from center turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost- When the outside temperature exceeds and side vents and foot outlets. 70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may ing mode, the rear window defroster and — Air flows mainly from foot out- default to air recirculation mode automati- heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may cally to reduce overall power consumption. lets and partly from defroster. be activated automatically. To exit air recirculation mode, select the — Air flows mainly from defroster MANUAL OPERATION fresh air intake button (the air recirculation and foot outlets. indicator will turn off, the fresh air indicator To turn system off Fan speed control will turn on) to enter fresh air mode. Press the ON-OFF button. Press the fan speed control buttons Fresh air intake Rear window and outside mirror to manually control the fan speed. Press the fresh air intake button to (if so equipped) defroster switch Press the AUTO button to return to auto- draw outside air into the passenger com- For additional information, refer to “Rear matic control of the fan speed. partment. window and outside mirror (if so equipped) Temperature control dial Air conditioner button defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To Start the engine, turn the fan speed lower the temperature, turn the dial to the control dial to the desired position and left. To increase the temperature, turn the press the button to turn on the air Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 ∙ When the climate system is in auto- ∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you matic operation and the engine coolant have selected and the outlets the air is temperature and outside air tempera- coming out do not match, select ture are low, the air flow outlet may de- the mode. fault to defroster mode for a maximum ∙ When you change the air flow mode, of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a you may feel air flow from the feet vents malfunction. After the engine coolant for just a moment. This is not a mal- temperature warms up, the air flow out- function. let will return to foot mode and operation will continue normally. ∙ When the outside and interior cabin temperatures are moderate to high, the intake setting may default to turn off air LHA3554 recirculation to allow fresh air into the OPERATING TIPS passenger compartment. You may notice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level The sunload sensor, located on the top mode or side demist vent outlets for a driver’s side of the instrument panel, helps maximum of 15 seconds. This may oc- the system maintain a constant tempera- cur when previous climate setting was ture. Do not put anything on or around this system off. This is not a malfunction. sensor. After the initial warm air is expelled, the intake will return to automatic control, air flow outlet will return to previous settings, and operation will continue normally. To exit, press any climate control button. ∙ Keep the moonroof (if so equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation. 4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER USB/iPod® CHARGING PORTS ANTENNA (if so equipped)

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN The antenna pattern is printed inside the vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de- rear window. signed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant does not harm the CAUTION earth’s ozone layer. ∙ Do not place metalized film near the Special charging equipment and lubricant rear window glass or attach any metal is required when servicing your NISSAN air parts to it. This may cause poor recep- conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or tion or noise lubricants will cause severe damage to ∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear your air conditioner system. For additional window, be careful not to scratch or information, refer to “Air conditioner sys- damage the rear window antenna. tem refrigerant and oil recommendations” Lightly wipe along the antenna with a in the “Technical and consumer informa- dampened soft cloth. tion” section of this manual. LHA4518 It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN 2nd row dealer to service your “environmentally There are USB/iPod® charging ports lo- friendly” air conditioner system. cated in the 2nd row on the back of the center console. These ports will charge WARNING compatible devices. The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid NOTE: personal injury, any air conditioner ser- Only the USB connection port located in vice should be done only by an experi- the console box will operate USB/iPod® enced technician with proper devices. equipment.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a CB, ham radio or car CAUTION phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the ∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos- new equipment may adversely affect the sible from the electronic control engine control system and other electronic modules. parts. ∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic con- WARNING trol system harnesses. Do not route ∙ A cellular phone should not be used the antenna wire next to any harness. for any purpose while driving so full ∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave attention may be given to vehicle op- ratio as recommended by the eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit manufacturer. the use of cellular phones while ∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB driving. radio chassis to the body. ∙ If you must make a call while your ve- ∙ For additional information, it is rec- hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- ommended that you visit a NISSAN lar phone operational mode (if so dealer. equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. ∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-4 Normal mode ...... 5-23 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...... 5-4 Sport mode ...... 5-23 Three-way catalyst ...... 5-4 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped)...... 5-23 Tire Pressure Monitoring System BSW system operation ...... 5-25 (TPMS)...... 5-5 How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-27 Avoiding collision and rollover ...... 5-8 BSW system limitations...... 5-27 Off-roadrecovery...... 5-9 BSW driving situations ...... 5-28 Rapid air pressure loss ...... 5-9 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-31 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...... 5-10 System maintenance...... 5-32 Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-11 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-33 Operating range...... 5-12 RCTA system operation...... 5-34 Push-button ignition switch positions ...... 5-12 How to enable/disable the RCTA Emergency engine shut off ...... 5-13 system ...... 5-36 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge ...... 5-13 RCTA system limitations...... 5-37 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 5-14 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-39 Before starting the engine...... 5-14 System maintenance...... 5-40 Starting the engine ...... 5-15 Cruise control (if so equipped) ...... 5-41 Remote Engine Start ...... 5-15 Precautions on cruise control...... 5-41 Driving the vehicle ...... 5-16 Cruise control operations...... 5-42 Continuously Variable Transmission Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-43 (CVT) ...... 5-16 ICC system operation ...... 5-44 Parking brake ...... 5-22 The ICC switch ...... 5-46 Drive mode selector ...... 5-23 ICC system limitations...... 5-52 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-55 Break-in schedule ...... 5-77 System maintenance...... 5-57 Fuel efficient driving tips ...... 5-78 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) ...... 5-58 Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-79 AEB system operation ...... 5-59 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-80 Turning the AEB system on/off ...... 5-61 Power steering ...... 5-81 AEB system limitations ...... 5-61 Brake system...... 5-82 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-63 Brake precautions ...... 5-82 System malfunction ...... 5-63 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-82 System maintenance...... 5-64 Brake assist ...... 5-83 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)....5-65 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ...... 5-84 I-FCW system operation ...... 5-67 Brake force distribution...... 5-86 Turning the I-FCW system on/off ...... 5-68 Integrated Dynamics-control Module I-FCW system limitations ...... 5-69 (if so equipped) ...... 5-87 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-72 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC)...... 5-87 System malfunction ...... 5-73 Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB)...... 5-87 System maintenance...... 5-74 Active Ride Control (ARC) ...... 5-88 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) (if so Front and Rear Sonar System (if so equipped) . .5-88 equipped) ...... 5-75 System operation ...... 5-89 Intelligent Driver Alertness system How to enable/disable the front and operation...... 5-75 rear sonar system...... 5-91 How to enable/disable the Intelligent Cold weather driving ...... 5-92 Driver Alertness (I-DA) system ...... 5-76 Freeing a frozen door lock ...... 5-92 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) Antifreeze ...... 5-92 system limitations...... 5-76 Battery...... 5-92 Draining of coolant water...... 5-92 Active noise cancellation/Active sound Tire equipment ...... 5-92 control (if so equipped) ...... 5-94 Special winter equipment ...... 5-92 Active noise cancellation ...... 5-94 Driving on snow or ice ...... 5-92 Active sound control...... 5-94 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ...... 5-93 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING ∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are ∙ The exhaust system and body should entering the vehicle, drive with all be inspected by a qualified mechanic ∙ Do not leave children or adults who windows fully open, and have the ve- whenever: would normally require the assis- hicle inspected immediately. tance of others alone in your vehicle. a. The vehicle is raised for service. Pets should also not be left alone. ∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces b. You suspect that exhaust fumes They could accidentally injure them- such as a garage. are entering into the passenger selves or others through inadvertent ∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en- compartment. operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, gine running for any extended length sunny days, temperatures in a closed c. You notice a change in the sound of of time. vehicle could quickly become high the exhaust system. ∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, enough to cause severe or possibly d. You have had an accident involving doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) fatal injuries to people or animals. damage to the exhaust system, closed while driving, otherwise ex- ∙ Closely supervise children when they underbody, or rear of the vehicle. haust gases could be drawn into the are around cars to prevent them from passenger compartment. If you must playing and becoming locked in the THREE-WAY CATALYST drive with one of these open, follow trunk where they could be seriously The three-way catalyst is an emission con- these precautions: injured. Keep the car locked, with the trol device installed in the exhaust system. rear seatback and trunk lid securely 1. Open all the windows. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst latched when not in use, and prevent are burned at high temperatures to help children’s access to car keys. 2. Set the air recirculation button to off and the fan control dial to reduce pollutants. high to circulate the air. EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) WARNING ∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con- WARNING nections must pass to a trailer ∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- through the seal on the trunk lid or the tem are very hot. Keep people, ani- ∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they mals or flammable materials away contain colorless and odorless carbon body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon from the exhaust system monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan- components. gerous. It can cause unconsciousness monoxide entry into the vehicle. or death.

5-4 Starting and driving ∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over ∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to Please note that the TPMS is not a substi- flammable materials such as dry start the engine. tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is grass, waste paper or rags. They may the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor- ignite and cause a fire. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation SYSTEM (TPMS) has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. CAUTION Each tire, including the spare (if provided), ∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits should be checked monthly when cold and Your vehicle has also been equipped with a from leaded gasoline will seriously re- inflated to the inflation pressure recom- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate duce the three-way catalyst’s ability mended by the vehicle manufacturer on when the system is not operating properly. to help reduce exhaust pollutants. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different bined with the low tire pressure telltale. ∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- size than the size indicated on the vehicle When the system detects a malfunction, tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or placard or tire inflation pressure label, you electrical systems can cause overrich the telltale will flash for approximately one should determine the proper tire inflation minute and then remain continuously illu- fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, pressure for those tires.) causing it to overheat. Do not keep minated. This sequence will continue upon driving if the engine misfires, or if no- As an added safety feature, your vehicle subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as ticeable loss of performance or other has been equipped with a Tire Pressure the malfunction exists. When the malfunc- unusual operating conditions are de- Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates tion indicator is illuminated, the system tected. Have the vehicle inspected a low tire pressure telltale when one or may not be able to detect or signal low tire promptly. It is recommended that you more of your tires is significantly under- pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- pressure telltale illuminates, you should ing the installation of replacement or alter- ∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low stop and check your tires as soon as pos- nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that fuel level. Running out of fuel could sible, and inflate them to the proper pres- prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- cause the engine to misfire, damag- sure. Driving on a significantly under- erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction ing the three-way catalyst. inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and telltale after replacing one or more tires or ∙ Do not race the engine while warming can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the it up. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, replacement or alternate tires and wheels and may affect the vehicle’s handling and allow the TPMS to continue to function stopping ability. properly. Starting and driving 5-5 Additional information: ∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn- WARNING ing does not appear if the low tire pres- ∙ When replacing a wheel without the sure warning light illuminates to indi- ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS cate a TPMS malfunction. electric medical equipment. Those does not monitor the tire pressure of who use a pacemaker should contact the spare tire. ∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn- the electric medical equipment ing appears each time the ignition ∙ The TPMS will activate only when the manufacturer for the possible influ- switch is placed in the ON position as ences before use. vehicle is driven at speeds above long as the low tire pressure warning 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may ∙ If the low tire pressure warning light light remains illuminated. not detect a sudden drop in tire pres- illuminates while driving, avoid sud- sure (for example, a flat tire while driv- ∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending den steering maneuvers or abrupt ing). on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op- braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off eration and the outside temperature. the road to a safe location and stop ∙ The low tire pressure warning light does Do not reduce the tire pressure after the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- not automatically turn off when the tire driving because the tire pressure rises ing with under-inflated tires may per- pressure is adjusted. After all four tires after driving. Low outside temperature manently damage the tires and in- are inflated to the recommended pres- can lower the temperature of the air crease the likelihood of tire failure. sure, the vehicle must be driven at inside the tire which can cause a lower Serious vehicle damage could occur speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to acti- tire inflation pressure. This may cause and may lead to an accident and could vate the TPMS and turn off the low tire the low tire pressure warning light to result in serious personal injury or pressure warning light. Use a tire pres- illuminate. If the warning light illumi- death. Check the tire pressure for all sure gauge to check the tire pressure. nates, check the tire pressure for all four four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to tires. the recommended COLD tire pressure ∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn- shown on the Tire and Loading Infor- ing appears in the vehicle information ∙ The Tire and Loading Information label mation label to turn the low tire pres- display when the low tire pressure is located in the driver’s door opening. sure warning light off. If you have a flat warning light is illuminated and low tire For additional information, refer to “Low tire tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon pressure is detected. The “ Tire Pressure pressure warning light” in the “Instruments as possible. For additional informa- Low - Add Air” warning turns off when and controls” section and “Tire Pressure tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of the low tire pressure warning light turns Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. off. emergency” section of this manual. 5-6 Starting and driving ∙ When replacing a wheel without the Some devices and transmitters may tem- FCC Notice: porarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS such as the spare tire, when a For USA: spare tire is mounted or a wheel is TPMS and cause the low tire pressure replaced, tire pressure will not be indi- warning light to illuminate. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- cated, the TPMS will not function and Some examples are: the low tire pressure warning light will lowing two conditions: (1) This device flash for approximately 1 minute. The ∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi- may not cause harmful interference, and light will remain on after 1 minute. lar radio frequencies are near the ve- (2) this device must accept any interfer- Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS hicle. ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. system reset as soon as possible. It is ∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen- recommended that you visit a NISSAN cies is being used in or near the vehicle. dealer for this service. NOTE: ∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- Changes or modifications not expressly a DC/AC converter is being used in or approved by the party responsible for nally specified by NISSAN could affect near the vehicle. the proper operation of the TPMS. compliance could void the user’s author- The low tire pressure warning light may ity to operate the equipment. ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol illuminate in the following cases: tire sealant into the tires, as this may For Canada: cause a malfunction of the tire pres- ∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel This device complies with Industry sure sensors. and tire without TPMS Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). ∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the Operation is subject to the following two CAUTION ID has not been registered conditions: (1) this device may not cause Do not place metalized film or any harmful interference, and (2) this device ∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by must accept any interference received, metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win- NISSAN dows. This may cause poor reception of including interference that may cause the signals from the tire pressure sen- undesired operation of the device. sors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Starting and driving 5-7 TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert on the tire briefly to release pressure. ∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op- When the pressure reaches the des- erate due to TPMS interference, move When adding air to an under-inflated tire, ignated pressure, the horn beeps the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides once. or forward and try again. visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec- ∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a ommended COLD tire pressure. within approximately 15 seconds af- tire pressure gauge. ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi- Vehicle set-up cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is AVOIDING COLLISION AND 1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place. not operating. ROLLOVER 2. Apply the parking brake and place the ∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy- WARNING shift lever in the P (Park) position. Fill Tire Alert under the following conditions: Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po- and prudent manner may result in loss sition. Do not start the engine. – If there is interference from an exter- of control or an accident. nal device or transmitter. Operation Be alert and drive defensively at all times. – The air pressure from the inflation 1. Add air to the tire. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive device is not sufficient to inflate the speed, high speed cornering, or sudden 2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica- tire. steering maneuvers, because these driving tors will start flashing. – There is a malfunction in the TPMS practices could cause you to lose control of 3. When the designated pressure is system. your vehicle. reached, the horn beeps once and the As with any vehicle, loss of control could hazard indicators stop flashing. – There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators. result in a collision with other vehicles or 4. Perform the above steps for each tire. objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, – The identification code of the tire particularly if the loss of control causes ∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than pressure sensor is not registered to the vehicle to slide sideways. approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn the system. beeps and the hazard indicators Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving flash three times. To correct the pres- – The battery of the tire pressure sen- when tired. Never drive when under the in- sure, push the core of the valve stem sor is low. fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- 5-8 Starting and driving scription or over-the-counter drugs which 4. When appropriate, slowly release the Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by may cause drowsiness). Always wear your accelerator pedal to gradually slow the maintaining the correct air pressure and seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, vehicle. visually inspecting the tires for wear and seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- damage. For additional information, refer 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” tem” section of this manual, and also in- vehicle to follow the road while vehicle struct your passengers to do so. section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses speed is reduced. Do not attempt to air pressure or “blows-out” while driving, Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in drive the vehicle back onto the road maintain control of the vehicle by following collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, surface until vehicle speed is reduced. the procedure below. Please note that this an unbelted or improperly belted person 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn procedure is only a general guide. The ve- is significantly more likely to be injured the steering wheel until both tires re- hicle must be driven as appropriate based or killed than a person properly wearing turn to the road surface. When all tires on the conditions of the vehicle, road and a seat belt. are on the road surface, steer the ve- traffic. hicle to stay in the appropriate driving OFF-ROAD RECOVERY lane. WARNING While driving, the right side or left side ∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re- If there is a sudden loss of tire air pres- wheels may unintentionally leave the road turn the vehicle to the road surface sure, the vehicle will generally move or surface. If this occurs, maintain control of based on vehicle, road or traffic con- pull in the direction of the flat tire. In this the vehicle by following the procedure be- ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a situation, losing control of the vehicle low. Please note that this procedure is only stop in a safe place off the road. may cause a collision and result in per- a general guide. The vehicle must be driven sonal injury. as appropriate based on the conditions of RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS To help avoid loss of control: the vehicle, road and traffic. Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can ∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes. occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air ∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal. 2. Do not apply the brakes. pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires. ∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel. 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han- straight course. dling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds. Starting and driving 5-9 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! DRIVING That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t wheel with both hands and try to hold a drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is WARNING straight course. impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other 3. When appropriate, slowly release the Never drive under the influence of alco- physical condition. accelerator pedal to gradually slow the hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream vehicle. reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe after drinking alcohol increases the location off the road and away from likelihood of being involved in an acci- traffic if possible. dent injuring yourself and others. Addi- tionally, if you are injured in an accident, 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu- alcohol can increase the severity of the ally stop the vehicle. injury. 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How- and contact a roadside emergency ever, you must choose not to drive under service to change the tire. For addi- the influence of alcohol. Every year thou- tional information, refer to “Changing a sands of people are injured or killed in flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo- section of this manual. cal laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.

5-10 Starting and driving PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

WARNING If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-button ignition switch cannot Do not operate the push-button igni- be moved from the LOCK position. tion switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will Some indicators and warnings for opera- stop when the ignition switch is pushed tion are displayed on the vehicle informa- three consecutive times in less than tion display. For additional information, re- 1.5 seconds or the ignition switch is fer to “Vehicle information display” in the pushed and held for more than 2 sec- “Instruments and controls” section of this onds.) If the engine stops while the ve- manual. hicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

LSD2014 When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will illuminate. If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position, push the ignition switch center: ∙ Once to change to ACC. ∙ Two times to change to ON. ∙ Three times to change to OFF. The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.

Starting and driving 5-11 one who does not carry the Intelligent Key, ACC (Accessories) to push the ignition switch to start the en- This position activates electrical accesso- gine. ries, such as the radio, when the engine is The operating range of the engine start not running. function is inside of the vehicle ᭺1 . ACC has a battery saver feature that will ∙ The luggage area is not included in the place the ignition switch in the OFF position operating range, but the Intelligent Key after a period of time under the following may function. conditions: ∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the ∙ All doors are closed. instrument panel, inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelli- ∙ The shift lever is in P (Park). gent Key may not function. ∙ The hazard lamps are off. LSD2089 ∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the ∙ The turn signals are off. OPERATING RANGE door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function. The battery saver feature will be canceled if The Intelligent Key functions can only be any of the following occur: used when the Intelligent Key is within the PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ∙ Any door is opened. specified operating range. POSITIONS ∙ The shift lever is moved out of P (Park). When the Intelligent Key battery is almost LOCK (Normal parking position) discharged or strong radio waves are pres- The ignition switch can only be locked in ∙ The ignition switch changes position. ent near the operating location, the Intelli- this position. ∙ The hazard lamps are turned on. gent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function The ignition switch will be unlocked when it ON (Normal operating position) properly. is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key. This position turns on the ignition system If the Intelligent Key is within the operating and electrical accessories. range, it is possible for anyone, even some- The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition ON has a battery saver feature that will switched off. place the ignition switch in the OFF posi- 5-12 Starting and driving tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some OFF time under the following conditions: The ignition switch is in the OFF position ∙ All doors are closed. when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. If equipped, the ignition ∙ The shift lever is in P (Park). switch heart beat function (pulsed illumi- ∙ The hazard lamps are off. nation) may activate for a period of time when any door is unlocked and when the ∙ The turn signals are off. door opened/closed status changes in the The battery saver feature will be canceled if OFF and ACC positions. any of the following occur: EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF ∙ Any door is opened. To shut off the engine in an emergency ∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P situation while driving, perform the follow- (Park) position. ing procedure: SSD0860 ∙ The ignition switch changes position. ∙ Rapidly push the ignition switch three NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® ∙ The hazard lamps are turned on. consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or BATTERY DISCHARGE ∙ The turn signals are turned on. ∙ Push and hold the ignition switch for If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® more than 2 seconds. is discharged, or environmental conditions CAUTION interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, Do not leave the vehicle with the igni- start the engine according to the following tion switch in the ACC or ON position procedure: when the engine is not running for an extended period.This can discharge the 1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi- battery. tion. 2. Firmly apply the foot brake. 3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel- ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.) Starting and driving 5-13 BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

(After step 3 is performed, when the NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER ∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is ignition switch is pushed without de- SYSTEM clear. pressing the brake pedal, the ignition ∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil, switch position will change to ON.) The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without coolant, brake fluid, and window washer 4. Push the ignition switch while depress- the use of the registered key. fluid as frequently as possible, or at least ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds whenever you refuel. after the chime sounds. The engine will If the engine fails to start using a registered ∙ Check that all windows and lights are start. key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an auto- clean. NOTE: mated toll road device or automatic pay- ∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear- ment device on the key ring), restart the ∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to ance and condition. Also check tires for engine using the following procedure: the ON position or the engine is proper inflation. started by the above procedure, the 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po- ∙ Lock all doors. Intelligent Key battery discharge in- sition for approximately 5 seconds. dicator appears in the vehicle infor- ∙ Position seat and adjust head 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or mation display even when the Intelli- restraints/headrests. LOCK position, and wait approximately gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is 10 seconds. ∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors. not a malfunction. To turn off the In- telligent Key battery discharge indi- 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. ∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen- cator, touch the ignition switch with gers to do likewise. the Intelligent Key again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the in- ∙ Check the operation of warning lights ∙ If the Intelligent Key battery dis- terference) separate from the regis- when the ignition switch is pushed to charge indicator appears, replace the tered key. the ON position. For additional informa- battery as soon as possible. For addition, refer to “Warning lights, indicator tional information, refer to “Battery If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN lights and audible reminders” in the “In- replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” recommends placing the registered key on struments and controls” section of this section of this manual. a separate key ring to avoid interference manual. from other devices.

5-14 Starting and driving STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake. switch to the LOCK position. After 5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever cranking the engine, release the ac- to the P (Park) position and push the 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N celerator pedal. Crank the engine ignition switch to the OFF position. (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. with your foot off the accelerator The starter is designed not to oper- pedal by depressing the brake pedal NOTE: ate if the shift lever is in any of the and pushing the ignition switch to Care should be taken to avoid situations driving positions. start the engine. If the engine starts, that can lead to potential battery dis- but fails to run, repeat the above pro- 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po- charge and potential no-start conditions cedure. sition. Depress the brake pedal and such as: push the ignition switch to start the 1. Installation or extended use of elec- engine. CAUTION tronic accessories that consume bat- Do not operate the starter for more To start the engine immediately, push than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine tery power when the engine is not and release the ignition switch while does not start, push the ignition switch running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD depressing the brake pedal with the to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds players, etc.). ignition switch in any position. before cranking again, otherwise the 2. The vehicle is not driven regularly ∙ If the engine is very hard to start in starter could be damaged. and/or only driven short distances. extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator 4. Warm-up: In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the Allow the engine to idle for at least floor) and while holding, crank the en- 30 seconds after starting. Do not race REMOTE ENGINE START gine. Release the accelerator pedal the engine while warming it up. Drive at when the engine starts. a moderate speed for a short distance Vehicles started with the Remote Engine Start require the ignition switch to be ∙ If the engine is very hard to start be- first, especially in cold weather. In cold placed in the ON position before the shift cause it is flooded, depress the accel- weather, keep the engine running for a lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi- erator pedal all the way to the floor minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON and hold it. Push the ignition switch shutting it off. Starting and stopping position, follow these steps: to the ON position to start cranking the engine over a short period of time the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop may make the vehicle more difficult to 1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on cranking by pushing the ignition start. you. Starting and driving 5-15 DRIVING THE VEHICLE

2. Apply the brake. ∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use 3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON caution when shifting into a forward position. or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks ∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery and adjustments” section of this manual. roads. This may cause a loss of control. ∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission. LSD2354 CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CAUTION TRANSMISSION (CVT) ∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driv- WARNING ing. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause se- ∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal rious damage to the transmission. while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M ∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve- (Manual shift mode). Always depress hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an the brake pedal until shifting is com- uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by pleted. Failure to do so could cause depressing the accelerator pedal. The you to lose control and have an acci- foot brake should be used for this dent. It can also damage the vehicle. purpose.

5-16 Starting and driving The CVT in your vehicle is electronically 4. Stop the vehicle completely before ∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery controlled to produce maximum power shifting the shift lever to the P (Park) roads. This may cause a loss of and smooth operation. position. control. The recommended operating procedures The Continuously Variable Transmission ∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R for this transmission are shown on the fol- is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST (Reverse) position while the vehicle is lowing pages. Follow these procedures for be depressed before shifting from P moving forward and P (Park) or D maximum vehicle performance and driv- (Park) to any drive position while the ig- (Drive) position while the vehicle is re- ing enjoyment. nition switch is in the ON position. versing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission. NOTE: The shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear po- CAUTION Engine power may be automatically re- sitions if the ignition switch is pushed to duced to protect the CVT if the engine the LOCK position. ∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift speed increases quickly when driving on to the N (Neutral) position while driv- slippery roads or while being tested on WARNING ing. Coasting with the transmission in some dynamometers. the N (Neutral) position may cause se- ∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal rious damage to the transmission. Starting the vehicle while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M ∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve- 1. After starting the engine, fully depress (Manual shift mode). Always depress hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an the foot brake pedal before moving the the brake pedal until shifting is com- uphill grade, do no hold the vehicle by shift lever out of the P (Park) position. pleted. Failure to do so could cause depressing the accelerator pedal. The you to lose control and have an acci- foot brake should be used for this 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed dent. It can also damage the vehicle. purpose. and move the shift lever into a driving gear. ∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward 3. Release the parking brake and the foot or reverse gear before the engine has brake pedal, then gradually start the warmed up. vehicle in motion.

Starting and driving 5-17 WARNING R (Reverse) Apply the parking brake if the shift lever CAUTION is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause To prevent transmission damage, use the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll the R (Reverse) position only when the away and result in serious personal in- vehicle is completely stopped. jury or property damage. Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely P (Park) stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be de- CAUTION pressed to move the shift lever from P To prevent transmission damage, use (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to the P (Park) position only when the ve- R (Reverse). hicle is completely stopped. LSD2358 N (Neutral) To move the shift lever: Use the P (Park) shift lever position when Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- the vehicle is parked or when starting the gaged. The engine can be started in this Press the button while depressing the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely brake pedal position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and stopped. restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is Press the button to shift The brake pedal should be depressed to moving. move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or D (Drive) Shift without pressing the button any drive position to P (Park). Use this position for all normal forward Shifting Apply the parking brake. When parking on a driving. hill, apply the parking brake first, then move After starting the engine, fully depress the the shift lever into the P (Park) position. brake pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

5-18 Starting and driving meter. When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift gate, the position indicator displays 1 (1st) up to 7 (7th) depending on vehicle speed. Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: 1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7 M7 (7th) Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds. M6 (6th) and M5 (5th) LSD2359 LSD2635 Use this position when driving up long Manual shift mode enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges slopes, or for engine braking when driving can be selected manually. Shift ranges can down long slopes. The transmission enters the manual shift also be selected using the paddle shifters mode by moving the shift lever to the left (if so equipped) on the steering wheel ᭺B M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd) side in the “D” range. You can select the and ᭺C . When you pull the paddle shifter Use for hill climbing or engine braking on manual shift range either by moving the while in the D (Drive) position, the transmis- downhill grades. shift lever up or down, or by pulling the sion will shift to the upper or lower range right-side or left-side paddle shifter (if so temporarily. If the paddle shifters are not M1 (1st) equipped). To cancel the manual shift used for about 5–10 seconds, the transmis- Use this position when climbing steep hills mode, return the shift lever to the right D sion will automatically return to the D slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, (Drive) position. The transmission returns (Drive) position. If you want to return to the sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak- to automatic driving mode. D (Drive) position manually, pull and hold ing on steep downhill grades. When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive) either paddle shifter for about 1.5 seconds. to the manual shift gate ᭺A with the vehicle In the manual shift mode, the shift range is stopped or while driving, the transmission displayed on the position indicator in the Starting and driving 5-19 ∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds ∙ In the manual shift mode, the trans- for extended periods of time in lower mission may not shift to the selected than 6 range. This reduces fuel gear. This helps maintain driving per- economy. formance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control. When shifting up ∙ When this situation occurs, the Con- Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT) to higher range.) position indicator light will blink and When shifting down the chime will sound. ∙ In the manual shift mode, the trans- Move the shift lever to the Ϫ (down) side. mission may shift up automatically to (Shifts to lower range.) a higher range than selected if the ∙ Moving the shift lever rapidly to the engine speed is too high. When the same side twice will shift the ranges in vehicle speed decreases, the trans- LSD2360 succession. mission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the ve- Shift lock release ∙ The transmission will automatically hicle comes to a stop. If the battery charge is low or discharged, downshift the gears. (For example, if you ∙ CVT operation is limited to automatic the shift lever may not be moved from the select the 3rd range, the transmission P (Park) position even with the brake pedal will shift down between the 3rd and 1st drive mode when CVT fluid temperature is extremely low even if manual depressed and the shift lever button gears.) shift mode is selected. This is not a mal- pressed. When canceling the manual shift mode function. When CVT fluid warms up, It will be necessary to jump start or have manual mode can be selected. your battery charged. For additional infor- Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) posi- mation, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In tion to return the transmission to the nor- ∙ When the CVT fluid temperature is high, case of emergency” section of this manual. mal driving mode. the shift range may upshift in lower rpm than usual. This is not a malfunc- It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN tion. dealer or a professional towing service.

5-20 Starting and driving To move the shift lever, complete the fol- If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P High fluid temperature protection lowing procedure: (Park), have the transmission checked as mode soon as possible. It is recommended that 1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. This transmission has a high fluid tem- position. perature protection mode. If the fluid tem- 2. Apply the parking brake. CAUTION perature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high tem- Make sure to take extra care during the 3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a peratures with heavy loads, such as when removal of the shift lock cap as this part small (1/8 inch or 3 mm) flat-head towing a trailer), engine power and, under is easily damaged. screwdriver, remove the shift lock re- some conditions, vehicle speed will be de- lease cover. creased automatically to reduce the WARNING ∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also chance of transmission damage. Vehicle be used. If the shift lever cannot be moved from speed can be controlled with the accelera- the P (Park) position while the engine is tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed 4. Insert the car key into the shift lock running and the brake pedal is de- may be limited. release slot and press straight down. A pressed, the stop lights may not work. small screwdriver or small trim tool Malfunctioning stop lights could cause Fail-safe may also be used. an accident injuring yourself and If the vehicle is driven under extreme others. conditions, such as excessive wheel ∙ For additional information, refer to spinning and subsequent hard braking, “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre- Accelerator downshift the fail-safe system may be activated. driving checks and adjustments” — in D (Drive) position and manual The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) section of this manual. shift mode may come on to indicate the fail-safe 5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) mode is activated. For additional infor- position while holding down the shift For passing or hill climbing, depress the mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator lock release. accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con- the transmission down into lower range, trols” section of this manual. This will oc- 6. Push the ignition switch to the ON po- depending on the vehicle speed. cur even if all electrical circuits are func- sition to unlock the steering wheel. tioning properly. In this case, place the Now the vehicle may be moved to the ignition switch in the OFF position and desired location. wait for 10 seconds. Then place the igni- Starting and driving 5-21 PARKING BRAKE

tion switch back in the ON position. The WARNING vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its ∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re- normal operating condition, have the leased before driving. Failure to do so transmission checked and repaired, if can cause brake failure and lead to an necessary. It is recommended that you accident. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. WARNING ∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of When the high fluid temperature pro- the parking brake. When parking, be tection mode or fail-safe operation oc- sure the parking brake is fully curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re- engaged. duced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death the chance of a collision. Be especially through unintended operation of the LSD2176 careful when driving. If necessary, pull vehicle and/or its systems, do not To engage: Firmly depress the parking to the side of the road at a safe place leave children, people who require the brake. and allow the transmission to return to assistance of others or pets unat- To release: normal operation, or have it repaired if tended in your vehicle. Additionally, necessary. the temperature inside a closed ve- 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. hicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a signifi- 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- cant risk of injury or death to people sition. and pets. 3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release. 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

5-22 Starting and driving DRIVE MODE SELECTOR BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)

NORMAL MODE WARNING NORMAL mode is recommended for nor- Failure to follow the warnings and in- mal driving. Press the NORMAL mode but- structions for proper use of the BSW ton to select this mode. system could result in serious injury or SPORT MODE death. ∙ The BSW system is not a replacement The SPORT mode adjusts the engine, for proper driving procedures and is transmission, and steering to enhance not designed to prevent contact with performance. Press the SPORT mode but- vehicles or objects. When changing ton to select this driving mode. The SPORT lanes, always use the side and rear mode indicator will appear in the vehicle mirrors and turn and look in the direc- information display. tion your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely NOTE: LSD2361 solely on the BSW system. Drive Mode Selector switches In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may The BSW system helps alert the driver of Two driving modes can be selected by us- be reduced. other vehicles in adjacent lanes when ing the Drive Mode Selector switches: NOR- changing lanes. MAL and SPORT.

NOTE: ∙ When the Drive Mode Selector switch selects a mode, the mode may not switch quickly. This is not a malfunction. ∙ Select the NORMAL mode for normal driving.

Starting and driving 5-23 LSD2362 SSD1030 The BSW system uses radar sensors ᭺1 Detection zone installed near the rear bumper to detect The radar sensors can detect vehicles on other vehicles in an adjacent lane. either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

5-24 Starting and driving 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light 2. BSW/RCTA Indicator BSW SYSTEM OPERATION The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32km/h). If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, refer to “BSW driving LSD2417 situations” in this section. Starting and driving 5-25 The BSW system automatically turns on every time the engine is started, as long as it is activated using the settings menu on the vehicle information display.

LSD2412 5-26 Starting and driving HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE ∙ When the BSW system is turned on, – A vehicle merging into an adjacent BSW SYSTEM the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the lane at a speed approximately the vehicle information display illumi- Perform the following steps to enable or same as your vehicle. nates. disable the BSW system. – A vehicle approaching rapidly from BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS behind. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information dis- – A vehicle which your vehicle over- WARNING play and then press the OK button. Use takes rapidly. the button to select “Driver Assis- Listed below are the system limitations – A vehicle that passes through the tance.” Then press the OK button. for the BSW system. Failure to operate detection zone quickly. the vehicle in accordance with these 2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK system limitations could result in seri- – When overtaking several vehicles button. ous injury or death. in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they NOTE: ∙ The BSW system cannot detect all ve- are traveling close together. hicles under all conditions. ∙ When enabling/disabling the system, ∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is ∙ The radar sensors may not be able to designed based on a standard lane the system will retain current set- detect and activate BSW when certain tings even if the engine is restarted. width. When driving in a wider lane, objects are present such as: the radar sensors may not detect ve- ∙ The RCTA system (if so equipped) is – Pedestrian, bicycles, animals. hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv- integrated into the BSW system. ing in a narrow lane, the radar sensors There is not a separate selection in – Vehicles such as motorcycles, low may detect vehicles driving two lanes height vehicles, or high ground the vehicle information display for away. clearance vehicles. the RCTA system. When the BSW is ∙ The radar sensors are designed to ig- disabled, the RCTA system is also dis- – Oncoming vehicles. nore most stationary objects; how- abled. – Vehicles remaining in the detec- ever, objects such as guardrails, walls, tion zone when you accelerate foliage and parked vehicles may oc- from a stop. casionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.

Starting and driving 5-27 ∙ The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: – Severe weather – Road spray – Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle ∙ Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles. LSD2299 LSD2300 Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind ∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the will interfere with the chime sound, Indicator on and it may not be heard. detection zone, then the system chimes Indicator off (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. Indicator flashing NOTE: Another vehicle approaching ∙ The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind from behind. Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de- before a vehicle enters the detection tection zone from behind in an adjacent zone, the side indicator light will flash lane. but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

5-28 Starting and driving NOTE: ∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together. ∙ The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly. ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. LSD2302 LSD2303 Illustration3–Overtaking another Illustration4–Overtaking another vehicle vehicle Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu- detection zone, then the system chimes minates if you overtake a vehicle and that (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.

Starting and driving 5-29 NOTE: ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. ∙ The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

LSD2305 LSD2308 Illustration 5 – Entering from the side Illustration 6 – Entering from the side Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu- detection zone, then the system chimes minates if a vehicle enters the detection (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. zone from either side.

5-30 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink ᭺A in the vehicle information display. The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD2416 Starting and driving 5-31 Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn additional paint near the radar sensors. off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/RCTA indi- Do not strike or damage the area around cator (orange) will appear in the vehicle in- the radar sensors. It is recommended that formation display. you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a NOTE: collision. If the BSW system stops working, the Radio frequency statement RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working. For USA Action to take: FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the LSD2362 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Rules. gine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system The two radar sensors ᭺1 for the BSW and Operation is subject to the following two checked. It is recommended that you visit a RCTA systems are located near the rear conditions: NISSAN dealer for this service. bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- 1. This device may not cause harmful in- dar sensors clean. terference, and The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- 2. This device must accept any interfer- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ence received, including interference ing water, mist or fog. that may cause undesired operation. The blocked condition may also be caused FCC Warning by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for Check for and remove objects obstructing compliance could void the user’s authority the area around the radar sensors. to operate the equipment. 5-32 Starting and driving REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if so equipped)

For Canada Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz WARNING Applicable law: Canada 310 Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts Failure to follow the warnings and in- This device complies with Industry Canada structions for proper use of the RCTA licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation system could result in serious injury or is subject to the following two conditions: death. ∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement 1. This device may not cause interference, for proper driving procedures and is and not designed to prevent contact with 2. This device must accept any interfer- vehicles or objects. When backing out ence, including interference that may of a parking space, always use the cause undesired operation of the de- side and rear mirrors and turn and vice. look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz system. Output power: less than 20 milliwatts The RCTA system will assist you when Droit applicable: Canada 310 backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de- Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR signed to detect other vehicles approach- d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation system detects cross traffic, it will alert you. est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv- antes: 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. Starting and driving 5-33 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light 2. BSW/RCTA Indicator RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space. When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational. If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD2417 5-34 Starting and driving LSD2216 LSD2362 The RCTA system uses radar sensors ᭺1 installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle. The radar sensors ᭺1 can detect an approaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

Starting and driving 5-35 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display and then press the OK button. Use the button to select “Driver Assis- tance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK button. When the RCTA system is turned on, the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.

NOTE: ∙ The RCTA system is integrated into the BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled. ∙ When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

LSD2412 5-36 Starting and driving WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as: – Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles – A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) – A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph LSD2173 (8 km/h) RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ∙ The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations: – Illustration a: When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.

Starting and driving 5-37 – Illustration b: When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space. – Illustration c: When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground. – Illustration d: When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle. – Illustration e: When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small. ∙ The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: LSD2043 LSD2044 – Severe weather Illustration 1 Illustration 2 – Road spray NOTE: – Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the In the case of several vehicles approach- vehicle ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo- ∙ Do not attach stickers (including site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may transparent material), install accesso- not be sounded by the RCTA system af- ries or apply additional paint near the ter the first vehicle passes the sensors. radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles. ∙ Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

5-38 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink ᭺A in the vehicle information display. The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD2416 Starting and driving 5-39 Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will additional paint near the radar sensors. turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the Do not strike or damage the area around BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the radar sensors. It is recommended that the vehicle information display. you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a NOTE: collision. If the BSW system stops working, the Radio frequency statement RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working. For USA Action to take FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the LSD2362 vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- This device complies with part 15 of the FCC gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Rules. sage continues to appear, have the system The two radar sensors ᭺1 for the BSW and Operation is subject to the following two checked. It is recommended that you visit a conditions: NISSAN dealer for this service. RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- 1. This device may not cause harmful in- dar sensors clean. terference, and The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- 2. This device must accept any interfer- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ence received, including interference ing water, mist or fog. that may cause undesired operation. The blocked condition may also be caused FCC Warning by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for Check for and remove objects obstructing compliance could void the user’s authority the area around the radar sensors. to operate the equipment. 5-40 Starting and driving CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

For Canada Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz Applicable law: Canada 310 Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz LSD2414 Output power: less than 20 milliwatts PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE Droit applicable: Canada 310 CONTROL Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR 1. CANCEL switch d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- 2. RES+ switch eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv- 3. SET– switch antes: 4. ON/OFF cruise switch 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de ∙ If the cruise control system malfunc- brouillage, et tions, it cancels automatically. 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. Starting and driving 5-41 WARNING ∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the To reset at a faster cruising speed, use accelerator pedal. When you release the one of the following three methods: Do not use the cruise control when driv- pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ- ing under the following conditions: ously set speed. ∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, ∙ When it is not possible to keep the ∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set push and release the SET– switch. vehicle at a set speed. speed when going up or down steep ∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. When ∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies hills. If this happens, drive without the the vehicle attains the speed you desire, in speed. cruise control. release the switch. ∙ On winding or hilly roads. To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods: ∙ Push and release the RES+ switch. Each ∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). time you do this, the set speed in- ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. ∙ In very windy areas. creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). ∙ Tap the brake pedal. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle To reset at a slower cruising speed, use control and result in an accident. ∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. one of the following three methods: CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The indicator light in the instru- ∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ment panel goes out. vehicle attains the desired speed, push The cruise control allows driving at a speed The cruise control is automatically can- the SET– switch and release it. between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with- celed if: ∙ Push and hold the SET– switch. Release out keeping your foot on the accelerator ∙ You depress the brake pedal while the switch when the vehicle slows to pedal. pushing the RES+ or SET– switch. The the desired speed. To turn on the cruise control, push the preset speed is deleted from memory. ∙ Push and release the SET– switch. Each ON/OFF switch on. The indicator ∙ The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed. time you do this, the set speed de- light in the instrument panel will illuminate. creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve- ∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral). hicle to the desired speed, push the SET– To resume the preset speed, push and switch and release it. Take your foot off the release the RES+ switch. The vehicle re- accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains turns to the last set cruising speed when the set speed. the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). 5-42 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (if so equipped)

To turn off the cruise control, use one of WARNING the following three methods: Failure to follow the warnings and in- ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. structions for proper use of the ICC sys- ∙ Tap the brake pedal. tem could result in serious injury or death. ∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. ∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist The indicator light in the instru- the driver and is not a collision warn- ment panel goes out. ing or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. ∙ Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them. LSD2367 ∙ Always drive carefully and attentively The ICC system is intended to enhance the when using the ICC system. Read and operation of the vehicle when following a understand the Owner’s Manual thor- vehicle traveling in the same lane and di- oughly before using the ICC system. rection. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent ac- The ICC system uses a radar sensor ᭺A cidents or to control the vehicle’s located on the front of the vehicle to detect speed in emergency situations. Do vehicles traveling ahead. not use the ICC system except in ap- If the radar sensor detects a slower moving propriate road and traffic conditions. vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance. The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

Starting and driving 5-43 ICC SYSTEM OPERATION The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h), based on road conditions. The vehicle travels at the set speed when the road ahead is clear. The ICC system is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking power. This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. LSD2420 If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a 5-44 Starting and driving warning chime and blink the system dis- The ICC system does not control vehicle play to notify the driver to take necessary speed or warn you when you approach action. stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to For additional information, refer to “Ap- maintain proper distance from vehicles proach warning” in this section. ahead when approaching toll gates or traf- The following items are controlled in the fic congestion. ICC system: ∙ When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the ICC system maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, SSD0254 the ICC system adjusts the speed to When driving on the freeway at a set speed maintain the distance, selected by the and approaching a slower traveling vehicle driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the ve- ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed hicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the to maintain the distance, selected by the limitations of the system. The system driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle will cancel once it judges a standstill ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, with a warning chime. the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay ∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has attention to the driving operation to main- moved out from its lane of travel, the tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates ICC system accelerates and maintains to the set speed. vehicle speed up to the set speed. Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Starting and driving 5-45 Depress the accelerator to properly accel- 2. RES+ switch: erate your vehicle when acceleration is re- Resumes set speed or increases quired for a lane change. Depress the brake speed incrementally. pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle 3. CANCEL switch: ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us- Deactivates the system without erasing the ICC system. ing the set speed. 4. SET– switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally. 5. CRUISE switch:

LSD2433 Master switch to activate the system. THE ICC SWITCH The system is operated by the CRUISE switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel. 1. DISTANCE switch: Changes the vehicle’s following distance: ∙ Long ∙ Middle ∙ Short

5-46 Starting and driving ∙ ICC system warning (orange): Indi- cates that if there is a malfunction in the ICC system. 2. Set vehicle speed indicator: Indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h. 3. Set distance indicator: Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance switch.

LSD2285 4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator: LSD2409 The ICC system display and Indicates whether it detects a vehicle Operating ICC indicators in front of you. To turn on the cruise control, quickly push The display is located between the speed- and release the CRUISE switch ᭺A . ometer and tachometer. The ICC system ON indicator (white), set distance indicator and set vehicle speed 1. CRUISE switch indicator: indicator come on in a standby state for setting. ∙ ICC system ON indicator (white): In- dicates that the CRUISE switch is ON. ∙ ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

Starting and driving 5-47 ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or Manual mode ∙ When the parking brake is applied ∙ When the brakes are operated by the driver When the SET– switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set. A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up: ∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. LSD2370 Push the CRUISE switch to turn off LSD2288 To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- the ICC system and reset the ICC switch ᭺1 System set display with vehicle ahead hicle to the desired speed, push the SET– by pushing the CRUISE switch ᭺2 System set display without vehicle switch and release it. The ICC system set again.) ahead indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection For additional information about the Vehicle detected ahead indicator, set distance indicator and set ve- VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic hicle speed indicator ᭺B will come on. Take Control (VDC) system” in this section. When a vehicle is detected in the lane your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve- vehicle will maintain the set speed. ∙ When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) is hicle by controlling the throttle and apply- operating When the SET– switch is pushed under the ing the brakes to match the speed of a following conditions, the system cannot be ∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC slower vehicle ahead. The system then set and the ICC indicators will blink for ap- system, make sure the wheels are no controls the vehicle speed based on the longer slipping. Push the proximately 2 seconds: speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the CRUISE switch to turn off the ICC driver selected distance. ∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) system, and reset the ICC system by and a vehicle ahead is not detected pushing the CRUISE switch again.) 5-48 Starting and driving NOTE: ∙ The stoplights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system. ∙ When the brake operates, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction. When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance. Vehicle ahead not detected When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler- LSD2289 LSD2288 ates your vehicle to resume the previously When passing another vehicle, the set ᭺1 System set display with vehicle ahead speed indicator ᭺B will flash when the ve- set vehicle speed. The ICC system then ᭺2 System set display without vehicle ahead maintains the set speed. hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the How to change the set vehicle When a vehicle is no longer detected, the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the speed vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off. pedal is released, the vehicle will return to If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera- the previously set speed. To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following methods: tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system is in operation, the system con- ICC system, you can depress the accelera- ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set ve- trols the distance to that vehicle. tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate hicle speed indicator will go out. your vehicle rapidly. When a vehicle is no longer detected under ∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys- speed indicator will go out. tem will be canceled. ∙ Turn the CRUISE switch off. The ICC indicators will go out. Starting and driving 5-49 To reset at a faster cruising speed, use To resume the preset speed, push and one of the following methods: release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when ∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h). the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET– switch. ∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for Canada). ∙ Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h for Canada).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use LSD2371 one of the following methods: How to change the set distance ∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the to the vehicle ahead vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET– switch and release it. The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traf- ∙ Push and hold the SET– switch. The set fic conditions. vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for Canada). Each time the distance switch ᭺A is pushed, the set distance will change to ∙ Push, then quickly release the SET– long, middle, short and back to long again, switch. Each time you do this, the set in that sequence. speed will decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h for Canada).

5-50 Starting and driving Approach warning NOTE: If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle The approach warning chime may sound ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve- and the system display may blink when hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys- the ICC sensor detects objects on the tem warns the driver with the chime and side of the vehicle or on the side of the ICC system display. Decelerate by depress- road. This may cause the ICC system to ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve- decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The hicle distance if: ICC sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding ∙ The chime sounds. roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when ∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator entering or exiting a curve. In these blinks. cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your ve- The warning chime may not sound in hicle. LSD2429 some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are: Also, the radar sensor sensitivity can be Distance Approximate distance at affected by vehicle operation (steering ma- 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)] ∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the neuver or driving position in the lane) or 1. Long 200 (60) same speed and the distance between traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicles is not changing. 2. Middle 150 (45) vehicle is being driven with some damage). 3. Short 90 (30) ∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between ve- ∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will hicles is increasing. change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer ∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. the distance. The warning chime will not sound when: ∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance ∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles becomes “long.” (Each time the engine that are parked or moving slowly. is started, the initial setting becomes “long.”) ∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system. Starting and driving 5-51 ∙ As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or over- come poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles. ∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, SSD0252 the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ∙ The ICC system will not adapt auto- The system will cancel once it judges matically to road conditions. This sys- that the vehicle has come to a stand- WARNING tem should be used in evenly flowing still and sound a warning chime. To Listed below are the system limitations traffic. Do not use the system on roads prevent the vehicle from moving, the for the ICC system. Failure to operate with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in driver must depress the brake pedal. heavy rain or in fog. the vehicle in accordance with these ∙ Always pay attention to the operation system limitations could result in seri- of the vehicle and be ready to manu- ous injury or death. ally control the proper following dis- ∙ The ICC system is primarily intended tance. The ICC system may not be able for use on straight, dry, open roads to maintain the selected distance be- with light traffic. It is not advisable to tween vehicles (following distance) or use the ICC system in city traffic or selected vehicle speed under some congested areas. circumstances.

5-52 Starting and driving ∙ The system may not detect the ve- – Interference by other radar ∙ When excessively heavy baggage is hicle in front of you in certain road or sources. loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of weather conditions. To avoid acci- your vehicle. ∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are dents, never use the ICC system under towing a trailer. The system may not The ICC system is designed to automati- the following conditions: detect a vehicle ahead. cally check the sensor’s operation within – On roads where the traffic is heavy the limitations of the system. ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a or there are sharp curves vehicle or object can unexpectedly The detection zone of the radar sensor is – On slippery road surfaces such as come into the sensor detection zone limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de- on ice or snow, etc. and cause automatic braking. Always tection zone to maintain the selected dis- stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys- tance from the vehicle ahead. – During bad weather (rain, fog, tem where not recommended in this snow, etc.) A vehicle ahead may move outside of the warning section. detection zone due to its position within – When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may The radar sensor will not detect the follow- the bumper around the distance not be detected in the same lane ahead if ing objects: sensor they are traveling offset from the centerline – On steep downhill roads (the ve- ∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the hicle may go beyond the set ve- lane ahead may not be detected until the ∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway hicle speed and frequent braking vehicle has completely moved into the may result in overheating the ∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane lane. brakes) ∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel If this occurs, the ICC system may warn – On repeated uphill and downhill lane you by blinking the system indicator and roads sounding the chime. The driver may The following are some conditions in which have to manually control the proper dis- – When traffic conditions make it dif- the sensor cannot properly detect a ve- tance away from the vehicle traveling ficult to keep a proper distance be- hicle ahead and the system may not oper- ahead. tween vehicles because of fre- ate properly: quent acceleration or deceleration ∙ When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.

Starting and driving 5-53 SSD0253 When driving on some roads, such as wind- If this occurs, the ICC system may warn ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads you by blinking the system indicator and which are under construction, the radar sounding the chime unexpectedly. You sensor may detect vehicles in a different will have to manually control the proper lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve- distance away from the vehicle traveling hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the ahead. ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

5-54 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Condition A Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set: ∙ When the VDC system is turned off ∙ When the VDC or ABS (including the TCS) operates ∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) ∙ When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or Manual mode ∙ When the parking brake is applied LSD2373 ∙ When a wheel slips Starting and driving 5-55 Action to take When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ICC CRUISE switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system. Condition B When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor area is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect vehicles ahead. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be LSD2411 LSD2395 able to maintain the selected following dis- Action to take Action to take tance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor area. If the warning light (orange) comes on, park If the warning light comes on, park the ve- the vehicle in a safe location and turn the hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, The system warning light (orange) will illu- engine off. Check to see if the radar sensor restart the engine, resume driving and set minate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar window is blocked. If the radar sensor win- the ICC system again. Obstruction” warning message will appear dow is blocked, remove the blocking mate- If it is not possible to set the system or in the vehicle information display. rial. Restart the engine. If the warning light the indicator stays on, it may indicate continues to illuminate, have the ICC sys- When driving on roads with limited road that the system is malfunctioning. Al- tem checked. It is recommended that you structures or buildings (for example, long though the vehicle is still drivable under visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to normal conditions, have the vehicle long walls), the system may illuminate the Condition C checked. It is recommended that you system warning light (orange) and display visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” When the ICC system is not operating message. properly, a chime sounds and the system warning light (orange) will come on. 5-56 Starting and driving ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans- Changes or modifications not expressly parent material) or install an accessory approved by the party responsible for near the sensor. This could cause failure compliance could void the user’s authority or malfunction. to operate the equipment. ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the This equipment has been tested and found sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This to comply with the limits for a Class A digi- could cause failure or malfunction. tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide ∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front reasonable protection against harmful in- bumper. Before customizing or restor- terference when the equipment is oper- ing the front bumper, it is recom- ated in a commercial environment. This mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. equipment generates, uses, and can radi- Radio frequency statement ate radio frequency energy and, if not in- LSD2367 stalled and used in accordance with the FCC Notice SYSTEM MAINTENANCE instruction manual, may cause harmful in- For USA terference to radio communication. Op- The sensor for the ICC system ᭺A is located eration of this equipment in a residential on the front of the vehicle. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC area is likely to cause harmful interference Rules. in which case the user will be required to To keep the ICC system operating properly, correct the interference at his own ex- be sure to observe the following: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: pense. ∙ Always keep the sensor area clean. 1. This device may not cause harmful in- Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor- ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas terference, and mation: This equipment complies with FCC around the sensor. Do not touch or re- radiation exposure limits set forth for an move the screw located on the sensor. 2. This device must accept any interfer- uncontrolled environment. This equipment Doing so could cause a failure or mal- ence received, including interference should be installed and operated with function. If the sensor is damaged due that may cause undesired operation. minimum distance of 20 cm between the to an accident, it is recommended that FCC Warning radiator and your body. you visit a NISSAN dealer. Starting and driving 5-57 AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB)

The transmitter must not be co-located or WARNING operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB For Canada system could result in serious injury or This device complies with Industry Canada death. licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation ∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid is subject to the following two conditions: to the driver. It is not a replacement 1. This device may not cause interference, for the driver’s attention to traffic and conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents 2. This device must accept any interfer- due to carelessness or dangerous ence, including interference that may driving techniques. cause undesired operation of the device. ∙ The AEB system does not function in LSD2367 all driving, traffic, weather and road A conditions. The AEB system uses a radar sensor ᭺ located behind the lower grille of the front The AEB system can assist the driver when bumper to measure the distance to the there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the same lane. vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

5-58 Starting and driving 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator 2. AEB warning indicator 3. AEB system warning light AEB SYSTEM OPERATION The AEB system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB system will provide an initial warning to the driver by both a visual and audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB system detects that there is still the possi- bility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the driver does not take action, the AEB system issues the second visual warning (red) and audible warning and also applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB system applies harder braking automatically.

LSD2773 Starting and driving 5-59 NOTE: The vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system. Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a collision, should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB system will function later or will not function. The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions: ∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to avoid a collision. ∙ When the accelerator pedal is depressed. ∙ When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead. If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

LSD2412 5-60 Starting and driving TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – Dirt, ice, snow or other material ON/OFF covering the radar sensor. WARNING Perform the following steps to turn the AEB – Interference by other radar systems ON or OFF: Listed below are the system limitations sources. for the AEB system. Failure to operate 1. Press the button until “Settings” the vehicle in accordance with these – Snow or road spray from traveling displays in the vehicle information dis- system limitations could result in seri- vehicles. play and then press the OK button. Use ous injury or death. – If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g. the button to select “Driver Assis- ∙ The AEB system cannot detect all ve- motorcycle). tance.” Then press the OK button. hicles under all conditions. – When driving on a steep downhill 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press ∙ The radar sensor does not detect the slope or roads with sharp curves. the OK button. following objects: ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, the 3. Select “System” and press the OK but- – Pedestrians, animals or obstacles AEB system may unexpectedly apply ton. in the roadway. partial braking. When acceleration is When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB necessary, continue to depress the system warning light illuminates. – Oncoming vehicles. accelerator pedal to override the – Crossing vehicles. system. NOTE: ∙ The radar sensor has some perfor- ∙ Braking distances increase on slip- ∙ The AEB system will be automatically mance limitations. If a stationary ve- pery surfaces. turned on when the engine is re- hicle is in the vehicles’s path, the AEB started. system will not function when the ve- ∙ The I-FCW system is integrated into hicle is driven at speeds over approxi- the AEB system. There is not a sepa- mately 50 mph (80 km/h). rate selection in the vehicle informa- ∙ The radar sensor may not detect a ve- tion display for the I-FCW system. hicle ahead in the following When the AEB is turned off, the I-FCW conditions: system is also turned off.

Starting and driving 5-61 ∙ The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstructions of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly. ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

LSD2377 5-62 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY system warning light (orange) and display Action to take the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” UNAVAILABLE If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop message. the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- Condition A Action to take gine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the When the radar sensor picks up interfer- If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop AEB systems checked. It is recommended ence from another radar source, making it the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the lever in the P (Park) position and turn the vice. AEB system is automatically turned off. engine off. Clean the radar cover on the The AEB system warning light (orange) will lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the illuminate. engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It Action to take is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB system will resume automatically. NOTE: Condition B If the AEB system stops working, the When the sensor area of the front bumper I-FCW system will also stop working. is covered with dirt or is obstructed, mak- SYSTEM MALFUNCTION ing it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will The AEB system warning light (orange) will sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Ra- illuminate and the warning message [Mal- dar Obstruction” warning message will ap- function] will appear in the vehicle informa- pear in the vehicle information display. tion display. When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the Starting and driving 5-63 ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the For Canada sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This This device complies with Industry could cause failure or malfunction. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). ∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front Operation is subject to the following two bumper. Before customizing or restor- conditions: ing the front bumper, it is recom- 1. This device may not cause interfer- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. ence, FCC Notice 2. This device must accept any interfer- For USA ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of This device complies with Part 15 of the the device. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: LSD2367 1. This device may not cause harmful SYSTEM MAINTENANCE interference, and The sensor ᭺A is located behind the lower 2. This device must accept any interfer- grille of the front bumper. ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: FCC Warning ∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front Changes or modifications not expressly bumper clean. approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s author- ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas ity to operate the equipment. around the sensor. ∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction. 5-64 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW)

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-FCW system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The I-FCW system can help warn the driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second LSD2367 vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor ᭺A ahead in the same lane. located behind the lower grille of the front bumper to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

Starting and driving 5-65 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator 2. AEB system warning light

LSD2424 5-66 Starting and driving LSD2263 I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.

Starting and driving 5-67 TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the I-FCW system ON or OFF: 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display and then press the OK button. Use the button to select “Driver Assis- tance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. Select “System” and press the OK button. When the I-FCW system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE: ∙ The I-FCW system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. ∙ The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off. LSD2412 5-68 Starting and driving LSD2312 Illustration A I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Starting and driving 5-69 LSD2265 Illustration B WARNING – Oncoming vehicles – Interference by other radar sources. Listed below are the system limitations – Crossing vehicles for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate – Snow or road spray from traveling ∙ (Illustration A) The I-FCW system does the vehicle in accordance with these vehicles. not function when a vehicle ahead is a system limitations could result in seri- narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle. – Driving in a tunnel ous injury or death. ∙ The radar sensor may not detect a ve- – (Illustration B) When the vehicle ∙ The I-FCW system cannot detect all hicle ahead in the following ahead is being towed. vehicles under all conditions. conditions: – (Illustration C) When the distance ∙ The radar sensor does not detect the – Snow or heavy rain to the vehicle ahead is too close, following objects: the beam of the radar sensor is – Dirt, ice, snow or other material – Pedestrians, animals or obstacles obstructed. covering the radar sensor. in the roadway

5-70 Starting and driving LSD2266 Illustration C – (Illustration D) When driving on a ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the steep downhill slope or roads with warning chime sound, and the chime sharp curves. may not be heard. ∙ The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.

Starting and driving 5-71 LSD2313 Illustration D SYSTEM TEMPORARILY Action to take The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Ra- When the above conditions no longer exist, UNAVAILABLE dar Obstruction” warning message will ap- the I-FCW system will resume automatically. Condition A pear in the vehicle information display. Condition B When the radar sensor picks up interfer- When driving on roads with limited road ence from another radar source, making it When the sensor area of the front bumper is structures or buildings (for example, long impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to I-FCW system is automatically turned off. impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the long walls), the system may illuminate the I-FCW system is automatically turned off. system warning light (orange) and display The AEB system warning light (orange) will the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” illuminate. message.

5-72 Starting and driving Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE: If the AEB system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display. Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended that you LSD2377 visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Starting and driving 5-73 ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the For Canada sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This This device complies with Industry could cause failure or malfunction. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). ∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front Operation is subject to the following two bumper. Before customizing or restor- conditions: ing the front bumper, it is recom- 1. This device may not cause interfer- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. ence, FCC Notice 2. This device must accept any interfer- For USA ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of This device complies with Part 15 of the the device. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: LSD2367 1. This device may not cause harmful SYSTEM MAINTENANCE interference, and The sensor ᭺A is located behind the lower 2. This device must accept any interfer- grille of the front bumper. ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: FCC Warning ∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front Changes or modifications not expressly bumper clean. approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s author- ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas ity to operate the equipment. around the sensor. ∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction. 5-74 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) (if so equipped)

WARNING The system monitors driving style and steering behavior over a period of time, Failure to follow the warnings and in- and it detects changes from the normal structions for proper use of the I-DA pattern. If the system detects that driver system could result in serious injury or attention is decreasing over a period of death. time, the system uses audible and visual ∙ The I–DA system is only a warning to warnings to suggest that the driver take a inform the driver of a potential lack of break. driver attention or drowsiness. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. ∙ The I–DA system does not detect and provide an alert of the driver’s lack of attention or fatigue in every situation. LSD2379 ∙ It is the driver’s responsibility to: INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS ∙ stay alert, SYSTEM OPERATION ∙ drive safely, If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the mes- ∙ keep the vehicle in the traveling sage “Take a break?” appears in the vehicle lane, information display and a chime sounds ∙ be in control of the vehicle at all when the vehicle is driven at speeds above times, 37 mph (60 km/h). ∙ avoid driving when tired, The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warn- ∙ avoid distractions (texting, etc). ings per trip. The I–DA system helps alert the driver if the The system resets and starts reassessing system detects a lack of attention or driv- driving style and steering behavior when ing fatigue. the ignition switch is cycled from ON to OFF and back on. Starting and driving 5-75 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I–DA system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display and press the OK button. Use the button to select “Driver Assis- tance”. Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Driver Attention Alert” and press the OK button.

NOTE: The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted. INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the I–DA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. LSD2412 5-76 Starting and driving BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

∙ The I-DA system may not operate CAUTION properly and may not provide an alert During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), in the following conditions: follow these recommendations to ob- – Poor road conditions such as an tain maximum engine performance uneven road surface or pot holes. and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to – Strong side wind. follow these recommendations may re- – If you have adopted a sporty driv- sult in shortened engine life and re- ing style with higher cornering duced engine performance. speeds or higher rates of acceleration. ∙ Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do – Frequent lane changes or changes not run the engine over 4,000 RPM. to vehicle speed. LIC3125 ∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any ∙ The I–DA system will not provide an gear. alert in the following conditions: System malfunction If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system ∙ Avoid quick starts. – Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph malfunctions, the system warning mes- (60 km/h). ∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos- sage will appear in the vehicle information sible. – Short lapses of attention. display and the function will be stopped automatically. ∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles – Instantaneous distractions such (805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or as dropping an object. Action to take other parts could be damaged. Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the system warning message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-77 FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient ∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more 5. Use Cruise Control Driving Tips to help you achieve the most efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle ∙ Using cruise control during highway due to increased aerodynamic drag. fuel economy from your vehicle. driving helps maintain a steady 1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake ∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin speed. when the A/C is on reduces cooling Pedal Application ∙ Cruise control is particularly effective load. ∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops. in providing fuel savings when driving 4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis- on flat terrains. ∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and tances brake application whenever possible. 6. Plan for the Shortest Route ∙ Observing the speed limit and not ∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to ∙ Maintain constant speed while com- exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where determine the best route to save muting and coast whenever pos- legally allowed) can improve fuel effi- time. sible. ciency due to reduced aerodynamic drag. 7. Avoid Idling 2. Maintain Constant Speed ∙ Maintaining a safe following distance ∙ Shutting off your engine when safe ∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and behind other vehicles reduces un- for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds minimize stops. necessary braking. saves fuel and reduces emissions. ∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic ∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate 8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll lights allows you to reduce your num- changes in speed permits reduced Roads ber of stops. braking and smooth acceleration changes. ∙ Automated passes permit drivers to ∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini- use special lanes to maintain cruis- mize red light stops and improve fuel ∙ Select a gear range suitable to road ing speed through the toll and avoid efficiency. conditions. stopping and starting. 3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Vehicle Speeds ∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load. 5-78 Starting and driving INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

9. Winter Warm Up ∙ Keep your engine tuned up. ∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact ∙ Follow the recommended scheduled to fuel economy. maintenance. ∙ Vehicles typically need no more than ∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct 30 seconds of idling at start-up to pressure. Low tire pressure increases effectively circulate the engine oil be- tire wear and lowers fuel economy. fore driving. ∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment. ∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper- Improper alignment increases tire wear ating temperature more quickly and lowers fuel economy. while driving versus idling. ∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine 10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool oil. For additional information, refer to ∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking “Recommended fluids/lubricants and area or in the shade whenever pos- capacities” in the “Technical and con- sible. sumer information” section of this ∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening manual. the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.

Starting and driving 5-79 PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- WSD0050 sition. WARNING ∙ Safe parking procedures require that 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling both the parking brake be set and the ∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over into traffic when parked on an incline, it transmission placed into P (Park). Fail- flammable materials such as dry is a good practice to turn the wheels as ure to do so could cause the vehicle to grass, waste paper or rags. They may illustrated. move unexpectedly or roll away and ignite and cause a fire. result in an accident. Make sure the ∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB ᭺A : shift lever has been pushed as far for- Turn the wheels into the curb and ward as it can go and cannot be move the vehicle forward until the curb moved without depressing the foot side wheel gently touches the curb. brake pedal. ∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB ᭺B : ∙ Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. 5-80 Starting and driving POWER STEERING

∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO WARNING the engine and push the ignition switch to CURB ᭺C : the OFF position. The temperature of the ∙ If the engine is not running or is power steering system will go down after a Turn the wheels toward the side of the turned off while driving, the power as- period of time and the power assist level road so the vehicle will move away sist for the steering will not work. will return to normal after starting the en- from the center of the road if it moves. Steering will be harder to operate. gine. The power steering warning light will 4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK ∙ When the power steering warning go off. Avoid repeating such steering wheel position. light illuminates with the engine run- operations that could cause the power ning, there will be no power assist for steering system to overheat. the steering. You will still have control You may hear a noise from the front of the of the vehicle but the steering will be vehicle when the steering wheel is oper- harder to operate. Have the power ated. This is a normal operational noise steering system checked. It is recom- and is not a malfunction. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may The power steering system is designed to indicate the power steering system is not provide power assist while driving to oper- functioning properly and may need servic- ate the steering wheel with light force. ing. Have the power steering system When the steering wheel is operated re- checked. It is recommended that you visit a peatedly or continuously while parking or NISSAN dealer for this service. driving at a very low speed, the power as- When the power steering warning light illu- sist for the steering wheel will be reduced. minates with the engine running, there will This is to prevent overheating of the power be no power assist for the steering but you steering system and protect it from getting will still have control of the vehicle. At this damaged. While the power assist is re- time, greater steering effort is required to duced, steering wheel operation will be- operate the steering wheel, especially in come heavy. If the steering wheel opera- sharp turns and at low speeds. tion is still performed, the power steering may stop and the power steering warning light will illuminate. In a safe location, stop Starting and driving 5-81 BRAKE SYSTEM

The brake system has two separate hy- WARNING shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, in order to assure the best braking perfor- you will still have braking at two wheels. ∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be mance. careful when braking, accelerating or BRAKE PRECAUTIONS downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac- This procedure is described in the vehicle celerating could cause the wheels to service manual. It is recommended that Vacuum assisted brakes skid and result in an accident. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The brake booster aids braking by using ∙ If the engine is not running or is ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you turned off while driving, the power as- can stop the vehicle by depressing the sist for the brakes will not work. Brak- WARNING brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- ing will be harder. sure on the brake pedal will be required to ∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but stop the vehicle and stopping distance will Wet brakes it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving be longer. When the vehicle is washed or driven techniques. It can help maintain ve- Using the brakes through water, the brakes may get wet. As hicle control during braking on slip- a result, your braking distance will be lon- pery surfaces. Remember that stop- Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal ger and the vehicle may pull to one side ping distances on slippery surfaces while driving. This will overheat the brakes, during braking. will be longer than on normal sur- wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce faces even with ABS. Stopping dis- To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe gas mileage. tances may also be longer on rough, speed while lightly pressing the brake gravel or snow covered roads, or if you To help reduce brake wear and to prevent pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until are using tire chains. Always maintain the brakes from overheating, reduce speed the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving a safe distance from the vehicle in and downshift to a lower gear before going the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes front of you. Ultimately, the driver is down a slope or long grade. Overheated function correctly. responsible for safety. brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. Parking brake break-in ∙ Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake 5-82 Starting and driving – When replacing tires, install the Anti-lock Braking System will operate to Normal operation specified size of tires on all four prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper- wheels. ates at speeds above3-6mph(5- – When installing a spare tire, make WARNING 10 km/h). The speed varies according to sure that it is the proper size and road conditions. type as specified on the Tire and Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so Loading Information label. For ad- may result in increased stopping When the ABS senses that one or more ditional information, refer to “Tire distances. wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres- and Loading Information label” in Self-test feature the “Technical and consumer infor- sure. This action is similar to pumping the mation” section of this manual. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in- brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa- cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps, tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise – For additional information, refer to hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The from under the hood or feel a vibration “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it- computer has a built-in diagnostic feature from the actuator when it is operating. This yourself” section of this manual. that tests the system each time you start is normal and indicates that the ABS is op- The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels the engine and move the vehicle at a low erating properly. However, the pulsation do not lock during hard braking or when speed in forward or reverse. When the self- may indicate that road conditions are haz- braking on slippery surfaces. The system test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise ardous and extra care is required while detects the rotation speed at each wheel and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. driving. and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- This is normal and does not indicate a mal- vent each wheel from locking and sliding. function. If the computer senses a mal- BRAKE ASSIST function, it switches the ABS off and illumi- By preventing each wheel from locking, the When the force applied to the brake pedal system helps the driver maintain steering nates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is control and helps to minimize swerving activated generating greater braking force and spinning on slippery surfaces. operates normally but without anti-lock assistance. than a conventional brake booster even Using the system with light pedal force. If the ABS warning light illuminates during Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. the self-test or while driving, have the ve- Depress the brake pedal with firm steady hicle checked. It is recommended that you pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Starting and driving 5-83 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

WARNING The VDC system uses various sensors to When the VDC system operates, the monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. indicator in the instrument panel flashes to The brake assist is only an aid to assist Under certain driving conditions, the VDC note the following: braking operation and is not a collision system helps to perform the following warning or avoidance device. It is the functions: ∙ The road may be slippery or the system driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive may determine some action is required safely and be in control of the vehicle at ∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce to help keep the vehicle on the steered all times. wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel path. so power is transferred to a non- slipping drive wheel on the same axle. ∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from ∙ Controls brake pressure and engine under the hood. This is normal and indi- output to reduce drive wheel slip based cates that the VDC system is working on vehicle speed (traction control func- properly. tion). ∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the ∙ Controls brake pressure at individual road conditions. wheels and engine output to help the For additional information, refer to “Slip in- driver maintain control of the vehicle in dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control the following conditions: (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instru- ments and controls” section of this manual. – Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite in- If a malfunction occurs in the system, creased steering input) the indicator light comes on in the instrument panel. The VDC system auto- – Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due matically turns off when the indicator light to certain road or driving conditions) is on. The VDC system can help the driver to The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the maintain control of the vehicle, but it can- VDC system. The indicator illumi- not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv- nates to indicate the VDC system is off. ing situations. When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates 5-84 Starting and driving to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by ∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen- ∙ When driving on extremely inclined transferring power to a non-slipping drive sion. If suspension parts such as surfaces such as higher banked cor- wheel. The indicator flashes if this oc- shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- ners, the VDC system may not operate curs. All other VDC functions are off and bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are properly and the indicator may the indicator will not flash. not NISSAN recommended for your flash or the indicator light may The VDC system is automatically reset to vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, illuminate. Do not drive on these types ON when the ignition switch is placed in the the VDC system may not operate of roads. OFF position then back to the ON position. properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and ∙ When driving on an unstable surface The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea- the indicator may flash or such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ture that tests the system each time you the indicator light may ramp, the indicator may flash or start the engine and move the vehicle for- illuminate. the indicator light may illumi- ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When nate. This is not a malfunction. Re- the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk ∙ If brake related parts such as brake start the engine after driving onto a noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pads, rotors and calipers are not stable surface. NISSAN recommended or are ex- pedal. This is normal and is not an indica- tremely deteriorated, the VDC system ∙ If wheels or tires other than the tion of a malfunction. may not operate properly and both NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate WARNING the and indicator lights may illuminate. properly and the indicator may ∙ The VDC system is designed to help flash or the indicator light may the driver maintain stability but does ∙ If engine control related parts are not illuminate. not prevent accidents due to abrupt NISSAN recommended or are ex- ∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for steering operation at high speeds or tremely deteriorated, both the winter tires or tire chains on a snow by careless or dangerous driving and the indicator lights may covered road. techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and illuminate. be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

Starting and driving 5-85 BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION ∙ If brake related parts such as brake ∙ If wheels or tires other than the During braking while driving through turns, pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended ones are used, the system optimizes the distribution of NISSAN recommended or are ex- the VDC system may not operate force to each of the four wheels depending tremely deteriorated, the VDC system properly and the indicator may on the radius of the turn. may not operate properly and both flash or the indicator light may the and indicator lights illuminate. WARNING may illuminate. ∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for ∙ The VDC system is designed to help ∙ If engine control related parts are not winter tires or tire chains on a snow the driver maintain stability but does NISSAN recommended or are ex- covered road. not prevent accidents due to abrupt tremely deteriorated, both the steering operation at high speeds or and the indicator lights may by careless or dangerous driving illuminate. techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and ∙ When driving on extremely inclined cornering on slippery surfaces and al- surfaces such as higher banked cor- ways drive carefully. ners, the VDC system may not operate ∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen- properly and the indicator may sion. If suspension parts such as flash or the indicator light may shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- illuminate. Do not drive on these types bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are of roads. not NISSAN recommended for your ∙ When driving on an unstable surface vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or the VDC system may not operate ramp, the indicator may flash or properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Re- the indicator may flash or start the engine after driving onto a the indicator light may stable surface. illuminate.

5-86 Starting and driving INTEGRATED DYNAMICS-CONTROL MODULE (if so equipped)

The Integrated Dynamics-control Module tem checked as soon as possible. It is rec- The I–EB can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF is an electric control module that includes ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer (disabled) through the vehicle information the following functions: for this service. display “Settings” page. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information dis- ∙ Intelligent Trace Control WARNING play” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. ∙ Intelligent Engine Brake The I–TC may not be effective depend- ∙ Active Ride Control ing on the driving condition. Always If the Chassis Control System Error warn- drive carefully and attentively. ing message appears in the vehicle infor- INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL mation display, it may indicate that the I–EB When the I–TC is operating, you may feel a (I-TC) is not functioning properly. Have the sys- pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a tem checked as soon as possible. It is rec- This system senses driving based on the noise. This is normal and indicates that the ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer driver’s steering and acceleration/braking I–TC is operating properly. for this service. patterns, and controls brake pressure at Even if the I–TC is set to OFF, some func- individual wheels to aid tracing at corners tions will remain on to assist the driver (for WARNING and help smooth vehicle response. example, avoidance scenes). The I–EB may not be effective depend- The I–TC can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE (I-EB) ing on driving conditions. Always drive (disabled) through the vehicle information carefully and attentively. display “Settings” page. For additional infor- The I–EB function adds subtle deceleration mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis- by controlling the Continuously Variable When the I–EB is operating, the needle of play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec- Transmission (CVT) gear ratio, depending the tachometer will rise up and you may hear an engine noise. This is normal and tion of this manual. on the cornering condition calculated from the driver’s steering input and plural sen- indicates that the I–EB is operating prop- When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off sors. This benefit is for easier traceability erly. the VDC system, the I–TC is also turned off. and less workload of adjusting speed with If the Chassis Control System Error warn- braking at corners. ing message appears in the vehicle infor- The I–EB also enhances braking feel by mation display, it may indicate that the I–TC adding subtle deceleration with the CVT is not functioning properly. Have the sys- gear ratio control according to the driver’s brake pedal operation. Starting and driving 5-87 FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC) ∙ The driver is always responsible for This system senses upper body motion safety during parking and other ma- (based on wheel speed information) and neuvers. Always look around and controls engine torque and four wheel check that it is safe to do so before brake pressure. This will enhance ride com- parking. fort in effort to restrain uncomfortable up- ∙ Read and understand the limitations per body movement when passing over of the sonar (parking sensor) system undulated road surfaces. This system as contained in this section. The col- comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h). ors of the corner sonar indicator and When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the distance guide lines in the the VDC system, the ARC is also turned off. front/rear view indicate different distances to the object. If the Chassis Control System Error warning message appears in the vehicle infor- ∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic LSD2427 mation display, it may indicate that the ARC sources such as an automatic car is not functioning properly. Have the sys- The sonar (parking sensor) system sounds wash, a truck’s compressed-air tem checked as soon as possible. It is rec- a tone to inform the driver of obstacles brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer near the bumper. the function of the system; this may for this service. include reduced performance or a When the “DISPLAY” key is ON, the sonar false activation. When the ARC is operating, you may hear view will automatically appear in the meter. noise and sense slight deceleration. This is ∙ This function is designed as an aid to normal and indicates that the ARC is oper- WARNING the driver in detecting large station- ating properly. ary objects to help avoid damaging ∙ The sonar (parking sensor) system is the vehicle. a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking.

5-88 Starting and driving ∙ The system is not designed to prevent ∙ Keep the sonar sensors (located on The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec- contact with small or moving objects. the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice onds when an obstacle is detected by only Always move slowly. The system will and large accumulations of dirt. Do the corner sensor and the distance does not detect small objects below the not clean the sensors with sharp ob- not change. The tone will stop when the bumper, and may not detect objects jects. If the sensors are covered, the obstacle gets away from the vehicle. close to the bumper or on the ground. accuracy of the sonar function will be When the object is detected, the indicator diminished. ∙ The system may not detect the fol- (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle lowing objects: fluffy objects such as SYSTEM OPERATION snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc., moves closer to the object, the color of the and thin objects such as rope, wire The system informs with a visual and au- indicator turns yellow and the rate of the and chain, etc., or wedge-shaped dible alert of front obstacles when the shift blinking increases. When the vehicle is very objects. lever is in the D (Drive) position and both close to the object, the indicator stops front and rear obstacles when the shift le- blinking and turns red, and the tone If your vehicle sustains damage to the ver is in the R (Reverse) position. sounds continuously. bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or Sonar Operation Table bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of ob- FR Sensor RR Sensor stacles or false alarms. Range Sound Display Sound Display Px†x† CAUTION Roooo ∙ Excessive noise (such as audio system Nx†x† volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may Doox † not be heard. o – Display/Beep when detect † – Display on camera view x – No Display and Beep The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. Starting and driving 5-89 LSD2428 LSD2137 When the corner of the vehicle moves The system indicators ᭺A will appear when closer to an object, the corner sonar indi- the vehicle moves closer to an object. cator ᭺A appears.

5-90 Starting and driving HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM The system is automatically activated when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system: 1. Press the button until “Settings” appears in the vehicle information display and then press OK. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Sensor” and press the OK button. Select “ON” and press the OK button.

NOTE: The system will automatically be turned on when the engine is restarted.

LSD2820 Starting and driving 5-91 COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER Skid and traction capabilities of studded To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be If the vehicle is to be left outside without de-icer through the key hole. If the lock poorer than that of non-studded snow anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, in- becomes frozen, heat the key before in- tires. serting it into the key hole or use the re- cluding the engine block. Refill before oper- mote keyless entry function on the Intelli- ating the vehicle. For additional informa- SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT tion, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in gent Key. It is recommended that the following items the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. ANTIFREEZE be carried in the vehicle during winter: TIRE EQUIPMENT In the winter when it is anticipated that the ∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re- temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to move ice and snow from the windows check the antifreeze to assure proper win- provide superior performance on dry and wiper blades. ter protection. For additional information, pavement. However, the performance ∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do- of these tires will be substantially re- the jack to give it firm support. it-yourself” section of this manual. duced in snowy and icy conditions. If ∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow- you operate your vehicle on snowy or BATTERY drifts. icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use If the battery is not fully charged during of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES ∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the extremely cold weather conditions, the on all four wheels. It is recommended windshield-washer fluid reservoir. battery fluid may freeze and damage the that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, type, size, speed rating and availability the battery should be checked regularly. information. For additional information, refer to “Battery” WARNING in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this 2. For additional traction on icy roads, ∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), manual. studded tires may be used. However, very cold snow or ice can be slick and some U.S. states and Canadian prov- very hard to drive on. The vehicle will inces prohibit their use. Check local, have much less traction or “grip” un- state and provincial laws before install- der these conditions. Try to avoid driving studded tires. ing on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. 5-92 Starting and driving ∙ Whatever the condition, drive with ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so To use the engine block heater: caution. Accelerate and slow down equipped) 1. Turn the engine off. with care. If accelerating or down- Engine block heaters are used to assist shifting too fast, the drive wheels will 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine with cold temperature starting. lose even more traction. block heater cord. ∙ Allow more stopping distance under The engine block heater should be used 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into these conditions. Braking should be when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten- started sooner than on dry pavement. or lower. sion cord. 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground ∙ Allow greater following distances on WARNING slippery roads. Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, ∙ Do not use your engine block heater grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet. ∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). with an ungrounded electrical system These may appear on an otherwise or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se- 5. The engine block heater must be clear road in shaded areas. If a patch riously injured by an electrical shock if plugged in for at least2-4hours, de- of ice is seen ahead, brake before you use an ungrounded connection. pending on outside temperatures, to reaching it. Try not to brake while on properly warm the engine coolant. Use the ice, and avoid any sudden steering ∙ Disconnect and properly store the en- an appropriate timer to turn the engine maneuvers. gine block heater cord before starting block heater on. the engine. Damage to the cord could ∙ Do not use the cruise control on slip- result in an electrical shock and can 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and pery roads. cause serious injury. properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts. ∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust ∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged gases under your vehicle. Keep snow extension cord rated for at least 10 A. clear of the exhaust pipe and from Plug the extension cord into a Ground around your vehicle. Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-93 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION/ ACTIVE SOUND CONTROL (if so equipped) NOTE: To operate the active noise cancellation system properly: ∙ Do not cover the speakers or woofer. ∙ Do not cover the microphones. ∙ Do not change or modify speakers including the woofer and any audio related components such as the ampli- fier. ∙ Do not make any modification including sound deadening or modifications around the microphones, LSD2637 speakers, or woofer. Front and rear microphones ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ACTIVE SOUND CONTROL This system uses three microphones ᭺1 Active sound control enhances existing en- located inside the vehicle to detect engine gine sounds according to the engine speed and driving modes through the booming noises. The system then auto- speakers and woofer. matically generates a noise canceling sound through the speakers and woofer to reduce engine booming noise.

5-94 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 6-2 Push starting ...... 6-10 Emergency engine shut off ...... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats...... 6-10 Flat tire ...... 6-3 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-11 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Towing recommended by NISSAN ...... 6-11 (TPMS)...... 6-3 Vehicle recovery Changing a flat tire ...... 6-3 (freeing a stuck vehicle)...... 6-12 Jump starting ...... 6-8 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

WARNING To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the follow- ∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure ing procedure: to move the vehicle well off the road. – Rapidly push the push-button ignition ∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash- switch three consecutive times in less ers while moving on the highway un- than 1.5 seconds, or less unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle – Push and hold the push-button ignition might become a hazard to other switch for more than 2 seconds. traffic. ∙ Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on. The flashers will operate with the ignition LIC0394 switch placed in any position. Push the switch on to warn other drivers Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use when you must stop or park under emer- of the hazard warning flasher switch gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash. while driving.

6-2 In case of emergency FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING ∙ If the low tire pressure warning light ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- SYSTEM (TPMS) illuminates while driving, avoid sud- nally specified by NISSAN could affect den steering maneuvers or abrupt the proper operation of the TPMS. This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni- braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tors tire pressure of all tires except the the road to a safe location and stop tire sealant into the tires, as this may spare. When the low tire pressure warning the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- cause a malfunction of the tire pres- light is lit and the “Tire Pressure Low - Add ing with under-inflated tires may per- sure sensors. Air” warning appears in the vehicle infor- manently damage the tires and in- mation display, one or more of your tires is crease the likelihood of tire failure. ∙ If the light still comes on while driving significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is Serious vehicle damage could occur after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire being driven with low tire pressure, the and may lead to an accident and could may be flat or the TPMS may be mal- TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the result in serious personal injury. functioning. If you have a flat tire, re- low tire pressure warning light. This system Check the tire pressure for all four place it with a spare tire as soon as will activate only when the vehicle is driven tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the possible. If no tire is flat and all tires at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For ad- recommended COLD tire pressure are properly inflated, it is recom- ditional information, refer to “Warning shown on the Tire and Loading Infor- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer lights, indicator lights and audible remind- mation label to turn the low tire pres- for this service. sure warning light OFF. If you have a ers” in the “Instruments and controls” sec- CHANGING A FLAT TIRE tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions of this manual. ∙ When replacing a wheel without the below: TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will WARNING not function and the low tire pressure Stopping the vehicle warning light will flash for approxi- ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and mately 1 minute. The light will remain away from traffic. electric medical equipment. Those on after 1 minute. Have your tires re- who use a pacemaker should contact placed and/or TPMS system reset as 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. the electric medical equipment soon as possible. It is recommended 3. Park on a level surface and apply the manufacturer for the possible influ- that you visit a NISSAN dealer for parking brake. Move the shift lever to P ences before use. these services. (Park). In case of emergency 6-3 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING ∙ Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) is shifted into P (Park). LCE2142 LCE2224 ∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is A. Blocks Getting the spare tire and tools on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is B. Flat tire Open the trunk. Lift the floor carpeting and hazardous. Blocking wheels spare tire cover. ∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro- Place suitable blocks at both the front and fessional road assistance. back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency LCE2336 WCE0188 LCE2226 Remove the tool box from the spare tire. Turn the clamp counterclockwise and re- Jacking up vehicle and removing move it to access the spare tire. the damaged tire

WARNING ∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. ∙ Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

In case of emergency 6-5 ∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. ∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. ∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack. ∙ Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials. ∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack. LCE0020 ∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s) Always refer to the illustrations for the cor- jack-up point. Align the jack head be- off the ground. It may cause the ve- rect placement and jack-up points for your tween the two notches in the front or hicle to move. specific vehicle model and jack type. the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as Carefully read the caution label attached shown. to the jack body and the following instructions. The jack should be used on firm and level ground. 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with 3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove lever and rod with both hands. Carefully the wheel nuts until the tire is off the raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. ground. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire. 2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the 6-6 In case of emergency 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire The wheel nuts must be kept tightened touches the ground. Then, with the to specification at all times. It is recom- wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel mended that wheel nuts be tightened to nuts securely in the sequence illus- specifications at each lubrication inter- trated (᭺A , ᭺B , ᭺C , ᭺D , ᭺E ). Lower the ve- val. hicle completely. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. WARNING COLD pressure: After vehicle has been ∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly parked for 3 hours or more or driven less tightened wheel nuts can cause the than 1 mile (1.6 km). wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. COLD tire pressures are shown on the ∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver’s door opening. WCE0056 studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. Installing the spare tire 5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking ∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the equipment in the vehicle. The spare tire is designed for emergency vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk use. For additional information, refer to (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, floor carpeting over the damaged tire. “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” etc.). section of this manual. 7. Close the trunk. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface nuts to the specified torque with a between the wheel and hub. torque wrench. 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and Wheel nut tightening torque: tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 83 ft-lb (112 N·m) 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated (᭺A , ᭺B , ᭺C , ᭺D , ᭺E ) until they are tight. In case of emergency 6-7 JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, WARNING ∙ Whenever working on or near a bat- the instructions and precautions below tery, always wear suitable eye protec- ∙ Always make sure that the spare tire must be followed. tors (for example, goggles or indus- and jacking equipment are properly trial safety spectacles) and remove secured after use. Such items can be- WARNING rings, metal bands, or any other jew- come dangerous projectiles in an ac- elry. Do not lean over the battery cident or sudden stop. ∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting when jump starting. ∙ The spare tire is designed for emer- in severe injury or death. It could also ∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen gency use. Refer to specific instruc- damage your vehicle. battery. It could explode and cause tion under the heading “Wheels and serious injury. tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of ∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always this manual. present in the vicinity of the battery. ∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine Keep all sparks and flames away from cooling fan. It could come on at any the battery. time. Keep hands and other objects ∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into away from it. contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the con- tacted area with water. ∙ Keep battery out of the reach of children. ∙ The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

6-8 In case of emergency CAUTION ∙ Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive (ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery. ∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle LCE2223 and let it run for a few minutes. WARNING 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift 6. Keep the engine speed of the booster lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces- vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start Always follow the instructions below. sary electrical systems (lights, heater, the engine of the vehicle being jump Failure to do so could result in damage air conditioner, etc.). started. to the charging system and cause personal injury. 3. Ensure the vent caps are level and CAUTION tight. 1. If the booster battery is in another ve- Do not keep the starter motor engaged hicle, position the two vehicles to bring 4. Connect the jumper cables in the se- for more than 10 seconds. If the engine their batteries near each other. quence illustrated (᭺A , ᭺B , ᭺C , ᭺D ). does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and Do not allow the two vehicles to wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. touch. 7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

In case of emergency 6-9 PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen an extremely high temperature gauge for steam or coolant escaping from the ∙ Continuously Variable Transmission reading) or if you feel a lack of engine radiator before opening the hood. (If (CVT) models cannot be push-started power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the steam or coolant is escaping, turn off or tow-started. Attempting to do so following steps. the engine.) Do not open the hood fur- may cause transmission damage. ther until no steam or coolant can be ∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The WARNING seen. three-way catalyst may be damaged. ∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle 4. Open the engine hood. overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire. WARNING ∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded, If steam or water is coming from the never remove the radiator cap while engine, stand clear to prevent getting the engine is still hot. When the radia- burned. tor cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing 5. Visually check drive belts for damage serious injury. or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and ∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com- radiator should not leak water. If cooling out. ant is leaking, the water pump belt is 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap- missing or loose, or the cooling fan ply the parking brake and move the does not run, stop the engine. shift lever to P (Park). WARNING Do not stop the engine. Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, 2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the jewelry or clothing to come into contact windows, move the heater or air condi- with, or get caught in, engine belts or tioner temperature control to maxi- the engine cooling fan. The engine cool- mum hot and fan control to high ing fan can start at any time. speed.

6-10 In case of emergency TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6. After the engine cools down, check the When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin- CAUTION coolant level in the engine coolant res- cial in Canada) and local regulations for ervoir tank with the engine running. towing must be followed. Incorrect towing ∙ When towing, make sure that the Add coolant to the engine coolant res- equipment could damage your vehicle. transmission, axles, steering system ervoir tank if necessary. Have your ve- Towing instructions are available from a and powertrain are in working condi- hicle repaired. It is recommended that NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are tion. If any of these conditions apply, you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- generally familiar with the applicable laws dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be vice. and procedures for towing. To assure used. proper towing and to prevent accidental ∙ Always attach safety chains before damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom- towing. mends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service For additional information, refer to “Flat operator carefully read the following pre- towing” in the “Technical and consumer in- cautions: formation” section of this manual.

WARNING TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN ∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi- ∙ Never get under your vehicle after it tional information, refer to the diagrams in has been lifted by a tow truck. this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.

In case of emergency 6-11 – Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism). VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

LCE2369 WARNING 2WD models with Continuously CAUTION To avoid vehicle damage, serious per- Variable Transmission (CVT) ∙ Never tow CVT models with the front sonal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle: NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be wheels on the ground or four wheels towed with the driving (front) wheels off the on the ground (forward or backward), ∙ Contact a professional towing service ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed as this may cause serious and expen- to recover the vehicle if you have any truck as illustrated. sive damage to the transmission. If it questions regarding the recovery is necessary to tow the vehicle with procedure. the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels. ∙ Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural mem- ∙ When towing CVT models with the bers of the vehicle. rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: ∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.

6-12 In case of emergency ∙ Only use devices specifically designed If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, for vehicle recovery and follow the etc., use the following procedure: manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control ∙ Always pull the recovery device (VDC) system. straight out from the front of the ve- 2. Make sure the area in front and behind hicle. Never pull at an angle. the vehicle is clear of obstructions. ∙ Route recovery devices so they do not 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point. clear an area around the front tires. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and etc., use a tow strap or other device de- backward. signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al- ∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re- ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc- verse) and D (Drive). tions for the recovery device. ∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos- Rocking a stuck vehicle sible to maintain the rocking motion.

WARNING ∙ Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D ∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. (Drive). ∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed. ∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph This could cause them to explode and (55 km/h). result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a damaged. few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-13 MEMO

6-14 In case of emergency 7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ...... 7-2 Air fresheners ...... 7-6 Washing...... 7-2 Floor mats ...... 7-6 Waxing ...... 7-2 Seatbelts...... 7-7 Removing spots ...... 7-3 Corrosion protection ...... 7-8 Underbody ...... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to Glass ...... 7-3 vehicle corrosion ...... 7-8 Aluminum alloy wheels ...... 7-3 Environmental factors influence the Chromeparts...... 7-4 rate of corrosion...... 7-8 Tire dressings ...... 7-4 Protect your vehicle from corrosion ...... 7-8 Cleaning interior...... 7-4 CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of WASHING ∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough your vehicle, it is important to take proper cloths, such as washing mitts. Care care of it. Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us- must be taken when removing To protect the paint surfaces, wash your ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not vehicle as soon as you can: general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed scratched or damaged. ∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam- with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. age from acid rain. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of CAUTION ∙ After driving on coastal roads. clean water. ∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in ∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird Inside edges, seams and folds on the the detergent. Some car washes, es- doors, hatches and hood are particularly droppings, tree sap, metal particles or pecially brushless ones, use some bugs get on the paint surface. vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There- acid for cleaning. The acid may react fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. ∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur- with some plastic vehicle compo- Take care that the drain holes in the lower nents, causing them to crack. This face. edge of the door are open. Spray water could affect their appearance, and under the body and in the wheel wells to Whenever possible, store or park your ve- also could cause them not to function hicle inside a garage or in a covered area. properly. Always check with your car loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. When it is necessary to park outside, park in wash to confirm that acid is not used. A damp chamois can be used to dry the a shady area or protect the vehicle with a ∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong vehicle to avoid water spots. body cover. household soap, strong chemical de- WAXING Be careful not to scratch the paint sur- tergents, gasoline or solvents. face when putting on or removing the ∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- Regular waxing protects the paint surface body cover. light or while the vehicle body is hot, and helps retain new vehicle appearance. as the surface may become Polishing is recommended to remove water-spotted. built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath- ered appearance before re-applying wax. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.

7-2 Appearance and care ∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough The high-mounted stop light must be washing. Follow the instructions sup- properly reinstalled before driving your ve- plied with the wax. hicle. ∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra- Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and sives, cutting compounds or cleaners dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor- that may damage the vehicle finish. mal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Machine compounding or aggressive pol- Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin- remove this film. ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. REMOVING SPOTS CAUTION Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, When cleaning the inside of the win- insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible dows, do not use sharp-edged tools, from the surface of the paint to avoid last- WAI0007 abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based ing damage or staining. Special cleaning GLASS disinfectant cleaners. They could dam- products are available at a NISSAN dealer age the electrical conductors, radio an- or any automotive accessory store. It is When cleaning the rear window, it may be tenna elements or rear window de- recommended that you visit a NISSAN easier to clean if the high-mounted stop froster elements. dealer for these products. light (if so equipped) is removed first. ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS UNDERBODY Be careful when removing the high- Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge mounted stop light to reduce the risk of In areas where road salt is used in winter, it dampened in a mild soap solution, espe- damaging the high-mounted stop light is necessary to clean the underbody regu- cially during winter months in areas where larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from wires. road salt is used. If not removed, road salt building up and causing the acceleration of To remove the high-mounted stop light: can discolor the wheels. corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in ᭺1 Push toward rear of vehicle. the spring, the underseal must be checked ᭺2 Lift to remove. and, if necessary, re-treated.

Appearance and care 7-3 CLEANING INTERIOR

CAUTION If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the Occasionally remove loose dust from the following precautions: interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a Follow the directions below to avoid vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe staining or discoloring the wheels: ∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur- ∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong than with an oil-based tire dressing. faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in acid or alkali contents to clean the mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a wheels. ∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help dry, soft cloth. prevent it from entering the tire ∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the tread/grooves (where it would be diffi- Regular care and cleaning is required in wheels when they are hot. The wheel cult to remove). order to maintain the appearance of the temperature should be the same as leather (if so equipped). ambient temperature. ∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is Before using any fabric protector, read the ∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove completely removed from the tire manufacturer’s recommendations. Some the cleaner within 15 minutes after tread/grooves. fabric protectors contain chemicals that the cleaner is applied. ∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- may stain or bleach the seat material. CHROME PARTS mended by the tire dressing manufac- Use a cloth dampened only with water to turer. Clean all chrome parts regularly with a clean the meter and gauge lens. non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. WARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot TIRE DRESSINGS steam cleaners) on the seat. This can NISSAN does not recommend the use of damage the seat or occupant classifi- tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a cation sensor (if so equipped). This can coating to the tires to help reduce discolor- also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap- injury. plied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint. 7-4 Appearance and care CAUTION ∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive ∙ Never use fabric protectors unless and damaging to leather surfaces recommended by the manufacturer. ∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any and should be removed promptly. Do similar material. ∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol- meter or gauge lens covers. It may ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, damage the lens cover. detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s natural finish. For Alcantara® (if so equipped)

Water Soluble Stains Stains Not Soluble in Water Resistant Stains Stain Cleaning Method Stain Cleaning Method Repeat as Necessary Don’t Know What Caused the Stain? Repeat treatments as Use a white towel Makeup (Lipstick, Rub with ethyl alcohol Treat with lukewarm water first, then often as necessary. Fruit juice, jam, jelly, damped in lukewarm foundation, mascara, (remember not to rub rinse by dabbing with clean water. If Even stains that are syrup, ketchup, water; rinse by dab- eye shadow), perfume, too hard), wipe with the stain begins to dissolve in the not soluble in water chocolate, ice cream bing with a damped shoe polish, grease or water and rinse by water, repeat the treatment as often will often require to be and mustard white towel in clean oil (in general), grass dabbing with clean as necessary. Allow to dry and if treated with water water. stain water. necessary, treat with ethyl alcohol afterwards. Wipe with water at Put a plastic bag full of room temperature, ice on top of the gum, rinse with clean water. Blood, eggs, excre- when the gum has AVOID the use of Chewing gum ment or urine become hard remove warm water because the pieces, then treat it will make these sub- with ethyl alcohol. stances coagulate. Pre-treat with lemon Vinegar, tomato juice, then wipe with sauce, coffee or hair lukewarm water, rinse gel by dabbing with clean water.

Appearance and care 7-5 AIR FRESHENERS ∙ Properly position the mats in the Most air fresheners use a solvent that floorwell using the floor mat position- could affect the vehicle interior. If you use ing hook. For additional information, an air freshener, take the following precau- refer to "Floor mat installation" in this tions: section. ∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause ∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in- permanent discoloration when they terfere with pedal operation. contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place ∙ Periodically check the floor mats to the air freshener in a location that al- make sure they are properly installed. lows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface. ∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure ∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip they are properly installed. on the vents. These products can cause LAI0009 immediate damage and discoloration The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can when spilled on interior surfaces. FLOOR MATS extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats Carefully read and follow the manufactur- WARNING should be maintained with regular cleaner’s instructions before using the air fresh- ing and replaced if they become exces- eners. To avoid potential pedal interference that sively worn. may result in a collision, injury or death: Floor mat installation ∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front po- Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat position or install them upside down or sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of backwards. the floor mat positioning hooks for each seating position varies depending on the ∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, vehicle. or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.

7-6 Appearance and care When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, WARNING follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following: Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or 1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the chemical solvents to clean the seat shift lever in P (Park) position and with belts, since these materials may se- the parking brake fully applied, position verely weaken the seat belt webbing. the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s). 2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is properly positioned. 3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the igni- LAI2045 tion still in the OFF position, the shift Positioning hooks lever in the P (Park) position and with The illustration shows the location of the the parking brake applied, fully apply floor mat positioning hooks. and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal opera- SEAT BELTS tion or prevent the pedal from return- The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping ing to its normal position. them with a sponge dampened in a mild It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com- dealer for details about installing the floor pletely in the shade before using them. For mats in your vehicle. additional information, refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

Appearance and care 7-7 CORROSION PROTECTION

MOST COMMON FACTORS freezing and where atmospheric pollution CAUTION CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE exists and road salt is used. ∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de- CORROSION Temperature bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: High temperatures accelerate the rate of Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or corrosion to those parts which are not well ∙ The accumulation of moisture- broom. retaining dirt and debris in body panel ventilated. ∙ Never allow water or other liquids to sections, cavities, and other areas. Air pollution come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may ∙ Damage to paint and other protective Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in damage them. coatings caused by gravel and stone the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt chips or minor traffic collisions. use accelerates the corrosion process. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS Road salt also accelerates the disintegra- are extremely corrosive. They accelerate tion of paint surfaces. corrosion and deterioration of underbody INFLUENCE THE RATE OF components such as the exhaust system, CORROSION PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan CORROSION and fenders. Moisture ∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to In winter, the underbody must be Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on keep the vehicle clean. cleaned periodically. the vehicle body underside can accelerate For additional protection against rust and corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry ∙ Always check for minor damage to the corrosion, which may be required in some completely inside the vehicle and should paint and repair it as soon as possible. areas, it is recommended that you consult be removed for drying to avoid floor panel ∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the a NISSAN dealer. corrosion. doors open to avoid water accumula- Relative humidity tion. Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of ∙ Check the underbody for accumulation high relative humidity, especially those ar- of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with eas where the temperatures stay above water as soon as possible. 7-8 Appearance and care 8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-16 Engine compartment check locations...... 8-3 Cleaning ...... 8-16 Engine cooling system ...... 8-4 Replacing ...... 8-16 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 Brakes...... 8-17 Changing engine coolant...... 8-5 Fuses...... 8-18 Engine oil...... 8-6 Engine compartment ...... 8-18 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-6 Passenger compartment...... 8-19 Changing engine oil ...... 8-7 Battery replacement ...... 8-21 Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-8 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 8-21 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Lights ...... 8-23 fluid ...... 8-9 Headlights...... 8-23 Power steering fluid ...... 8-10 Brake fluid ...... 8-10 Front park/turn signal/side marker light ...... 8-23 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-11 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir...... 8-11 Fog lights...... 8-23 Battery...... 8-12 Exterior and interior lights ...... 8-24 Jump starting ...... 8-14 Wheels and tires...... 8-26 Drive belt ...... 8-14 Tire pressure ...... 8-26 Spark plugs ...... 8-15 Tire labeling ...... 8-31 Replacing spark plugs ...... 8-15 Types of tires ...... 8-33 Air cleaner...... 8-15 Tire chains ...... 8-34 In-cabin microfilter ...... 8-16 Changing wheels and tires ...... 8-35 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or main- ∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- ∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and tenance work on your vehicle, always take matic engine cooling fan. It may come coolant. Improperly disposed engine care to prevent serious accidental injury to on at any time without warning, even oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol- if the ignition key is in the OFF position fluids can damage the environment. Al- lowing are general precautions which and the engine is not running. To ways conform to local regulations for should be closely observed. avoid injury, always disconnect the disposal of vehicle fluid. negative battery cable before work- WARNING ing near the fan. ∙ Never leave the engine or the transmission related component harness ∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- ∙ If you must run the engine in an en- closed space such as a garage, be sure connector disconnected while the ig- ply the parking brake securely and there is proper ventilation for exhaust nition switch is in the ON position. block the wheels to prevent the ve- gases to escape. hicle from moving. Move the shift le- ∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat- ver to P (Park). ∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is tery or any transistorized component supported only by a jack. If it is neces- while the ignition switch is in the ON ∙ Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or sary to work under the vehicle, sup- position. LOCK position when performing any port it with safety stands. This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc- parts replacement or repairs. ∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and tions regarding only those items which are sparks away from the fuel tank and ∙ If you must work with the engine run- relatively easy for an owner to perform. ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair battery. and tools away from moving fans, ∙ On gasoline engine models, the fuel A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also belts and any other moving parts. filter or fuel lines should be serviced. It available. For additional information, refer is recommended that you visit a to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order ∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any NISSAN dealer for this service because loose clothing and remove any jew- information” in the “Technical and con- the fuel lines are under high pressure sumer information” section of this manual. elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be- even when the engine is off. fore working on your vehicle. You should be aware that incomplete or ∙ Always wear eye protection whenever CAUTION improper servicing may result in operating you work on your vehicle. difficulties or excessive emissions, and ∙ Do not work under the hood while the could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt engine is hot. Turn the engine off and about any servicing, it is recommended wait until it cools down. that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer. 8-2 Do-it-yourself ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

VQ35DE engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Drive belt location 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Air cleaner 6. Fuse box 7. Fuse box/Fusible links 8. Fusible links 9. Battery 10. Engine oil dipstick 11. Radiator cap 12. Power steering fluid reservoir 13. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI2749 Do-it-yourself 8-3 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the CAUTION ∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) ∙ Never use any cooling system addi- Genuine NISSAN Long Life or 7 years. Mixing any other type of tives such as radiator sealer. Additives Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to coolant other than Genuine NISSAN may clog the cooling system and provide year-round antifreeze and coolant Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), cause damage to the engine, trans- protection. The antifreeze solution con- including Genuine NISSAN Long Life mission and/or cooling system. tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi- Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use tional engine cooling system additives are ∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be of non-distilled water will reduce the not necessary. sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long life expectancy of the factory-fill cool- Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or ant. For additional information, refer WARNING equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life to the “Maintenance and schedules” Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre- section of this manual. ∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant diluted to provide antifreeze protec- reservoir cap when the engine is hot. tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional Wait until the engine and radiator cool freeze protection is needed due to down. Serious burns could be caused weather where you operate your ve- by high pressure fluid escaping from hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life the radiator. For additional informa- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen- tion on precautions, refer to “If your trate following the directions on the vehicle overheats” in the “In case of container. If an equivalent coolant emergency” section of this manual. other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life ∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol- sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- low the coolant manufacturer’s in- gine damage, use only a Genuine structions to maintain minimum anti- NISSAN radiator cap. freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant solu- tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

8-4 Do-it-yourself This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long WARNING Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is ∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded, 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing never change the coolant when the any other type of coolant or the use of engine is hot. non-distilled water will reduce the life ex- ∙ Never remove the radiator cap when pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad- the engine is hot. Serious burns could ditional information, refer to the “Mainte- be caused by high pressure fluid es- nance and schedules” section of this caping from the radiator. manual. ∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used If the cooling system frequently requires coolant. If skin contact is made, wash coolant, it is recommended that you visit thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner a NISSAN dealer for this service. as soon as possible. LDI2750 For additional information on the location ∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets. CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En- LEVEL gine compartment check locations” in this Engine coolant must be disposed of prop- section. erly. Check your local regulations. Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT level is below the MIN level ᭺B , add coolant to the MAX level ᭺A . If the reservoir is empty, A NISSAN dealer can change the engine check the coolant level in the radiator coolant. The service procedure can be when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi- found in the NISSAN Service Manual. cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator Improper servicing can result in reduced with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX heater performance and engine over- level ᭺A . heating.

Do-it-yourself 8-5 ENGINE OIL

CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insuffi- cient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

LDI2751 WDI0214 CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and (High) and L (Low) marks ᭺B . This is the apply the parking brake. normal operating oil level range. If the 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it oil level is below the L (Low) mark ᭺A , reaches operating temperature. remove the oil filler cap and pour rec- 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than ommended oil through the opening. 10 minutes for the oil to drain back Do not overfill ᭺C . into the oil pan. 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. It is normal to add some oil between oil Reinsert it all the way. maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

8-6 Do-it-yourself LDI2763 LDI2558 LDI2634 CHANGING ENGINE OIL 4. Remove clips ᭺B from the under- 5. Place a large drain pan under the drain engine protector. plug ᭺C . 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 6. Remove the drain plug ᭺C with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it and completely drain the oil. reaches operating temperature, then turn it off. If the engine oil filter is to be changed, 3. Remove the oil filler cap ᭺A by turning it remove and replace it at this time. For counterclockwise. additional information, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in this section. ∙ Waste oil must be disposed of properly. ∙ Check your local regulations. Do-it-yourself 8-7 WARNING ties” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. ∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin The drain and refill capacity depends cancer. on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference ∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with only. Always use the dipstick to deter- used oil. If skin contact is made, wash mine when the proper amount of oil is thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner in the engine. as soon as possible. 9. Start the engine. Check for leakage ∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of around the drain plug and oil filter. Cor- children. rect as required.

CAUTION 10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the Be careful not to burn yourself. The en- dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. gine oil may be hot. 7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. Drain plug tightening torque: 25 ft-lb (34 N·m) LDI2764 8. Refill engine with recommended oil CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER through the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. For additional information on drain and refill capacity, refer to “Recom- 2. Turn the engine off. mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- 8-8 Do-it-yourself CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil 7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis- CAUTION filter ᭺B . tance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. ∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine 4. Remove clips ᭺A from the right engine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) protector located inside the right 8. Start the engine and check for leakage ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with wheel well and then remove protector. around the oil filter. Correct as required. other fluids. Remove oil filter ᭺B with an oil filter 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than wrench by turning it counterclockwise. ∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en- Fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission Then remove the oil filter by turning it gine oil if necessary. by hand. fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the CAUTION use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under Be careful not to burn yourself. The en- NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited gine oil may be hot. Warranty. 5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface ∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to with a clean rag. Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may also damage the CVT. Damage caused CAUTION by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under ∙ Be sure to remove any old gasket NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited material remaining on the sealing Warranty. surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and en- When checking or replacement of CVT fluid gine damage. is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ The dipstick must be inserted in place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil. 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. Do-it-yourself 8-9 POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID

WARNING Power steering fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION ∙ DO NOT OVERFILL. ∙ Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent will prevent the power steering system from operating properly. LDI2752 LDI2753 Check the fluid level in the reservoir. For additional information on brake fluid specification, refer to “Recommended The fluid level should be checked when the fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to “Technical and consumer information” sec- 86ºF (0 to 30ºC). The fluid level can be tion of this manual. checked with the level gauge which is attached to the cap. To check the fluid level, WARNING remove the cap. The fluid level should be between the MAX ᭺A and MIN ᭺B lines. ∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated If the fluid is below the MIN ᭺B line, add fluid may damage the brake system. Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. Re- The use of improper fluids can dam- move the cap and fill through the opening. age the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability. ∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

8-10 Do-it-yourself WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should Add a washer solvent to the washer for be stored carefully in marked contain- better cleaning. In the winter season, add a ers out of reach of children. windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mix- CAUTION ture ratio. Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- Refill the reservoir more frequently when faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid driving conditions require an increased is spilled, immediately wash the surface amount of windshield-washer fluid. with water. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & brake fluid is below the MIN line ᭺B , the Anti-freeze or equivalent. brake warning light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX line ᭺A . For addi- CAUTION tional information on recommended type LDI2754 ∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze of brake fluid, refer to “Recommended WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID coolant for windshield-washer fluid. fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the “ RESERVOIR This may result in damage to the Technical and consumer information” sec- paint. tion of this manual. Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid ∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid If the brake fluid must be added frequently, when the “Low Washer Fluid” warning mes- reservoir with washer fluid concen- the brake system should be thoroughly sage shows on the vehicle information dis- trates at full strength. Some methyl checked. It is recommended that you visit a play. alcohol based washer fluid concen- NISSAN dealer for this service. To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, trates may permanently stain the lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir windshield-washer fluid reservoir. opening.

Do-it-yourself 8-11 BATTERY

∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates ∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. WARNING with water to the manufacturer’s rec- Clean the battery with a solution of bak- ∙ Do not expose the battery to flames, ommended levels before pouring the ing soda and water. an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy- fluid into the windshield-washer fluid ∙ Make certain the terminal connections drogen gas generated by the battery reservoir. Do not use the windshield- are clean and securely tightened. is explosive. Explosive gases can washer fluid reservoir to mix the cause blindness or injury. Do not allow washer fluid concentrate and water. ∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for battery fluid to contact your skin, 30 days or longer, disconnect the nega- eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul- tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent furic acid can cause blindness or in- discharge. jury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your NOTE: eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If Care should be taken to avoid situations the acid contacts your eyes, skin or that can lead to potential battery dis- clothing, immediately flush with wa- charge and potential no-start conditions ter for at least 15 minutes and seek such as: medical attention. 1. Installation or extended use of elec- ∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid tronic accessories that consume bat- in the battery is low. Low battery fluid tery power when the engine is not can cause a higher load on the battery running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD which can generate heat, reduce bat- players, etc). tery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. ∙ When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection In these cases, the battery may need to and remove all jewelry. be charged to maintain battery health.

8-12 Do-it-yourself ∙ Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. ∙ Keep battery out of the reach of children. ∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level.

WDI0224 1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case.

WDI0529 2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

Do-it-yourself 8-13 DRIVE BELT

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or 1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un- under severe conditions require frequent usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If checks of the battery fluid level. the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom- JUMP STARTING mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump for this service. starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec- 2. Have the belt checked regularly for tion of this manual. If the engine does not condition and tension in accordance start by jump starting, the battery may with the maintenance schedule found have to be replaced. It is recommended in the “Maintenance and schedules” that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- section of this manual. vice.

LDI2131 VQ35DE engine 1. Crankshaft pulley 2. Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley 3. Generator pulley 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley WARNING Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

8-14 Do-it-yourself SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER

WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. SDI1895 LDI2756 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the Iridium-tipped spark plugs maintenance log shown in the “Mainte- It is not necessary to replace iridium- nance and schedules” section of this tipped ᭺A spark plugs as frequently as con- manual. When replacing the filter, wipe the ventional type spark plugs because they inside of the air cleaner filter housing and last much longer. Follow the maintenance the cover with a damp cloth. log shown in the “Maintenance and sched- To remove the air cleaner filter: ules” section of this manual. Do not service ᭺A iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or ∙ Unlatch the clips and move the air regapping. cleaner cover upward. ∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec- ∙ Remove the air cleaner filter. ommended or equivalent ones. ∙ Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and cover with a damp cloth. Do-it-yourself 8-15 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

WARNING CLEANING ∙ Operating the engine with the air If your windshield is not clear after using cleaner removed can cause you or the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade others to be burned. The air cleaner chatters when running, wax or other mate- not only cleans the air, it stops the rial may be on the blade or windshield. flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t Clean the outside of the windshield with a there, and the engine backfires, you washer solution or a mild detergent. Your could be burned. Do not drive with the windshield is clean if beads do not form air cleaner removed, and be careful when rinsing with clear water. when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild de- ∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body tergent. Then rinse the blades with clear or attempt to start the engine with water. If your windshield is still not clear LDI2757 the air cleaner removed. Doing so after cleaning the blades and using the could result in serious injury. wiper, replace the blades. REPLACING IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. CAUTION The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol- Worn windshield wiper blades can of airborne dust and pollen particles and low the procedure below: reduces some objectionable outside damage the windshield and impair odors. The filter is located behind the glove driver vision. 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind- box. For additional information, refer to the shield. “Maintenance and schedules” section of 2. Push the release tab ᭺B . this manual for change intervals. 3. Move the wiper blade ᭺A down and re- If replacement is required, it is recom- move. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place. 5. Push wiper on to windshield. 8-16 Do-it-yourself BRAKES

CAUTION If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended ∙ After wiper blade replacement, return that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- the wiper arm to its original position; vice. otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened. Self-adjusting brakes ∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting the glass; otherwise the arms may be brakes. damaged from wind pressure. The front and rear disc-type brakes self- adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad LDI2731 requires replacement, a high pitched If you wax the surface of the hood, be care- scraping or screeching sound will be heard ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will ᭺D . This may cause clogging or improper be heard whether or not the brake pedal is windshield-washer operation. If wax gets depressed. Have the brakes checked as into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or soon as possible if the wear indicator small pin ᭺C . sound is heard.

Do-it-yourself 8-17 FUSES

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.”

LDI2385 LDI2636 If any electrical equipment does not oper- ENGINE COMPARTMENT ate, check for an open fuse. Fuses are used in the passenger and en- WARNING gine compartment. Spare fuses are pro- Never use a fuse of a higher or lower vided and can be found in the passenger amperage rating than that specified on compartment fuse box. the fuse box cover. This could damage When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is the electrical system or electronic con- installed in the fuse box securely. trol units or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are in the OFF position.

8-18 Do-it-yourself 2. Open the engine hood. 3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

LDI0456 LDI2758 5. If the fuse is open ᭺A , replace it with a PASSENGER COMPARTMENT new fuse ᭺B . 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec- WARNING trical system checked and repaired. It is Never use a fuse of a higher or lower recommended that you visit a NISSAN amperage rating than that specified on dealer for this service. the fuse box cover. This could damage Fusible links the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire. If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

Do-it-yourself 8-19 If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are in the OFF position. 2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

LDI2759 LDI2760 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 4. If the fuse is open ᭺B , replace it with an ᭺A . equivalent good fuse ᭺C . 5. Push the fuse box cover to install. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-20 Do-it-yourself BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® Be careful not to allow children to swal- Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as low the battery or removed parts. follows: 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver ᭺A into the slit ᭺B of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001 Do-it-yourself 8-21 3. Replace the battery with a new one. FCC Notice: Recommended battery: CR2032 or For USA: equivalent. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- ∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and lowing two conditions: (1) This device electric terminals as doing so could may not cause harmful interference, and cause a malfunction. (2) this device must accept any interfer- ∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold- ence received, including interference ing the battery across the contact that may cause undesired operation. points will seriously deplete the stor- Note: age capacity. Changes or modifications not expressly ∙ Make sure that the + side faces the approved by the party responsible for bottom of the lower part. compliance could void the user’s author- 4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with ity to operate the equipment. ᭺C and ᭺D . For Canada: 5. Operate the buttons to check the op- This device complies with Industry eration. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN conditions: (1) this device may not cause dealer if you need assistance for replace- interference, and (2) this device must ac- ment. cept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

LDI2637 8-22 Do-it-yourself LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS ∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly Replacing the LED headlight bulb For additional information on headlight open without a bulb installed for a (if so equipped) long period of time. Dust, moisture, bulb replacement, refer to the instructions If LED headlight bulb replacement is re- smoke, etc. entering the headlight outlined in this section. quired, it is recommended that you visit a body may affect bulb performance. NISSAN dealer for this service. Replacing the halogen headlight Remove the bulb from the headlight bulb (if so equipped) assembly just before a replacement FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL/SIDE bulb is installed. MARKER LIGHT The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type ∙ Only touch the base when handling If park, turn signal or side marker light bulb which uses a replaceable headlight (halo- the bulb. Never touch the glass enve- replacement is required. It is recom- gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside lope. Touching the glass could signifi- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the engine compartment without remov- cantly affect bulb life and/or head- this service. ing the headlight assembly. light performance. If headlight bulb replacement is required, it ∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed FOG LIGHTS is recommended that you visit a NISSAN inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may For additional information on fog light bulb dealer for this service. break if the glass envelope is replacement, refer to the instructions out- scratched or the bulb is dropped. lined in this section. CAUTION ∙ Use the same number and wattage as Replacing the fog light bulb ∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac- shown in the chart. ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is is necessary, it is recommended that Fog may temporarily form inside the lens recommended that you visit a NISSAN you visit a NISSAN dealer for this of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car dealer for this service. service. wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-23 CAUTION EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS ∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed Item Wattage (W) Bulb No. inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)* High 65 H9 break if the glass envelope is Low 55 H11 scratched or the bulb is dropped. Daytime running/Park — — Turn signal 28/8 7444NA ∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch Side marker 5 W5W Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)* the glass envelope. High 65 H9 Low — — ∙ Use the same number and wattage as Daytime running/Park — — originally installed as shown in the Turn 28/8 7444NA Side marker 5 W5W chart. Front fog light* 19 H16 Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — — ∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog Map light* — — light for a long period of time as dust, Glove box light* — — Vanity mirror light — — moisture and smoke may enter the Footwell light 3.4 158 fog light body and affect the perfor- Step light 3.8 194 Personal light* — — mance of the fog light. Trunk light 3.4 158 High-mounted stop light* Inside (if so equipped) — — Spoiler (if so equipped) — — Rear combination light * Stop 21 W21W Turn signal 21 W21W Tail — — Side marker — — Backup (reversing) assembly* Backup 16 W16W Tail — — License plate light* 5 W5W Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information. * It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

8-24 Do-it-yourself 1. Map light 2. Personal light 3. Step light 4. Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped) 5. Headlight assembly 6. Fog light 7. High-mounted stop light 8. License plate light 9. Backup (reversing) assembly 10. Rear combination light

WDI0263 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover. Indicates bulb removal LDI3090 Indicates bulb installation Do-it-yourself 8-25 WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker LDI0341 LDI2135 should contact the electric medi- Step light Trunk light cal equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before Use a cloth ᭺1 to protect the housing. use. This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare 8-26 Do-it-yourself tire) on the display screen by send- "Cold Tire Pressure" heading. The If the tires are used at speeds above ing a signal from a sensor that is Tire and Loading Information label is 100 mph (162 km/h) where it is legal installed in each wheel. affixed to the driver side center pillar. to do so (on a race track for ex- Tire pressures should be checked ample), the cold tire inflation pres- The TPMS will activate only when the regularly because: sure must be increased. For addi- vehicle is driven at speeds above tional information, refer to “Checking 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system ∙ Most tires naturally lose air over tire pressure” in this section. may not detect a sudden drop in tire time. Set the tire pressure to the normal pressure (for example a flat tire while ∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when driving). cold tire inflation pressure when the driven over potholes or other ob- vehicle speed or load is reduced. For additional information, refer to jects or if the vehicle strikes a “Low tire pressure warning light” in curb while parking. the “Instruments and controls” sec- The tire pressures should be tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- checked when the tires are cold. The tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv- tires are considered COLD after the ing” section and “Flat tire” in the “In vehicle has been parked for 3 or case of emergency” section of this more hours, or driven less than 1 mile manual. (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. Tire inflation pressure The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert Check the tire pressures (including provides visual and audible signals the spare) often and always prior to outside the vehicle for inflating the long distance trips. The recom- tires to the recommended COLD tire mended tire pressure specifications pressure. For additional information, are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire certification label or the Tire and Alert” in the “Starting and driving” Loading Information label under the section of this manual. Do-it-yourself 8-27 Incorrect tire pressure, including ∙ Before taking a long trip, or under inflation, may adversely af- whenever you heavily load your fect tire life and vehicle handling. vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire WARNING pressures are at the specified ∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail level. suddenly and cause an ∙ Increase the cold tire inflation accident. pressure as indicated in "Check- ∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ing tire pressure" in this section (GVWR) is located on the when using the tires specified F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- by NISSAN above 100 mph tion label. The vehicle weight (162 km/h) where it is legal to do capacity is indicated on the Tire so (on a race track for example). and Loading Information label Failure to increase the cold tire (if so equipped). Do not load inflation pressure may result in your vehicle beyond this capac- tire failure, loss of control and ity. Overloading your vehicle possible injury. After such use, may result in reduced tire life, readjust tire pressure. unsafe operating conditions ∙ For additional information re- due to premature tire failure, or garding tires, refer to “Impor- unfavorable handling charac- tant Tire Safety Information” teristics and could also lead to a (US) or “Tire Safety Information” serious accident. Loading be- (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- yond the specified capacity mation Booklet. may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

8-28 Do-it-yourself ᭺5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in this section. ᭺6 Spare tire size.

LDI2000 Tire and Loading Information ᭺4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the label tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are consid- ᭺1 Seating capacity: The maximum ered COLD after the vehicle has number of occupants that can been parked for 3 or more hours, be seated in the vehicle. or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) ᭺2 Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve- at moderate speeds. The rec- hicle loading information” in the ommended cold tire inflation is “Technical and consumer infor- set by the manufacturer to pro- mation” section of this manual. vide the best balance of tire ᭺3 Original tire size: The size of the wear, vehicle handling, driveabil- tires originally installed on the ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi- vehicle at the factory. cle’s GVWR. Do-it-yourself 8-29 3. Remove the gauge. Size Cold Tire Infla- 4. Read the tire pressure on the tion Pressure gauge stem and compare to the Front and Rear specification shown on the Tire Original Tire: 33 PSI, 230 kPa and Loading Information label. 245/45R18 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If 245/40R19 too much air is added, press the Spare Tire: core of the valve stem briefly (Temporary) 60 PSI, 420 kPa with the tip of the gauge stem to T145/80D17 release pressure. Recheck the Full Size Spare pressure and add or release air Tire 33 PSI, 230 kPa LDI0393 as needed. 245/40R19 Checking tire pressure 6. Install the valve stem cap. 1. Remove the valve stem cap from 7. Check the pressure of all other the tire. tires, including the spare. 2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage. 8-30 Do-it-yourself WDI0394 WDI0395 Example Example TIRE LABELING ᭺1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 3. Two-digit number (65): This Federal law requires tire manufac- 95H) number, known as the aspect turers to place standardized infor- ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de- height to width. mation on the sidewall of all tires. signed for passenger vehicles This information identifies and de- (not all tires have this informa- 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. scribes the fundamental character- tion). 5. Two-digit number (15): This num- istics of the tire and also provides the ber is the wheel or rim diameter tire identification number (TIN) for 2. Three-digit number (215): This in inches. safety standard certification. The TIN number gives the width in milli- can be used to identify the tire in meters of the tire from sidewall case of a recall. edge to sidewall edge.

Do-it-yourself 8-31 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law. 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

LDI2786 Example ᭺2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 3. Two-digit code: Tire size. for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code XXX XXXX) (Optional). 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De- 5. Four numbers represent the partment Of Transportation”. week and year the tire was built. The symbol can be placed For example, the numbers 3103 above, below or to the left or means the 31st week of 2003. If right of the Tire Identification these numbers are missing then Number. look on the other sidewall of the 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s tire. identification mark.

8-32 Do-it-yourself ᭺3 Tire ply composition and material ᭺6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” TYPES OF TIRES The number of layers or plies of Indicates whether the tire requires WARNING rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire an inner tube (“tube type”) or not manufacturers also must indicate (“tubeless”). ∙ When changing or replacing tires, be the materials in the tire, which in- sure all four tires are of the same type ᭺7 The word “radial” (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth- construction. A NISSAN dealer may be ers. The word “radial” is shown if the tire able to help you with information ᭺4 Maximum permissible inflation has radial structure. about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. pressure ᭺8 Manufacturer or brand name ∙ Replacement tires may have a lower This number is the greatest amount Manufacturer or brand name is speed rating than the factory of air pressure that should be put in shown. equipped tires, and may not match the tire. Do not exceed the maximum the potential maximum vehicle Other Tire-related Terminology permissible inflation pressure. speed. Never exceed the maximum In addition to the many terms that speed rating of the tire. ᭺5 Maximum load rating are defined throughout this section, ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- This number indicates the maxi- Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the nally specified by NISSAN could affect mum load in kilograms and pounds sidewall that contains a whitewall, the proper operation of the low tire that can be carried by the tire. When bears white lettering or bears pressure warning system. replacing the tires on the vehicle, al- manufacturer, brand, and/or model ways use a tire that has the same name molding that is higher or load rating as the factory installed deeper than the same molding on tire. the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Do-it-yourself 8-33 ∙ Always use tires of the same type, Summer tires For additional traction on icy roads, stud- size, brand, construction and tread ded tires may be used. However, some U.S. NISSAN specifies summer tires on some states and Canadian provinces prohibit pattern on all four wheels. Failure to models to provide superior performance do so may result in a circumference their use. Check local, state and provincial on dry roads. Summer tire performance is laws before installing studded tires. Skid difference between tires on the front substantially reduced in snow and ice. and rear axles which can cause the and traction capabilities of studded snow Summer tires do not have the tire traction tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall. to malfunction resulting in personal than that of non-studded snow tires. injury or death, excessive tire wear If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy TIRE CHAINS and may damage the transmission or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the and differential gears. use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. CAUTION ∙ For additional information regarding Do not use tire chains/cables on this tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Snow tires vehicle. Doing so will cause damage to Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- the vehicle. mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In- If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to formation Booklet. select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do All season tires not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat- year, including snowy and icy road condi- ings than factory equipped tires and may tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL not match the potential maximum vehicle SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. speed. Never exceed the maximum speed Snow tires have better snow traction than rating of the tire. All Season tires and may be more appropri- If you install snow tires, they must be the ate in some areas. same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

8-34 Do-it-yourself Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING ∙ After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.

WDI0258 ∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when WDI0259 the vehicle has been driven for CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in Tire wear and damage Tire rotation cases of a flat tire, etc.). 1. Wear indicator ∙ Do not include the spare tire in 2. Location mark NISSAN recommends rotating the the tire rotation. tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km). ∙ For additional information re- WARNING For additional information on tire regarding tires, refer to “Impor- placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” tant Tire Safety Information” ∙ Tires should be periodically in- (US) or “Tire Safety Information” spected for wear, cracking, in the “In case of emergency” section bulging or objects caught in the of this manual. (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet. tread. If excessive wear, cracks, As soon as possible, tighten the bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced. wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Do-it-yourself 8-35 ing capacity as originally equipped. Rec- ∙ The original tires have built-in ∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea- tread wear indicators. When the ommended types and sizes are shown in son, always replace with wheels wear indicators are visible, the “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and con- which have the same off-set dimen- tire(s) should be replaced. sumer information” section of this manual. sion. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, de- ∙ Tires degrade with age and use. WARNING grade vehicle handling characteris- Have tires, including the spare, ∙ The use of tires other than those rec- tics, affect the VDC system and/or in- over 6 years old checked by a ommended or the mixed use of tires terference with the brake discs. Such qualified technician because of different brands, construction interference can lead to decreased some tire damage may not be (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread braking efficiency and/or early brake obvious. Replace the tires as patterns can adversely affect the ride, pad/shoe wear. For additional infor- necessary to prevent tire failure braking, handling, VDC system, mation on wheel-off set dimensions, and possible personal injury. ground clearance, body-to-tire clear- refer to “Wheels and tires” in the ance, tire chain clearance, speedom- “Technical and consumer informa- ∙ Improper service of the spare tion” section of this manual. tire may result in serious per- eter calibration, headlight aim and sonal injury. If it is necessary to bumper height. Some of these effects ∙ When replacing a wheel without the may lead to accidents and could re- TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS repair the spare tire, it is recom- sult in serious personal injury. mended that you visit a NISSAN will not function and the low tire pres- dealer for this service. ∙ If your vehicle was originally sure warning light will flash for ap- equipped with four tires that were the proximately one minute. The light will ∙ For additional information re- same size and you are only replacing remain on after one minute. Have garding tires, refer to “Impor- two of the four tires, install the new your tires replaced and/or TPMS sys- tant Tire Safety Information” tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires tem reset as soon as possible. It is rec- (US) or “Tire Safety Information” on the front axle may cause loss of ommended that you visit a NISSAN (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- vehicle control in some driving condi- dealer for this service. mation Booklet. tions and cause an accident and per- ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- sonal injury. nally specified by NISSAN could affect Replacing wheels and tires the proper operation of the TPMS. When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carry- 8-36 Do-it-yourself ∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if Wheel balance ∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road it is not handled correctly. Be careful wheels to protect against road salt in Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle areas where it is used during winter. when handling the TPMS sensor. handling and tire life. Even with regular use, ∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY ID registration may be required. Con- they should be balanced as required. spare tire) (if so equipped) tact a NISSAN dealer for ID registration. Wheel balance service should be per- When replacing a wheel without the TPMS formed with the wheels off the vehicle. such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not ∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle function. specified by NISSAN. The valve stem could lead to mechanical damage. cap may become stuck. Observe the following precautions if the ∙ For additional information regarding ∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- may be clogged up with dirt and damaged or involved in an accident: cause a malfunction or loss of formation” (Canada) in the Warranty pressure. Information Booklet. WARNING ∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed Care of wheels ∙ The spare tire should be used for wheel or tire even if it has been re- emergency use only. It should be re- ∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve- paired. Such wheels or tires could placed with the standard tire at the hicle to maintain their appearance. have structural damage and could fail first opportunity to avoid possible tire without warning. ∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when or differential damage. ∙ The use of retread tires is not the wheel is changed or the underside ∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY recommended. of the vehicle is washed. USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid ∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when sharp turns and abrupt braking while ∙ For additional information regarding driving. tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety washing the wheels. Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- ∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents ∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In- or corrosion. Such damage may cause pressure. Always keep the pressure of formation Booklet. loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire bead. at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Do-it-yourself 8-37 ∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare CAUTION tire installed do not drive the vehicle ∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO- at speeds faster than 50 mph RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains (80 km/h). will not fit properly and may cause ∙ When driving on roads covered with damage to the vehicle. snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY ONLY spare tire should be used on the spare tire is smaller than the original rear wheels and the original tire used tire, ground clearance is reduced. To on the front wheels (drive wheels). avoid damage to the vehicle, do not ∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster the vehicle through an automatic car rate than the standard tire. Replace wash since it may get caught. the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. ∙ Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles. ∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time. ∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

8-38 Do-it-yourself 9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements...... 9-2 Maintenance schedules ...... 9-7 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Additional maintenance items for Scheduled maintenance ...... 9-2 severe operating conditions ...... 9-7 Where to go for service ...... 9-2 Standard maintenance...... 9-8 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Emission control system maintenance ...... 9-8 Explanation of general maintenance Chassis & body maintenance...... 9-10 items...... 9-2 Maintenance under severe operating Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 conditions...... 9-12 Emission control system maintenance:...... 9-5 Severe driving conditions ...... 9-12 Chassis and body maintenance:...... 9-6 Maintenance log ...... 9-13 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular mainte- SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation of nance is essential to maintain your vehicle the vehicle, general maintenance should good mechanical condition, as well as its The maintenance items listed in this sec- be performed regularly as prescribed in emissions and engine performance. tion are required to be serviced at regular this section. If you detect any unusual intervals. However under severe driving sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure conditions, additional or more frequent check for the cause or have it checked that the scheduled maintenance, as well as maintenance will be required. general maintenance, is performed. promptly. In addition, it is recommended WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think As the vehicle owner, you are the only one that repairs are required. who can ensure that your vehicle receives If maintenance service is required or your proper maintenance. You are a vital link in vehicle appears to malfunction, have the When performing any checks or mainte- the maintenance chain. systems checked and serviced. It is recom- nance work, closely observe the “Mainte- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself” GENERAL MAINTENANCE this service. section of this manual. General maintenance includes those items NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe- EXPLANATION OF GENERAL which should be checked during normal cialists and are kept up-to-date with the day-to-day operation. They are essential latest service information through techni- MAINTENANCE ITEMS for proper vehicle operation. It is your re- cal bulletins, service tips and training pro- Additional information on the following sponsibility to perform these procedures grams. They are completely qualified to items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it- regularly as prescribed. work on NISSAN vehicles before work be- yourself” section of this manual. gins. Performing general maintenance checks Outside the vehicle requires minimal mechanical skill and only You can be confident that a NISSAN deal- a few general automotive tools. er’s service department can perform the The maintenance items listed here should These checks or inspections can be done service needed to meet the maintenance be performed from time to time, unless by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you requirements on your vehicle. otherwise specified. prefer, a NISSAN dealer. Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the 9-2 Maintenance and schedules secondary latch keeps the hood from Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve- pedal does not catch or require uneven opening when the primary latch is re- hicle should pull to either side while driving effort. Keep the floor mat away from the leased. on a straight and level road, or if you detect pedal. uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may When driving in areas using road salt or Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer- other corrosive materials, check lubrica- operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high- tion frequently. down further than normal, the pedal feels way speeds, wheel balancing may be spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular needed. to stop, have your vehicle checked imme- basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other For additional information regarding tires, diately. It is recommended that you visit a lights are all operating properly and in- refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the stalled securely. Also check headlight aim. (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in floor mat away from the pedal. the Warranty Information Booklet. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are Windshield: Clean the windshield on a the vehicle to one side when applied. regular basis. Check the windshield at least missing, and check for any loose wheel Continuously Variable Transmission every six months for cracks or other dam- nuts. Tighten if necessary. (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a age. Have a damaged windshield repaired Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev- fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held by a qualified repair facility. ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km). securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) Windshield wiper blades*: Check for position without applying any brakes. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Parking brake: Check the parking brake trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all Inside the vehicle operation regularly. The vehicle should be tires, including the spare, to the pressure securely held on a fairly steep hill with only specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts The maintenance items listed here should the parking brake applied. If the parking or excessive wear. be checked on a regular basis, such as brake needs adjustment, it is recom- when performing scheduled maintenance, mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) this service. transmitter components: Replace the cleaning the vehicle, etc. TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for Seats: Check seat position controls such and cap when the tires are replaced due to smooth operation and make sure the as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to wear or age. ensure they operate smoothly and all Maintenance and schedules 9-3 latches lock securely in every position. Under the hood and vehicle Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake Check that the head restraints/headrests fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines move up and down smoothly and the locks The maintenance items listed here should on the reservoir. (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched be checked periodically (for example, each Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant positions. time you check the engine oil or refuel). level when the engine is cold. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, The fluid should be at the bottom of the belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. adjusters and retractors) operate properly filler opening. Vehicles operated in high and smoothly, and are installed securely. temperatures or under severe conditions Engine oil level*: Check the level after Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, require frequent checks of the battery fluid parking the vehicle on a level spot and wear or damage. level. turning off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the Steering wheel: Check for changes in the NOTE: oil pan. steering system, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises. Care should be taken to avoid situations Exhaust system: Make sure there are no that can lead to potential battery dis- loose supports, cracks or holes. If the Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all charge and potential no-start conditions sound of the exhaust seems unusual or warning lights and chimes are operating such as: there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi- properly. 1. Installation or extended use of elec- ately have the exhaust system inspected. It Windshield defroster: Check that the air tronic accessories that consume bat- is recommended that you visit a NISSAN comes out of the defroster outlets properly tery power when the engine is not dealer for this service. For additional infor- and in sufficient quantity when operating running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon- the heater or air conditioner. players, etc.). oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or that the wipers and washer operate prop- only driven short distances. Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for erly and that the wipers do not streak. fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the In these cases, the battery may need to vehicle has been parked for a while. Water be charged to maintain battery health. dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if 9-4 Maintenance and schedules EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause The following descriptions are provided to NOTE: and have it corrected immediately. give you a better understanding of the NISSAN does not advocate the use of Power steering fluid level* and lines: scheduled maintenance items that should non-OEM approved aftermarket flush- Check the level when the fluid is cold, with be regularly checked or replaced. The ing systems and strongly advises the engine off. Check the lines for proper maintenance schedule indicates at which against performing these services on a attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. mileage/time intervals each item requires NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar- service. ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap- Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the proved chemicals or solvents, the use of radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, In addition to scheduled maintenance, which has not been validated by NISSAN. leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. your vehicle requires that some items be Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor- checked during normal day-to-day opera- For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, mation, rot or loose connections. tion. For additional information, refer to grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom- “General maintenance” in this section. mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- Underbody: The underbody is frequently ties” in the “Technical and consumer in- exposed to corrosive substances such as Items marked with “*” are recommended formation” section of this manual. those used on icy roads or to control dust. It by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. is very important to remove these sub- You are not required to perform mainte- EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM stances, otherwise rust may form on the nance on these items in order to maintain MAINTENANCE: floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the the warranties which come with your exhaust system. At the end of winter, the NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in- Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper underbody should be thoroughly flushed tervals are required. with plain water, being careful to clean tension. Replace any damaged drive belts. those areas where mud and dirt may accu- When applicable, additional information Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter- mulate. For additional information, refer to can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section vals. When driving for prolonged periods in the “Appearance and care” section of this of this manual. dusty conditions, check/replace the filter manual. more frequently. Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5 Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the CHASSIS AND BODY Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every specified interval. When adding or replac- MAINTENANCE: 5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in- ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine structions under “General maintenance” in NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for this section. When rotating tires, check for or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For proper installation. Check for chafing, damage and uneven wear. Replace if nec- additional information on the proper mix- cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. essary. ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling Replace any deteriorated or damaged Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of parts immediately. signs of leakage at specified intervals. this manual.) Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, the use of non-distilled water may reduce deteriorated or damaged parts immedi- replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles the recommended service interval of the ately. (96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect coolant. Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex- the fluid deterioration data using a CON- Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, SULT. If the deterioration data is more than and oil filter at the specified intervals. For cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten 210000, replace the CVT fluid. recommended oil grade and viscosity refer connections or replace parts as necessary. to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified capacities” in the “Technical and consumer intervals. When driving for prolonged peri- information” section of this manual. ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping more frequently. and connections for leaks, looseness, or Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus- deterioration. Tighten connections or re- pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check place parts as necessary. for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. or grease. Under severe driving conditions, Install new plugs of the same type as origi- inspect more frequently. nally equipped.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi- formed on vehicles that are driven under ∙ Driving in dusty conditions. cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte- especially demanding conditions. Addi- ∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread nance schedules that may be used, de- tional maintenance items should be per- roads. pending upon the conditions in which you formed if you primarily operate your vehicle usually drive. These schedules contain under the following conditions: ∙ Using a car-top carrier. both distance and time intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles NOTE: most people, the odometer reading will in- (8 km). For vehicles operated in Canada, both dicate when service is needed. However, if ∙ Repeated short trips of less than you drive very little, your vehicle should be standard and severe maintenance items 10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera- serviced at the regular time intervals should be performed at every interval. tures remaining below freezing. shown in the schedule. After 120,000 miles ∙ Operating in hot weather in stop- (192,000 km)/144 months, continue and-go “rush hour” traffic. maintenance at the same mileage/time ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv- intervals. ing for long distances, such as police, ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS taxi or door-to-door delivery use. FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be per-

Maintenance and schedules 9-7 STANDARD MAINTENANCE

The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R EVAP vapor lines I* I* I* Fuel lines I* I* I* Fuel filter See NOTE (3) Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5) Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

9-8 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192) Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I* Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R EVAP vapor lines I* I* I* Fuel lines I* I* I* Fuel filter See NOTE (3) Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5) Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

NOTE: (1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) Periodic maintenance is not required. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant. (6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage. (7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. Maintenance and schedules 9-9 CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 Brake lines & cables I I I I I I Brake pads & rotors૽ II I II I Brake fluid૽ RRR CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension III parts૽ Tire rotation See NOTE (2) Front drive shaft boots૽ II I II I Exhaust system૽ III In-cabin microfilter RRRR NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

9-10 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192) Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Brakelinesandcables IIIIII Brake pads and rotors૽ IIIIII Brake fluid૽ RRR CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension III parts૽ Tire rotation See NOTE (2) Front drive shaft boots૽ IIIIII Exhaust system૽ III In-cabin microfilter RRRR NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE: Maintenance items with “૽” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”. (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to perform this service. (2) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table. SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS ∙ Operating in hot weather in stop- ∙ Driving in dusty conditions. and-go “rush hour” traffic. ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles ∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread (8 km). ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv- roads. ing for long distance, such as police, taxi ∙ Using a car-top carrier. ∙ Repeated short trips of less than or door-to-door delivery use. 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

9-12 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE LOG

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24 25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30 30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42 40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48 45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13 50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60 55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66 60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78 70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84 75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96 85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102 90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules 95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114 100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126 Months 120 Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132 115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138 120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15 MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules 10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and Emission control information label ...... 10-11 capacities ...... 10-2 Tire and Loading Information label ...... 10-12 Fuel recommendation...... 10-3 Air conditioner specification label...... 10-12 Engine oil and oil filter Installing front license plate...... 10-12 recommendations ...... 10-6 Vehicle loading information ...... 10-13 Air conditioner system refrigerant and Terms ...... 10-13 oil recommendations ...... 10-7 Vehicle load capacity ...... 10-14 Specifications ...... 10-8 Engine ...... 10-8 Loading tips ...... 10-15 Wheels and tires...... 10-9 Measurement of weights ...... 10-16 Dimensions and weights ...... 10-9 Towing a trailer ...... 10-16 When traveling or registering in another Flat towing ...... 10-16 country...... 10-10 Uniform tire quality grading...... 10-17 Vehicle identification ...... 10-10 Emission control system warranty...... 10-18 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Reporting safety defects ...... 10-18 plate ...... 10-10 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Vehicle identification number test...... 10-19 (chassis number) ...... 10-10 Event Data Recorders (EDR)...... 10-20 Engine serial number...... 10-11 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-11 information ...... 10-20 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in Fuel 68 L 18 gal 15 gal this section. Engine oil*1 With oil filter • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended. 4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt Drain and refill change If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor *1: For additional information, refer oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional Without oil to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-yourself” 4.5 L 4-3/4 qt 4 qt information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in section of this manual. filter change this section. Engine coolant • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) 9.2 L 2-3/8 gal 2 gal with reservoir or equivalent • Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 • NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. • Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — — or equivalent will prevent the power steering system from operating properly. • Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent Brake fluid reservoir 0.49 L 1/8 gal 1/8 gal DOT 3 *2: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer. Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

10-2 Technical and consumer information Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure • HFC-134a (R-134a) Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section. • Genuine NISSAN A/C System oil ND-OIL8 or equivalent Air conditioning system oil — — — • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section. • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An- Windshield-washer fluid 4.2 L 1-1/8 gal 7/8 gal tifreeze fluid or equivalent

FUEL RECOMMENDATION ∙ Under no circumstances should a ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc- NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded leaded gasoline be used, because this tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl premium gasoline with an octane rating of will damage the three-way catalyst. manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more affect vehicle performance and ve- (Research octane number 96). If unleaded than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens- premium gasoline is not available, you may vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- containing more than 15% ethanol. use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- tent, so you may have to consult your Using a fuel containing more than 15% tane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Re- gasoline retailer for more details. ethanol in a vehicle not specifically search octane number 91), but you may Note that Federal and California laws designed for a fuel containing more notice a decrease in performance. prohibit the use of MMT in reformu- than 15% ethanol can adversely affect lated gasoline. CAUTION the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused ∙ U.S. government regulations require ∙ Using a fuel other than that specified by such fuel is not covered by the ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- could adversely affect the emission NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. tified by a small, square, orange and control system, and may also affect black label with the common abbre- the warranty coverage. viation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Technical and consumer information 10-3 Gasoline specifications If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, immediately change to a non-oxygenate please take the following precautions as fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. NISSAN recommends using gasoline that the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle Take care not to spill gasoline during re- meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) performance problems and/or fuel system fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates specifications where it is available. Many of damage. the automobile manufacturers developed can cause paint damage. ∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have this specification to improve emission con- E–15 fuel trol system and vehicle performance. Ask an octane rating no lower than that your service station manager if the gaso- recommended for unleaded gasoline. E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% line meets the WWFC specifications. ∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed Reformulated gasoline methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 15% oxygenate. to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula- Some fuel suppliers are now producing re- tions require fuel ethanol dispensing formulated gasolines. These gasolines are ∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should pumps to be identified with small, square, specially designed to reduce vehicle emis- contain no more than 5% methanol orange and black label with the common sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It abbreviation or the appropriate percent- cleaner air and suggests that you use re- should also contain a suitable age for that region. formulated gasoline when available. amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop- E–85 fuel Gasoline containing oxygenates erly formulated with appropriate co- E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% solvents and corrosion inhibitors, Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. such methanol blends may cause fuel E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl system damage and/or vehicle per- Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve- formance problems. At this time, suf- hicle. U.S. government regulations require or without advertising their presence. ficient data is not available to ensure NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- that all methanol blends are suitable tified by a small, square, orange and black fuels of which the oxygenate content and for use in NISSAN vehicles. the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can- label with the common abbreviation or the not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask If any driveability problems such as engine appropriate percentage for that region. your service station manager. stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe- rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, 10-4 Technical and consumer information Fuel containing MMT Octane rating tips However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga- Using unleaded gasoline with an octane accelerating or driving up hills. This is not nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad- rating lower than recommended can a cause for concern, because you get the ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” greatest fuel benefit when there is light use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping spark knock for a short time under heavy adversely affect vehicle performance, in- noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine engine load. cluding the emissions control system. Note damage. If you detect a persistent heavy that while some fuel pumps label MMT spark knock even when using gasoline content, not all do, so you may have to of the stated octane rating, or if you hear consult your gasoline retailer for more de- steady spark knock while holding a tails. steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer Aftermarket fuel additives correct the condition. Failure to correct NISSAN does not recommend the use of the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex- which NISSAN is not responsible. ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane Incorrect ignition timing may result in booster, intake valve deposit removers, spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of which may cause excessive fuel consump- these additives intended for gum, varnish tion or engine damage. If any of the above or deposit removal may contain active sol- symptoms are encountered, have your ve- vents or similar ingredients that can be hicle checked. It is recommended that you harmful to the fuel system and engine. visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Technical and consumer information 10-5 Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil LTI2051 viscosity based on the temperatures at ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER Select only engine oils that meet the which the vehicle will be operated before RECOMMENDATIONS American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi- the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos- cation or International Lubricant Standard- ity other than that recommended could Selecting the correct oil ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) cause serious engine damage. certification and SAE viscosity standard. It is essential to choose the correct grade, These oils have the API certification mark Selecting the correct oil filter quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure on the front of the container. Oils which do Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a satisfactory engine life and performance. not have the specified quality label should For additional information, refer to “Recom- high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When not be used as they could cause engine replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” damage. in this section. NISSAN recommends the its equivalent for the reason described in use of an energy conserving oil in order to “Change intervals.” improve fuel economy.

10-6 Technical and consumer information Change intervals For additional information, refer to the cians and equipment needed to recover “Maintenance and schedules” section of and recycle your air conditioner system re- The oil and oil filter change intervals for this manual. frigerant. your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using en- AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN gine oil and filters that are not of the speci- dealer when servicing your air conditioner REFRIGERANT AND OIL system. fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil RECOMMENDATIONS and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused The air conditioner system in your by improper maintenance or use of incor- NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and Genu- not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle ine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type ND-OIL8 Limited Warranty. or the exact equivalents.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality CAUTION engine oil when it was built.You do not have to change the oil before the first recom- The use of any other refrigerant or oil mended change interval. Oil and filter may cause severe damage to the air change intervals depend upon how you conditioning system and may require use your vehicle. the replacement of all air conditioner system components. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your changes: NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does ∙ repeated short distance driving at cold not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain outside temperatures government regulations require the recov- ∙ driving in dusty conditions ery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. ∙ extensive idling A NISSAN dealer has the trained techni- ∙ stop and go commuting Technical and consumer information 10-7 SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model VQ35DE Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60° Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4) Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498) Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6 Idle speed CVT in N (Neutral) position No adjustment is necessary. Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO%atidle Spark plug FXE22HR11 Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) Camshaft operation Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

10-8 Technical and consumer information WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheels Size Offset in (mm) Overall length in (mm) 192.8 (4,897) Overall width in (mm) 73.2 (1,860) Aluminum 18 x 8.5J 1.97 (50) Overall height in (mm) 56.5 (1,436) Aluminum 19 x 8.5J 1.97 (50) Front Track in (mm) 62.4 (1,585) Rear Track in (mm) 62.4 (1,585) Spare wheel- steel 17 x 4T 1.18 (30) Wheelbase in (mm) 109.3 (2,775) Spare wheel- alu- 19x8.5J 1.97(50) Gross vehicle weight rat- lbs. (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C. minium ing M.V.S.S. certification label” Gross axle weight rating on the center pillar be- Tires Front lbs. (kg) tween the driver’s side Rear lbs. (kg) front and rear doors. 245/45R18 245/40R19 Spare tires T145/80D17 245/40/R19

Technical and consumer information 10-9 WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws WTI0171 LTI0070 and regulations. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The laws and regulations for motor vehicle (VIN) PLATE (chassis number) emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, prov- The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The vehicle identification number is lo- ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica- plate is attached as shown. This number is cated as shown. tions may differ. the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

10-10 Technical and consumer information LTI2133 WTI0172 WTI0188 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION EMISSION CONTROL The number is stamped on the engine as LABEL INFORMATION LABEL shown. The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle The emission control information label is Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi- attached to the underside of the hood as cation label is affixed as shown. This label shown. contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

Technical and consumer information 10-11 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

WTI0174 WTI0178 LTI2314 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION To mount the front license plate, attach the LABEL LABEL license plate bracket to the bumper fascia at the location marks (small dimples) using The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire The air conditioner specification label is af- the two provided screws ᭺A . and Loading Information label. The label is fixed to the underside of the hood as located as shown. shown.

10-12 Technical and consumer information VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING ∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb ∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load weight plus the combined weight limit, Total load capacity - maxi- ∙ It is extremely dangerous to of passengers and cargo. mum total weight limit specified ride in a cargo area inside a ve- of the load (passengers and hicle. In a collision, people riding ∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- cargo) for the vehicle. This is the in these areas are more likely to ing) - maximum total combined be seriously injured or killed. maximum combined weight of weight of the unloaded vehicle, occupants and cargo that can be ∙ Do not allow people to ride in passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer loaded into the vehicle. If the ve- any area of your vehicle that is tongue load and any other op- hicle is used to tow a trailer, the not equipped with seats and tional equipment. This informa- seat belts. trailer tongue weight must be in- tion is located on the cluded as part of the cargo load. ∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification This information is located on the is in a seat and using a seat belt label. Tire and Loading Information la- properly. ∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - bel. TERMS maximum weight (load) limit ∙ Cargo capacity - permissible It is important to familiarize yourself specified for the front or rear axle. weight of cargo, the subtracted with the following terms before This information is located on the weight of occupants from the loading your vehicle: F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification load limit. label. ∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight in- ∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight cluding: standard and optional rating) - The maximum total equipment, fluids, emergency weight rating of the vehicle, pas- tools, and spare tire assembly. sengers, cargo, and trailer. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.

Technical and consumer information 10-13 VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as “Seating Ca- pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation label. To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

WTI0169 Example 10-14 Technical and consumer information Steps for determining correct 5. Determine the combined weight WARNING load limit of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That ∙ Properly secure all cargo with 1. Locate the statement “The com- ropes or straps to help prevent weight may not safely exceed the bined weight of occupants and it from sliding or shifting. Do not available cargo and luggage load cargo should never exceed XXX place cargo higher than the capacity calculated in step 4. lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could Tire and Loading Information la- Before driving a loaded vehicle, con- cause personal injury. bel. firm that you do not exceed the ∙ Do not load your vehicle any Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 2. Determine the combined weight heavier than the GVWR or the or the Gross Axle Weight Rating of the driver and passengers maximum front and rear that will be riding in your vehicle. (GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi- GAWRs. If you do, parts of your tional information, refer to “Measure- vehicle can break, tire damage 3. Subtract the combined weight ment of weights” in this section. could occur, or it can change the of the driver and passengers way your vehicle handles. This from XXX lbs. or XXX kg. Also check tires for proper inflation could result in loss of control pressures. For additional informa- and cause personal injury. 4. The resulting figure equals the tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor- ∙ Overloading not only can available amount of cargo and mation label” in this section. shorten the life of your vehicle luggage load capacity. For ex- and the tire, but can also cause ample, if the XXX amount equals LOADING TIPS unsafe vehicle handling and 1,400 lbs. and there will be five ∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR or longer braking distances. This 150 lbs. passengers in your ve- may cause a premature tire fail- GAWR as specified on the hicle, the amount of available ure which could result in a seri- F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. cargo and luggage load capac- ous accident and personal in- ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = ∙ Do not load the front and rear jury. Failures caused by 650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = axle to the GAWR. Doing so will overloading are not covered by 300 kg.) exceed the GVWR. the vehicle’s warranty. Technical and consumer information 10-15 TOWING A TRAILER

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS ∙ For emergency towing procedures re- Secure loose items to prevent FLAT TOWING fer to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” weight shifts that could affect the Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on section of this manual. balance of your vehicle. When the ve- the ground is sometimes called flat towing. hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and This method is sometimes used when Continuously Variable weigh the front and the rear wheels towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve- Transmission separately to determine axle loads. hicle, such as a motor home. To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu- Individual axle loads should not ex- ously variable transmission, an appropriate ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight CAUTION vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle ∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow loads should not exceed the Gross result in severe transmission damage. the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product. Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These ∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al- ratings are given on the vehicle cer- ways tow forward, never backward. tification label. If weight ratings are ∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve- exceeded, move or remove items to hicle with the front tires on the bring all weights below the ratings. ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain. ∙ DO NOT tow any continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

10-16 Technical and consumer information UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual- ment as measured under controlled WARNING ity Grades: All passenger car tires must conditions on specified government test conform to federal safety requirements in surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire The temperature grade for this tire is addition to these grades. marked C may have poor traction perfor- established for a tire that is properly in- mance. flated and not overloaded. Excessive Quality grades can be found where appli- speed, under-inflation, or excessive cable on the tire sidewall between tread WARNING loading, either separately or in combi- shoulder and maximum section width. For nation, can cause heat build-up and example: The traction grade assigned to this tire possible tire failure. is based on straight-ahead braking Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature traction tests, and does not include ac- A celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or Treadwear peak traction characteristics. The treadwear grade is a comparative rat- Temperature A, B and C ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a The temperature grades are A (the high- specified government test course. For ex- est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one tance to the generation of heat, and its and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the ability to dissipate heat when tested under government course as a tire graded 100. controlled conditions on a specified indoor The relative performance of tires depends laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- upon the actual conditions of their use, perature can cause the material of the tire however, and may depart significantly from to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- the norm due to variations in driving habits, cessive temperature can lead to sudden service practices and differences in road tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a characteristics and climate. level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Mo- Traction AA, A, B and C tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A The traction grades, from highest to low- represent higher levels of performance on est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre- the laboratory test wheel than the mini- sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave- mum required by law. Technical and consumer information 10-17 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS WARRANTY

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol- For Canada For USA lowing emission warranties: Emission Control System Warranty If you believe that your vehicle has a For USA Details of this warranty may be found with defect which could cause a crash or 1. Emission Defects Warranty other vehicle warranties in your Warranty could cause injury or death, you Information Booklet which comes with 2. Emissions Performance Warranty should immediately inform the Na- your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Details of this warranty may be found with Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- other vehicle warranties in your Warranty you may obtain a replacement by writing istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- Information Booklet which comes with to: fying NISSAN. your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a ∙ Nissan Canada Inc. Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, If NHTSA receives similar complaints, 5290 Orbitor Drive you may obtain a replacement by writing it may open an investigation, and if it Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5 to: finds that a safety defect exists in a ∙ Nissan North America, Inc. group of vehicles, it may order a re- Consumer Affairs Department call and remedy campaign. However, P.O. Box 685003 NHTSA cannot become involved in Franklin, TN 37068-5003 individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 10-18 Technical and consumer information READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

You may notify NISSAN by contact- fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speak- Due to legal requirements in some states ing our Consumer Affairs Depart- ers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/ and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/ be required to be in what is called the ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. “ready condition” for an fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speak- For Canada Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the ers) emission control system. If you believe that your vehicle has a Additional information concerning The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” defect which could cause a crash or motor vehicle safety may be obtained when it is driven through certain driving could cause injury or death, you from Transport Canada’s Road Safety patterns. Usually, the ready condition can should immediately inform Trans- Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve- port Canada in addition to notifying or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety hicle. NISSAN. (English speakers) or If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the If Transport Canada receives com- www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speakers). vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi- plaints, it may open an investigation, tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the and if it finds that a safety defect To notify NISSAN of any safety con- vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test exists in a group of vehicles, it may cerns please contact our Consumer readiness condition. Place the ignition request that NISSAN conduct a recall Information Centre toll free at 1-800- switch in the ON position without starting campaign. However, Transport the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator 387-0122. Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds Canada cannot become involved in and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test individual problems between you, condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not your dealer, or NISSAN. blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. It is recommended that you You may contact Transport Canada’s visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con- Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi- dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing. sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/ Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/ Technical and consumer information 10-19 EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

This vehicle is equipped with an EDR. The are recorded. However, other parties, such Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this main purpose of an EDR is to record, in as law enforcement, could combine the model year and prior can be purchased. A certain collision or near collision-like situa- EDR data with the type of personally iden- Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best tions, such as an air bag deployment or tifying data routinely acquired during a col- source of service and repair information for hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist lision investigation. your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians in understanding how a vehicle’s systems To read data recorded by an EDR, special working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine performed. The EDR is designed to record equipment is required and access to the NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur- data related to vehicle dynamics and vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to chased. safety systems for a short period of time, the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this dealer, other parties, such as law enforce- For USA vehicle is designed to record such data as: ment, that have the special equipment, can For current pricing and availability of Genu- read the information if they have access to ∙ How various systems in your vehicle ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact: were operating; the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle www.nissan-techinfo.com ∙ Whether or not the driver and passen- owner or lessee or as otherwise required or ger safety belts were buckled/fastened; permitted by law. For current pricing and availability of Genu- ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact: ∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; 1-800-247-5321 and, For Canada ∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling. To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN ∙ Sounds are not recorded. Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model year and prior, please visit the near- These data can help provide a better un- est NISSAN dealer. For the phone number derstanding of the circumstances in which and location of a NISSAN dealer in your collisions and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR area, call the NISSAN Information Center at data are recorded by your vehicle only if a 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep- nontrivial collision situation occurs; no data resentative will assist you. are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and collision location) 10-20 Technical and consumer information 11 Index

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-82 Brakesystem...... 5-82 A Armrests...... 1-6 Brakewarninglight...... 2-9 Audible reminders ...... 2-16 Brakewearindicators...... 2-16,8-17 Active noise cancellation Autolightswitch...... 2-46 Parking brake operation ...... 5-22 Active sound enhancement ...... 5-94 Automatic Self-adjustingbrakes...... 8-17 Air bag (See supplemental restraint Automatic drive Brakefluid...... 8-10 system) ...... 1-42 positioner ...... 3-31,3-32,3-33,3-34 Brakes...... 8-17 Air bag system Automatic power window switch. . .2-62 Brakesystem...... 5-82 Front (See supplemental front impact air Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ....3-29 Break-in schedule ...... 5-77 bagsystem)...... 1-49 Automatic door locks ...... 3-6 Brightness control Airbagwarninglight...... 1-60, 2-13 Automatic drive Instrument panel...... 2-48 Air bag warning light, positioner ...... 3-31,3-32,3-33,3-34 Bulb check/instrument panel...... 2-8 supplemental ...... 1-60, 2-13 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . .2-9 Bulb replacement ...... 8-24 Air cleaner ...... 8-15 Air cleaner housing filter ...... 8-15 Air conditioner B C Air conditioner operation ...... 4-30 Air conditioner specification label . .10-12 Battery...... 5-92,8-12 Capacities and recommended fuel/ Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil Charge warning light...... 2-10 lubricants...... 10-2 recommendations ...... 10-2,10-7 Battery replacement...... 8-21 Cargo Air conditioner system refrigerant Keyfob...... 8-21 (See vehicle loading information).....10-13 recommendations ...... 10-2,10-7 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 8-21 Car phone or CB radio...... 4-34 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) Before starting the engine ...... 5-14 Check tire pressure ...... 2-28 (if so equipped) ...... 4-29 Belt(Seedrivebelt)...... 8-14 Childrestraints...... 1-19, 1-19, 1-21, 1-24 Heater and air conditioner Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for controls...... 4-30 system ...... 5-23 CHildren)System...... 1-24 Servicing air conditioner ...... 4-33 Booster seats ...... 1-39 Precautions on child Alarm system Brake restraints...... 1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39 (See vehicle security system) ...... 2-39 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....5-82 Top tether strap anchor point Anchor point locations ...... 1-26 Brake assist (for Intelligent cruise locations...... 1-26 Antenna ...... 4-33 controlsystem)...... 5-83 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-6 Antifreeze ...... 5-92 Brakefluid...... 8-10 Chimes, audible reminders ...... 2-16 Anti-lock brake warning light ...... 2-9 Brakelight(Seestoplight)...... 8-24 Cleaningexteriorandinterior.....7-2,7-4 Climatecontrolseatswitch...... 2-50 Display...... 2-16 Engine oil ...... 8-6 C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-11 Door locks ...... 3-4,3-5 Engine oil and oil filter Coldweatherdriving...... 5-92 Drivebelt...... 8-14 recommendation ...... 10-2,10-6 Console box ...... 2-57 Drive Mode Selector...... 5-23 Engine oil pressure warning light. . . .2-10 Console light ...... 2-67 Drive positioner, Engine oil viscosity...... 10-6 Continuously Variable Transmission Automatic...... 3-31,3-32,3-33,3-34 Engine serial number...... 10-11 (CVT) ...... 5-16 Drive Sport Mode Selector...... 5-23 Engine specifications ...... 10-8 Continuously Variable Transmission Driving Starting the engine ...... 5-15 (CVT) fluid...... 8-9 Cold weather driving ...... 5-92 Engine Block Heater ...... 5-93 Driving with Continuously Variable Driving with Continuously Variable Engine coolant temperature gauge ....2-6 Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-16 Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-16 EventDatarecorders...... 10-20 Transmission shift selector lock Precautions when starting and Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)...... 5-4 release...... 5-20 driving...... 5-4 Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2 Control Panel and Vehicle Information Drivingthevehicle...... 5-16 Explanation of scheduled maintenance DisplayInteraction...... 2-32 items...... 9-5 Controls Extended storage switch ...... 2-54 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-30 E Eyeglasscase...... 2-58 Coolant Capacities and recommended E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH ...... 2-53 fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Economy - fuel ...... 5-79 F Changing engine coolant ...... 8-5 Emergency engine shutoff ...... 5-13,6-2 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 Emission control information label . . . .10-11 Flashers Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-18 (Seehazardwarningflasherswitch)....6-2 Corrosionprotection...... 7-8 Engine Flattire...... 6-3 Cruisecontrol...... 5-41 Before starting the engine ...... 5-14 Floormatpositioningaid...... 7-6 Cupholders...... 2-58 Capacities and recommended Fluid fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Brakefluid...... 8-10 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-5 Capacities and recommended D Changing engine oil ...... 8-7 fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-8 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Daytime Running Light System...... 2-47 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 fluid...... 8-9 Defroster switch Checking engine oil level ...... 8-6 Engine coolant ...... 8-4 Rear window and outside mirror Engine compartment check Engine oil ...... 8-6 defrosterswitch...... 2-45 locations...... 8-3 Powersteeringfluid...... 8-10 Dimensions and weights...... 10-9 Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-11 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-48 Engine cooling system ...... 8-4 F.M.V.S.S. certification label...... 10-11 11-2 Foglightswitch...... 2-49 Trip odometer ...... 2-4,2-5 Indicator Foldingrearseat...... 1-5 General maintenance ...... 9-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge Front air bag system Glovebox...... 2-57 indicator...... 5-13 (See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-49 Gloveboxlock...... 2-57 Indicator lights and audible reminders Front and rear sonar system ...... 5-88 (See warning/indicator lights and audible Front-door pocket...... 2-55 reminders) ...... 2-8,2-13 Front power seat adjustment...... 1-3 H Informationdisplay...... 2-16 Frontseats...... 1-2 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror.....3-29 Instrument brightness control ...... 2-48 Fuel Hazard warning flasher switch...... 6-2 Instrument panel ...... 0-6,2-2 Capacities and recommended Headlight and turn signal switch...... 2-45 Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-48 fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Headlightcontrolswitch...... 2-45 Integrated Dynamics-control Module . . .5-87 Fuel economy ...... 5-79 Headlights...... 8-23 Intelligent Around View Monitor ...... 4-11 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-24 Headrestraints...... 1-7 Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system Fuel-filler lid ...... 3-24 Heatedseats...... 2-51 Brakeassist...... 5-43 Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 Heated seat switches ...... 2-51 Intelligent Drive Alertness (I-DA) ...... 5-75 Fueloctanerating...... 10-5 Heated steering wheel switch ...... 2-52 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning Fuel recommendation ...... 10-2,10-3 Heater (I-FCW)...... 5-65 Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-32 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) Intelligent Key system Fuelefficientdrivingtips...... 5-78 (if so equipped) ...... 4-29 Key operating range ...... 3-8 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-24 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-30 Key operation ...... 3-9 Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 Heater operation...... 4-31 Mechanical key ...... 3-3 Fuses ...... 8-18 Heater and air conditioner (automatic). .4-29 Remote keyless entry operation ....3-13 Fusiblelinks...... 8-19 HomeLink® Universal Troubleshooting guide ...... 3-16 Transceiver . . .2-68, 2-69, 2-70, 2-71, 2-71, 2-72 Warning signals ...... 3-16 Hood ...... 3-22 Interiorlight...... 2-66 G Horn...... 2-49 Interiortrunklidrelease...... 3-23 Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal ISOFIX child restraints...... 1-24 Transceiver . . .2-68, 2-69, 2-70, 2-71, 2-71, 2-72 I Gascap...... 3-24 J Gauge Ignition Switch Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-11 Jumpstarting...... 6-8,8-14 Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 Immobilizer system ...... 2-41,5-14 Odometer ...... 2-5 Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11 Speedometer...... 2-4,2-5 In-cabinmicrofilter...... 8-16 Tachometer ...... 2-6 Increasing fuel economy...... 5-79 11-3 Console light ...... 2-67 K ExteriorandInteriorlights...... 8-24 M Foglights...... 8-23 Key...... 3-2 Foglightswitch...... 2-49 Maintenance Key fob battery replacement ...... 8-21 Headlight and turn signal switch....2-45 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Keyless entry Headlightcontrolswitch...... 2-45 Insidethevehicle...... 9-3 With Intelligent Key system Headlights...... 8-23 Maintenance precautions...... 8-2 (See Intelligent Key system) ...... 3-13 Interiorlight...... 2-66 Outsidethevehicle...... 9-2 Keys Lightbulbs...... 8-23 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-18 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-2,3-6 Low tire pressure warning light .....2-10 Under the hood and vehicle ...... 9-4 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Low windshield-washer fluid warning Maintenance log ...... 9-13 keys...... 3-3 light...... 2-28 Maintenance requirements...... 9-2 Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51 Maintenance schedules ...... 9-7 Maintenance under severe operation L Personal lights ...... 2-67 Security indicator light ...... 2-15 conditions...... 9-12 Malfunctionindicatorlight...... 2-14 Labels Spotlights(Seemaplight)...... 2-67 Trunklight...... 2-68 Maplights...... 2-67 Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12 Memory Seat ...... 3-31,3-32,3-33,3-34 C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-11 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ...... 2-8,2-13 Meters and gauges...... 2-4 Emission control information label . .10-11 Instrument brightness control .....2-48 Engine serial number...... 10-11 Lights...... 8-23 Maplights...... 2-67 Mirror F.M.V.S.S. certification label...... 10-11 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . .3-29 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12 Lock Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-6 Outsidemirrorcontrol...... 3-30 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10 Outsidemirrors...... 3-30 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Door locks ...... 3-4,3-5 Gloveboxlock...... 2-57 Vanitymirror...... 3-29 plate...... 10-10 Mirrors...... 3-29 Warning labels (for SRS)...... 1-59 Power door locks ...... 3-5 Trunk lid lock opener lever...... 3-23 Moonroof ...... 2-63 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Moving Object Detection (MOD) ...... 4-23 CHildren)System...... 1-24 Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-32 License plate Lowfuelwarninglight...... 2-12,2-28 Low tire pressure warning light ...... 2-10 Installing the license plate ...... 10-12 N Light Low windshield-washer fluid warning light...... 2-28 Airbagwarninglight...... 1-60, 2-13 NissanConnect® Owner's Manual ...... 4-2 Luggage Brakelight(Seestoplight)...... 8-24 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-2,3-6 Bulb check/instrument panel ...... 2-8 (See vehicle loading information) .....10-13 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge Bulb replacement ...... 8-24 indicator...... 5-13 Charge warning light ...... 2-10 11-4 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Power Rear sun shade ...... 2-65 System...... 2-41,5-14 Power door locks ...... 3-5 RearViewMonitor...... 4-3 Poweroutlet...... 2-54 Rear window and outside mirror defroster Powerrearwindows...... 2-61 switch...... 2-45 O Powersteeringfluid...... 8-10 Recommended Fluids ...... 10-2 Power steering system ...... 5-81 Recorders Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-5 Powerwindows...... 2-60 EventData...... 10-20 Odometer ...... 2-5 Rearpowerwindows...... 2-61 Refrigerant recommendation.....10-2,10-7 Oil Poweroutlet...... 2-54 Registering a vehicle in another Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Powersteering...... 5-81 country ...... 10-10 Changing engine oil ...... 8-7 Powersteeringfluid...... 8-10 Remote Engine Start ...... 5-15 Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-8 Precautions Remote Start ...... 3-19 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-6 Maintenance precautions...... 8-2 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-18 Engine oil ...... 8-6 Precautions on booster Engine oil and oil filter seats...... 1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39 S recommendation ...... 10-2,10-6 Precautions on child Engine oil viscosity...... 10-6 restraints...... 1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39 Safety Outsidemirrorcontrol...... 3-30 Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-11 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-6 Outsidemirrors...... 3-30 Precautions on supplemental restraint Childseatbelts...... 1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39 Overhead sunglasses holder ...... 2-58 system ...... 1-42 Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-18 Overheat Precautions when starting and Seat adjustment Ifyourvehicleoverheats...... 6-10 driving...... 5-4 Front power seat adjustment...... 1-3 Owner's manual order form ...... 10-20 Push starting ...... 6-10 Seatback pockets ...... 2-56 Owner's manual/service manual order Seat belt information...... 10-20 R Childsafety...... 1-19 Infants and small children ...... 1-19 P Radio InjuredPerson...... 1-14 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-34 Largerchildren...... 1-20 Parking Rain-sensing auto wiper system...... 2-44 Precautionsonseatbeltusage.....1-11 Parking brake operation ...... 5-22 Readiness for inspection maintenance Pregnant women...... 1-14 Parking/parkingonhills...... 5-80 (I/M) test ...... 10-19 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-18 Parkingbrake...... 5-22 RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA)...... 5-33 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-18 Personal lights ...... 2-67 Rear power sunshade ...... 2-65 Seatbelts...... 1-11, 7-7 Rearpowerwindows...... 2-61 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-17 Rearseat...... 1-5 Three-pointtypewithretractor.....1-14 11-5 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-18 Push starting ...... 6-10 T Seatbeltwarninglight...... 1-14, 2-13 Starting the engine ...... 5-15 Seats Starting the engine ...... 5-15 Tachometer ...... 2-6 Adjustment ...... 1-2 Steering Temperature gauge Armrests...... 1-6 Powersteeringfluid...... 8-10 Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Automatic drive Powersteeringsystem...... 5-81 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), positioner ...... 3-31,3-32,3-33,3-34 Steering wheel ...... 3-26 engine start...... 2-41,5-14 Frontseats...... 1-2 Stoplight...... 8-24 Three-waycatalyst...... 5-4 Heatedseats...... 2-51 Storage...... 2-55 Tire Rearseat...... 1-5 Storagetray...... 2-56 Flattire...... 6-3 Security indicator light ...... 2-15 Sunglasses case...... 2-58 Spare tire...... 6-4,8-37 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sunglasses holder ...... 2-58 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12 System), engine start ...... 2-41,5-14 Sunroof ...... 2-63 Tire chains ...... 8-34 Security systems Sunvisors...... 3-28 Tire pressure ...... 8-26 Vehicle security system ...... 2-39 Supplemental air bag warning Tirerotation...... 8-35 Self-adjustingbrakes...... 8-17 light...... 1-60, 2-13 Types of tires ...... 8-33 Service manual order form...... 10-20 Supplemental front impact air bag Uniform tire quality grading...... 10-17 Servicing air conditioner ...... 4-33 system ...... 1-49 Wheels and tires ...... 8-26 Shifting Supplemental restraint system Wheel/tire size ...... 10-9 Continuously Variable Transmission Information and warning labels . . . .1-59 Tire pressure (CVT) ...... 5-18 Precautions on supplemental restraint Low tire pressure warning light .....2-10 Shoulder belt height adjustment ...... 1-17 system ...... 1-42 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). .5-5 Spark plug replacement ...... 8-15 Supplemental restraint system Towing Spark plugs ...... 8-15 (Supplemental air bag system) ...... 1-42 4-wheel drive models ...... 6-12 Specifications ...... 10-8 Switch Flattowing...... 10-16 Speedometer...... 2-4,2-5 Autolightswitch...... 2-46 Trailertowing...... 10-16 Speedometer and odometer ...... 2-4 Automatic power window switch . . .2-62 Towingatrailer...... 10-16 Spotlights(Seemaplight)...... 2-67 Foglightswitch...... 2-49 Towingyourvehicle...... 6-11 SRS warning label ...... 1-59 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 6-2 Transceiver Stability control ...... 5-84 Headlight and turn signal switch....2-45 HomeLink® Universal Standard maintenance ...... 9-8 Headlightcontrolswitch...... 2-45 Transceiver. .2-68, 2-69, 2-70, 2-71, 2-71, 2-72 Starting Instrument brightness control .....2-48 Transmission Before starting the engine ...... 5-14 Power door lock switch ...... 3-5 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Jumpstarting...... 6-8,8-14 Rear window and outside mirror fluid...... 8-9 Precautions when starting and defrosterswitch...... 2-45 driving ...... 5-4 Turn signal switch ...... 2-48 11-6 Driving with Continuously Variable Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Warninglights...... 2-8, 2-13 Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-16 Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-41, 5-14 Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another Vents...... 4-27 Wheels and tires ...... 8-26 country)...... 10-10 Visors...... 3-28 Wheel/tire size ...... 10-9 Trip odometer ...... 2-4,2-5 When traveling or registering in another Trunk access through the rear seat. .1-5, 3-23 country ...... 10-10 Trunk lid lock opener lever...... 3-23 W Windows...... 2-60 Trunklight...... 2-68 Locking passengers' windows .....2-61 Powerrearwindows...... 2-61 Turn signal switch ...... 2-48 Warning Airbagwarninglight...... 1-60, 2-13 Powerwindows...... 2-60 Anti-lock brake warning light ...... 2-9 Rearpowerwindows...... 2-61 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-11 U Battery charge warning light ...... 2-10 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-16 Wiper Uniform tire quality grading...... 10-17 light...... 5-23 Wiper blades ...... 8-16 USB/iPod® Charging Ports...... 4-33 Brakewarninglight...... 2-9 Engine oil pressure warning light....2-10 Wiper and washer switch ...... 2-42 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 6-2 V Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-32 Lowfuelwarninglight...... 2-12,2-28 Vanitymirror...... 3-29 Lowtirepressurewarninglight.....2-10 Vehicle dimensions and weights ...... 10-9 Low windshield-washer fluid warning Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF light...... 2-28 switch...... 2-53 Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-84 Seatbeltwarninglight...... 1-14, 2-13 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. .5-84 Supplemental air bag warning Vehicle identification ...... 10-10 light...... 1-60, 2-13 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10 TPMS...... 2-4 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Vehicle security system ...... 2-39 (Chassis number) ...... 10-10 Warning/indicator lights and audible Vehicle identification number (VIN) reminders ...... 2-8,2-13 plate...... 10-10 Warning labels (for SRS)...... 1-59 Vehicle immobilizer system ...... 2-41,5-14 Warning/indicator lights and audible VehicleInformationDisplay...... 2-16 reminders ...... 2-8,2-13 Vehicle loading information ...... 10-13 Audible reminders ...... 2-8,2-13 Vehiclerecovery...... 6-12 Indicatorlights...... 2-8,2-13 Vehicle security system ...... 2-39 Warninglights...... 2-8,2-13 11-7 GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION: the emission control devices and sys- ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded tems of the vehicle. Damage caused • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” premium gasoline with an octane rating of by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to “Engine at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number oil and oil filter recommendations” in the (Research octane number 96). If unleaded ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc- “Technical and consumer information” sec- premium gasoline is not available, you may tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl tion of this manual. use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using tane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Re- fuel containing MMT may adversely COLD TIRE PRESSURE: affect vehicle performance and ve- search octane number 91), but you may Refer to the Tire and Loading Information notice a decrease in performance. hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens- ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- label. CAUTION tent, so you may have to consult your The label is typically located on the driver gasoline retailer for more details. side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For ∙ Using a fuel other than that specified Note that Federal and California laws additional information, refer to “Wheels and could adversely affect the emission prohibit the use of MMT in reformu- tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this control system, and may also affect lated gasoline. manual. the warranty coverage. ∙ U.S. government regulations require RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE ∙ Under no circumstances should a ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- leaded gasoline be used, because this tified by a small, square, orange and BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: will damage the three-way catalyst. black label with the common abbre- During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more viation or the appropriate percentage vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your for that region. recommendations for the future reliability vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel For additional information, refer to “Recom- and economy of your new vehicle. For ad- containing more than 15% ethanol. mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” ditional information, refer to “Break-in Using a fuel containing more than 15% in the “Technical and consumer informa- schedule” in the “Starting and driving” sec- ethanol in a vehicle not specifically tion” section of this manual. tion of this manual. Failure to follow these designed for a fuel containing more recommendations may result in vehicle than 15% ethanol can adversely affect damage or shortened engine life. Printing : August 2017 Publication No.: OM18EA 0A36U0 Printed in U.S.A. A36-D